B.tech ECE Syllabus AR16 Revised

GMRIT
Academic Regulations, Curriculum and Syllabi
2016
B. Tech.
Electronics & Communication Engineering
Department of Electronics & Communication Engineering

GMR Institute of Technology
Rajam, Andhra Pradesh
(An Autonomous Institute Affiliated to JNTU Kakinada, AP)
NBA Accredited and NAAC Accredited

Academic Rules and Regulations
2016

Undergraduate Programmes

GMR Institute of Technology
Rajam 532 127, Andhra Pradesh
(An Autonomous Institute, Affiliated to JNTU, Kakinada, AP)
Accredited by NAAC & NBA

GMR Institute of Technology (GMRIT) | Regulation 2016
Contents

1. Eligibility for Admission……………………………....................................................... iv
2. Duration of B. Tech. Programme……………………………………………………….. iv
3. Branches of Study…………………………………………………………………………….. iv
4. Programme Structure………………………………………………………………………. v
4.1. Credit Distribution for the Courses Offered………………………………… viii
4.2. Structure of the Curriculum……………………………………………………….. viii
4.3. Credits Break-up for Various Category of Courses………………………. x
4.4. Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment.. xi
5. Evaluation Methodology…………………………………………………………………... xii
5.1. Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses…………………………... xii
6. Attendance Requirements………………………………………………………………... xvi
7. Promotion Policies…………………………………………………………………………… xvi
8. Graduation Requirements………………………………………………………………… xvii
9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses……………………………………………………. xix
10. Withdrawal from Examination…………………………………………………………. xix
11. Curriculum……………………………………………………………………………………… xx
ii

The Vision of GMRIT

v To be among the most preferred institutions for engineering and technological
education in the country
v An institution that will bring out the best from its students, faculty and staff – to learn,
to achieve, to compete and to grow – among the very best
v An institution where ethics, excellence and excitement will be the work religion, while
research, innovation and impact, the work culture

The Mission of GMRIT

v To turnout disciplined and competent engineers with sound work and life ethics
v To implement outcome based education in an IT-enabled environment
v To encourage all-round rigor and instill a spirit of enquiry and critical thinking among
students, faculty and staff
v To develop teaching, research and consulting environment in collaboration with
industry and other institutions

iii

Academic Regulations for B. Tech. Programme*

(For all the batches of candidates admitted in the Academic Year 2016–2017 and subsequently)

1. Eligibility for Admission

The total seats available as per the approved intake are grouped into two categories viz.
category A and Category B with a ratio of 70:30 as per the state government guidelines vide G.O
No.52

a. The admissions for category A and B seats shall be as per the guidelines of Andhra
Pradesh State Council for Higher Education (APSCHE) in consonance with
government reservation policy.
v Under Category A: 70% of the seats are filled through EAMCET counseling.
v Under Category B: 30% seats are filled based on 10+2 merits in compliance
with guidelines of APSCHE

b. Admission eligibility-Under Lateral Entry Scheme

Students with diploma qualification have an option of direct admission into 2nd year
B. Tech. (Lateral entry scheme). Under this scheme 20% seats of sanctioned intake
will be available in each course as supernumerary seats. Admissions to this three
year B Tech later entry Programme will be through ECET. The maximum period to
complete B. Tech. under lateral entry scheme is six consecutive academic years from
the date of joining.

2. Duration of the Programme

The course duration for the award of the Degree in Bachelor of Technology will be four
academic years, with two semesters in each year. However if a student is unable to complete the
course within 4 years, he/ she can do so by giving more attempts but within 8 consecutive
academic years from the date of admission.

Academic Calendar

For all the eight semesters a common academic calendar shall be followed in each semester by
having sixteen weeks of instruction, one week for the conduct of practical exams and with three
weeks for theory examinations and evaluation. Dates for registration, sessional and end
semester examinations shall be notified in the academic calendar of every semester. The
schedule for the conduct of all the curricular and co-curricular activities shall be notified in the
planner.

3. Branches of Study

B. Tech. Programmes

I. Chemical Engineering (CH)

II. Civil Engineering (CE)

*
Approved in the Academic Council Meeting held on March 24, 2018 (Satruday)
iv

III. Computer Science and Engineering (CS)

IV. Electrical and Electronics Engineering (EE)
V. Electronics and Communication Engineering (EC)
VI. Information Technology (IT)
VII. Mechanical Engineering (ME)
VIII. Power Engineering (PE)

4. Programme Structure

The curriculum will consist of courses of study (Theory, Practical, Contemporary Courses,
Mini Project, Term Papers, Project, Audit Courses, Self-study Courses, MOOCs, Summer
Internship and Full Semester Internship and Courses related Employability Skills) and
syllabi as prescribed by the respective Boards of Studies from time to time. The curriculum is
bifurcated into FSI and Non-FSI modes from 7th semester onwards.

Every student will be required to opt for six elective courses spanned across the semester from
4th to 8th semester from the list of electives as prescribed in the curriculum. Under Choice Based
Credit System (CBCS), the students may take one elective from the list of open electives offered
by other branches of engineering technology in consultation with their respective department.

a. Integrated Courses: Integrated courses are exclusively designed to provide a

unique learning experience to the students with the concept of layered learning
where in the students have the chances to practice while learning. These courses
designed by blending both theory and laboratory components in their core
curriculum and will be evaluated for 130 marks.
b. Contemporary Courses: These courses are designed with the help of experts from
industries and driven by experts from industries along with the internal faculty
members on the recent developments in core areas of engineering and technology.
These courses shall be registered as an elective course during their course of study
c. Mini Project: The curriculum offers Mini Projects in two different forms viz: (i) Mini
Project as a mandatory component in all lab courses (ii) 2 credit Mini Project during
5th or 6th semester. With respect to second one (ii) students will take mini project
batch wise and the batches will be divided as similar to lab courses. The report will
be evaluated by a committee as nominated by CoE constituted with internal &
external panels
d. Term Paper: The Term Paper is a self-study report and shall be carried out either
during 5th or 6th semester in choice with Mini Project. Every student will take up
this term paper individually and submit a report. The scope of the term paper could
be an exhaustive literature review choosing any engineering concept with reference
to standard research papers or an extension of the concept of earlier course work in
consultation with the term paper supervisor. The report will be evaluated by a
committee as nominated by HoD with the approval of CoE
v

e. Project work: The final project work shall be carried out during the 8th semester in
the non- FSI Model. Projects will be taken up batch wise. Internal evaluation will be
done by the Project Review Committee (PRC), comprising of HOD and two senior
faculty members along with the project supervisor. Semester end evaluation will be
done by Project Evaluation Committee (PEC) comprising of three members
including HOD, project guide and an external examiner nominated by the CoE
f. Audit Courses: Audit courses are among the compulsory courses and do not carry
any credits. All the students shall register for one Audit courses in the beginning of
3rdsemester. List of the courses will be notified at the beginning of the third
semester for all students and the student has to choose one audit course under self-
study mode at the beginning of third semester. All the students (regular and lateral
entry students) shall complete the audit course similar to other regular courses and
the results will be indicated with “Satisfactory” or “Not Satisfactory” performance.
g. Self-Study Courses: Self-study courses are the courses which are more similar to
theory courses where in the students learn the courses on independent mode. The
evaluation and assessment pattern for such courses shall be carried out as similar to
regular theory course. These courses shall be opted after getting proper approval
from the respective head of the department as well from the other head of the
department which is offering the course. The credits earned through these self-
study courses over and above the mandatory courses, and it will not be accounted in
CGPA calculation.
h. MOOCs: Meeting with the global requirements, to inculcate the habit of self-learning
and in compliance with UGC guidelines, MOOC (Massive Open Online Course) have
been introduced as electives
v The proposed MOOCs would be additional choices in all the elective
groups subject to the availability during the respective semesters and
respective departments will declare the list of the courses at the
beginning of the semester, which are having a minimum of 45 hours in a
given semester
v Course content for the selected MOOCs shall be drawn from respective
MOOCs links or shall be supplied by the department. Course will be
mentored by faculty members and Assessment & evaluation of the
courses shall be done by the department
v Three credits will be awarded upon successful completion of each
MOOCs
i. Summer Internship: As a part of curriculum in all branches of Engineering, it is
mandatory for all students to undergo summer internship Programme at industries
(core or allied) / R & D organization to get practical insight of their subject domain
during summer break after the 4th semester. This summer internship Programme
shall be availed to a maximum duration of 4 weeks and the assessment shall be
vi

carried out with both internal and external experts leading to “Satisfactory” and
“Non-Satisfactory Performance” and it will not be accounted for the calculation of
CGPA
j. Employability Skills: It is mandatory for all students to take a course on
Employability Skills from 3rd Semester to 6th Semester. The Employability Skills are
covered under two broad streams viz. Aptitude skills and Soft Skills. The credits
earned through these courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and will not be
taken into account for CGPA calculation.
k. Industry Driven One Credit Courses (IDC): Meeting with the industry
requirements, to reduce the gap between industry and academia this one credit (15
hrs.) course has been introduced over and above regular courses from 3rd Semester
to 6th Semester for the interested students. The credits earned through these
courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and will not be taken into account for
CGPA calculation.
l. Full Semester Internship: Students can opt for full semester Internship
Programme at industries based on their self-interest either during 7th or 8th
semester to get practical insight relevant to their core branch of engineering or in
allied branch of study under the guidance of internal and external expert members
in the institute and at Industries respectively. All Students who wish to choose FSI
pattern shall exercise this option well before the commencement of 7th semester.
Students who wish to take FSI during 8th semester will have to take one additional
course in 7th semester when compared with Non FSI stream. In case of some
extraordinary cases, students may be permitted to choose the FSI pattern even
before the commencement of 8th semester. In all such cases student shall take one
additional course offered during 8th semester under self-study mode and acquire
the required credits.
i. Minimum CGPA cut-off up to 5th semester as prescribed by CDC
ii. Competency mapping
iii. Students who opt for FSI either in 7th or 8th will be provided with Internship
subject the availability/selection by the industries

Further the credits earned through FSI Programme will be indicated in the grade sheet
and will be accounted for the calculation of CGPA.
FSI final evaluation will be done by the FSI Review Committee (FSIRC), comprising of
HOD, one senior faculty member and External (Industry) expert nominated by HOD.

vii

4.1. Credit Distribution for Courses Offered

No Course Credits
1 Theory Course 3
2 Integrated Course 4
3 Laboratory/Drawing Course 2
4 MOOCs 3
5 Elective courses 3
6 Audit Course 0
7 Term Paper 2
8 Mini Project 2
9 Summer Internship 0
10 Project work 10
11 Full Semester internship 16
Co-curricular and Extra-Curricular
12 2
Activities(CCEC)
13 Employability Skills (ES) 2
14 Industry Driven One Credit Courses (IDC) 1
4.2. Structure of curriculum

Following are the TWO models of course patterns out of which any student shall choose
one model based on the notified criteria for selection.
a. Full Semester Internship (FSI) Model

b. Non Full Semester Internship Model

In the Full semester internship Model, the students selected/opted for internship will be
distributed in both the 7th and 8th semester based on the internships available. In the Non
Full Semester Internship Model, all the selected students shall carry out the Project work
as per the norms.
A. Course Pattern for Four year Regular Programme (FSI)
Total
Sem. No. of Theory Courses No. of Lab Courses
Credits
I 21
5 3
II 21
III 3 + Employability Skills+ CCEC 25
6(5 Theory + 1 Integrated) 3+ CCEC Activities+
IV 25 + 1 + 1
Employability Skills
Summer Internship (Audit course) 0
6 (4 Compulsory Theory + 1 1+ Term paper/Mini Project +
V 23
Integrated + 1 Elective) Employability Skills + CCEC
6 + Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project +
VI (3 Compulsory Theory + 1 CCEC Activities + Employability 23 + 1+1
Integrated + 2 Elective) Skills
VII Full semester internship 16
viii

VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

16+Term paper +Mini project+
Internship +CCEC +
Total 34+4+1 Audit courses 174
Employability Skills+ Audit
Course

B. Course Pattern for Four Year Regular Programme (Non - FSI)

Total
Credits
I 21
5 3
II 21
III 3+ Employability Skills + CCEC 25
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated)
IV 3+ Employability Skills +CCEC 25 + 1+1
V 23
Integrated + 1 Elective) Employability Skills+ CCEC
6+ Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project+
VII 3 (1 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 13
VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

16+Term paper + Mini project +

36+4+1 Audit courses Project work + CCEC + 174
Total

C. Course Pattern for Three Year Lateral Entry Programme (FSI)

Total
Credits
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated) 3+ CCEC Activities+ Employability
IV 25 + 1+1
Skills
V 23
6+ Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project
VII Full semester internship 16
VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16
Total 24+4+1 Audit courses 10 + Term paper +Mini project+ 132
ix

Internship report +CCEC +


D. Course Pattern for Three year Lateral Entry Programme (Non FSI)

Total
Credits
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated)
3+ CCEC Activities+ Employability
IV 24 + 1+1
Skills
V 23
6 + Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project +
VII 3 (1 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 13
VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

10 + Term paper +Mini project+
Total 26+4+1 courses Internship report +CCEC + 132

4.3 Credit Break-up for Various Category of Courses
a. For Four year regular Programme (FSI)

Total Theory Courses : 34 @ 3 credits each = 102

(29 Core Courses + 5 Elective Courses)
Total Integrated Courses : 4 @ 4 credits each = 16
Total Laboratory Courses : 16 @ 2 credits each = 32
Term Paper with self-study report : 1 @ 2 credits = 2
Mini Project with self-study report : 1@ 2 credits = 2
CCEC Activities : 2 @ 1 credits = 2
Employability skills : 2@ 1 credits = 2
FSI internship : 1 @ 16 credits = 16
b. For Four year regular Programme (Non FSI)


x


Project work : 1 @ 10 credits = 10

c. For three year lateral entry Programme (FSI)


Internship report : 1 @ 16 credits = 16

d. For three year lateral entry Programme (Non FSI)


Project work : 1 @ 10 credits = 10

4.4 Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment

Marks Marks for

Course Continuous Semester end
Assessment Assessment
Theory 40 60
Integrated Course 40 (60T+30L)
Drawing courses 25 50
Laboratory 25 50
Term Paper 50 --
Audit Courses 50 --
Mini Project 25 50
Industry Driven Courses (IDC) 25 --
Full semester Internship 200 200
Project work 100 100

xi

5. Evaluation Methodology
a. The assessment will be based on the performance in the semester-end examinations and /
or continuous assessment, carrying marks as specified in Clause 10
b. At the end of each semester, final examinations will normally be conducted during
October/November and during April / May of each year. Supplementary examinations may
also be conducted at such times as may be decided by the Institute
c. Continuous Assessment Marks will be awarded on the basis of Continuous Evaluation made
during the semester as per the scheme given in Clause 10
d. The letter grade and the grade points are awarded based on the hybrid grading system
having earned grades and awarded grades. Grading is done based on the percentage of
marks secured by a candidate in individual course as detailed below:

Range of Percentage Letter Qualitative Grade
of Marks Grade Meaning Point
90-100 A+ Outstanding 10
Earned grade
85-89 A Excellent 9
Due to relative B+ Very Good 8
grading system the B Good 7
ranges of marks may C+ Average 6 Awarded grade
vary for each course C Satisfactory 5
based on the normal D Pass 4
distribution of marks
< 40 for theory and F Fail 0
Earned grade
< 50 for Lab

e. After completion of the Programme, the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) from the I
Semester to VIII Semester (from III to VIII semester for lateral entry) is calculated using the
formula:
!!!
!!! (𝑐! ×𝑔! )
𝐶𝐺𝑃𝐴 = !!!
!!! 𝑐!
Where n is the number of courses registered for, ‘ci’ is the credits allotted to the given
course and ‘gi’ is the grade point secured in the corresponding course.

5.1 Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses
a. Theory Course
• Out of 40 marks allotted for continuous assessment 30 marks will be awarded based
on two tests (Each Test will be conducted for 40 marks and scale down to 30 marks)
conducted and 10 marks shall be awarded based on assignment test given below:
Internal Test 1 & Test 2 : 30 Marks (80 % of marks secured in 1st best internal tests
and 20% marks secured in 2nd best internal test)
• The duration of each internal test will be 90 minutes addressing predominantly
on lower order thinking skills and shall cover two units of syllabus in each test
• All the students will be notified with the marks secured within one week after the
completion of the sessional exams
xii

• Students are permitted for reconciliation with in a period of two working days
after the notification of marks
• The evaluation methodology of Design and Drawing Courses coming under
theory will be given in their respective course handouts which will be approved
by department HOD.

Assignment Test : 10 Marks (Test will be conducted for 30 marks and scale
scale down to 10 marks)
• The duration of each test will be 120 minutes predominantly focusing on Higher
Order Thinking Skills covering all the possible range of all such HOTs. In case, if
the course has little scope of HOTs, assessment shall be carried out with LOTs

b. Integrated Course

40 marks allotted for continuous assessment as given below:

Theory Course
20 marks will be awarded based on two tests conducted similar to theory( Each Test
will be conducted for 40 marks and scale down to 20 marks) as given below:
Internal Test 1 & Test 2 : 20 Marks (80 % of marks secured in 1st best internal tests
and 20% marks secured in 2nd best internal test)
Laboratory
20 marks are awarded for continuous assessment and following is the pattern for the
award of 20 marks

Preparation, Observation & Result : 10 Marks

Record : 05 Marks
Internal Test : 05 Marks
External Exam (Lab) : 30 Marks
External Exam (Theory) : 60 Marks
c. Laboratory Course:
25 marks are awarded for continuous assessment and following is the pattern for
the award of 25 marks

Without Mini Project:

Record : 05 Marks

Viva – Voce : 05 Marks
With Mini Project (through Augmented Experiments):
Record : 05 Marks
Viva – Voce : 05 Marks

Augmented Experiment : 05 Marks
xiii

Engineering drawing course is evaluated in line with lab courses and the
pattern of awarding 25 marks for continuous evaluation is as following

Day-to-day work : 15 marks

Internal test : 10 marks

There shall be two internal tests for 10 marks each during the semester and the
average shall be considered.

d. Term Paper
Continuous Assessment : 50 Marks

Distribution
Literature Survey : 10 Marks
Review 1 : 15 Marks
Review 2 : 15 Marks
Final Presentation : 10 Marks
e. Audit Courses

Online Objective Test : 50 Marks

f. Mini Project

Distribution
Review 1 : 05 Marks
Review 2 : 05 Marks

g. Project

Distribution
Innovativeness of the Project : 05 Marks
Experimentation / Simulation : 20 Marks
Result Analysis : 05 Marks
Review 1 : 20 Marks
Review II : 20 Marks
Project Report : 10 Marks

h. Full Semester Internship

Distribution
Internship Progress Report : 20 Marks
xiv

On Site Assessment : 30 Marks

Assessment by Industry : 100 Marks
(Intern Assessment Tool)
Final Assessement on Campus : 50 Marks
Total : 200 Marks
Distribution
Project Report : 120 Marks

i. Co-Curricular and Extra Curricular (CCEC) Activities

Students shall acquire 1 credit each in 2nd and 3rd years with the following
scheme:
Scheme of evaluation for the CCEC activities:
• No. of slots in each Semester @ 2 slots every week : 24
• No. of Stream (2-CC + 1-EC) : 3
• No. of slots allotted for each stream : 8

Requirement for the award of 1- Credit

• Students shall choose at least two streams of events in each semester
• Students shall secure 75% attendance in each stream of events to obtain
a certificate
• Students shall obtain 2 certificates of Participation in each semester.

The credits earned through these courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and
will not be taken into account for CGPA calculation.

j. Employability Skills (ES)

Students have to take up these courses from 3rd – 6th semesters. In both streams i.e
Aptitude Skills & Soft Skills (AS and SS) Students will be assessed in each semester.
Based on the marks secured in continuous assessment, students will be assessed for
AS. Based on the attendance for the various activities scheduled, students will be
assessed for SS. 16 periods are allotted for each stream per semester.

• Assessment for Aptitude skills
Continuous assessment : 30 Marks
Comprehensive Test : 20 Marks

For continuous assessment one examination will be conducted after every 5 weeks for
a maximum of 10 marks each (3x10=30). At the end of the semester a comprehensive
test will conducted for 20 marks. The student shall secure at least 40% marks in each
semester to get qualified.

xv

Assessment of Soft Skills

Continuous Assessment for Soft skill is done based on the participation of the students
in the various activities schedule during each semester. In every semester 6 activities
under SS will be organized and students are expected to attend at least 4 activities to
get qualified.

Student will secure 1 credit at the end of 4th semester and at the end of 6th semester
subject to the condition that he/she secures 40% marks in AS and 75 attendance in SS
in each semester.

h. Industry Driven One Credit Courses
Online Objective Test : 25 Marks
Grading:
Marks 25 ≤ and 20 ≥ : Excellent
Marks 20 < and 15 ≥ : Very Good
Marks 15 < and 10 ≥ : Good
Marks < 10 : Satisfactory

6. Attendance Requirements

a) It is desirable for a candidate to put on 100% attendance in all the subjects.

However, a candidate shall be permitted to appear for the semester end
examination by maintaining at least 75% of attendance on an average in all the
courses in that semester put together
b) The shortage of attendance on medical grounds can be condoned to an extent of
10% provided a medical certificate is submitted to the Head of the Department
when the candidate reports back to the classes immediately after the leave.
Certificates submitted afterwards shall not be entertained. Condonation fee as fixed
by the college for those who put on attendance between ≥ 65% and <75% shall be
charged before the end examinations. Attendance may also be condoned as per the
State Government rules for those who participate in sports, co-curricular and extra-
curricular activities provided their attendance is in the minimum prescribed limits
for the purpose and recommended by the concerned authority
c) In case of the students having overall attendance less than 65% after condonation
shall be declared detained and has to repeat semester again
d) In case of the student having less than 65% of attendance in any of the course
during a particular semester, he/she is not permitted to appear for that particular
course in the semester end examinations. In such cases, the students need to
undergo extra classes during the vacation or at convenient time to earn the shortage
of attendance. After completing the attendance requirements he/she may be
permitted to appear for the examination and it will be treated as a second attempt
e) His / her academic progress and conduct have been satisfactory

7. Promotion Policies

xvi

v In four year B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from 2nd year to 3rd
year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements and earning of minimum 50% of
credits up to 2nd year
v In four year B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from 3rd year to 4th
year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements and earning of minimum 50%
credits up to 3rd year
v In three year lateral entry B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from 3rd
year to 4th year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements and earning of
minimum 50% credits up to 3rd year

8. Graduation Requirements

a) The following academic requirements shall be met for the award of the B. Tech. Degree
v Student shall secure 174 credits for regular B. Tech. Programme and 132 credits for
the students who entered in second year through lateral entry scheme. However, the
CGPA obtained for the best 167 credits (Excluding any one 3 credit course, CCEC and
ES) and 125 credits(Excluding any one 3 credit course, CCEC and ES)respectively
shall be considered for the award of Grade/Class/Division
v A student of a regular Programme who fails to earn 174 credits within eight
consecutive academic years from the year of his/her admission with a minimum CGPA
of 4.0 shall forfeit his/her degree and his/her admission stands cancelled
v A student of a lateral entry Programme who fails to earn 132 credits within six
consecutive academic years from the year of his/her admission with a minimum CGPA
of 4.0 shall forfeit his/her degree and his/her admission stands cancelled

b) Award of degree

Classification of degree will be as follows:

i. CGPA ≥ 7.5 : Degree with Distinction

ii. CGPA ≥6.5 and < 7.5 : Degree with First Class
iii. CGPA ≥5.0 and < 6.5 : Degree with Second Class
iv. CGPA ≥4.0 and < 5.0 : Degree with Pass Class

v First Class with Distinction: A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree
(vide clause 8 (a) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters
(six semesters for lateral entry candidates) at the first opportunity, within eight
consecutive semesters (six consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after
the commencement of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 7.5 and above shall be
declared to have passed in First Class with Distinction. For this purpose the
withdrawal from examination (vide clause 9) will not be construed as an
opportunity for appearance in the examination
v First Class: A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 8 (a)
having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters for
lateral entry candidates) within maximum period of ten consecutive semesters
xvii

(eight consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement
of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 6.5 and above shall be declared to have
passed in First Class
v Second Class : A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 8
(a) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters
for lateral entry candidates) within maximum period of ten consecutive semesters
(eight consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement
of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 5.0 and above shall be declared to have
passed in Second Class
v Degree with Pass Mark : All other candidates who qualify for the award of the
degree shall be declared to have passed in Degree with Pass Mark
c) Grafting
In order to extend the benefit to the students with one/ two backlogs after either 6th
semester or 8th semester, GRAFTING option is provided to the students enabling their
placements and fulfilling graduation requirements. Following are the guidelines for the
Grafting:
v Grafting will be done among the courses within the semester. Shall draw a
maximum of 7 marks from the any one of the cleared courses in the semester and
will be grafted to the failed course in the same semester.
v Students shall be given a choice of grafting only once in the 4 years Programme,
either after 6th semester (Option#1) or after 8th semester (Option#2)
v Option#1: Applicable to students who have maximum of TWO theory courses in 5th
and/or 6th semesters
v Option#2: Applicable to students who have maximum of TWO theory courses in 7th
and/or 8th semesters.
v Eligibility for grafting:
i. Prior to the conduct of the supplementary examination after the
declaration of the 6th or 8th semester results.
ii. She/he must appear in all regular or supplementary examinations as
per the provisions laid down in regulations for the courses s/he
appeals for grafting.
iii. The marks obtained by her/him in latest attempt shall be taken into
account for grafting of marks in the failed course(s).
d) Betterment chance
Student who clears all the subjects up to 6th semester and wish to improve their CGPA
can register and appear for one betterment chance for maximum of any five theory
courses up to 6th semester. Betterment chance can be availed along with 7th and 8th
semester examinations

e) Quick Supplementary Examination
Student who clears all the courses up to 7th semester shall have a chance to appear for
Quick Supplementary Examination to clear the failed courses of 8th semester
xviii

f) All the candidates who register for the semester end examination will be issued
memorandum of marks by the Institute. Apart from the semester wise marks memos,
the institute will issue the provisional certificate subject to the fulfillment of all the
academic requirements

9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses

a. It is mandatory that all the students need to earn the minimum number of credits (as
per clause 8) for the award of B. Tech. degree in their respective disciplines. However a
student can earn more number of credits if they wish, by registering one additional
course, from the list of courses available in the curriculum of all disciplines, over and
above to the existing courses from 4th semester to 6th semester
b. The students who are opting for full semester internship (FSI) in the 7th or 8th Semester,
they are permitted to take the courses as listed in 7th and 8th semester of the curriculum
are from the list of electives furnished in the curriculum
c. The students, who are in non FSI mode, shall register for the project work in the 8th
semester only
d. The student shall be permitted to drop any SSC at any point of time
e. All the courses registered and cleared by a student in this mode will be mentioned in the
Cumulative Grade Memo (CGM) as additional acquired. However the CGPA is calculated
for the best 167/125 credits only (as mentioned in the clause 8)

10. Withdrawal from the Examination

a. A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission by the Principal to withdraw
from appearing for the examination in any course or courses of only one semester
examination during the entire duration of the degree Programme. Also, only ONE
application for withdrawal is permitted for that semester examination in which
withdrawal is sought
b. Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to write
the examination and if it is made prior to the commencement of the examination in that
course or courses and also recommended by the Head of the Department
c. Such Withdrawal from the examination shall be treated as absent for the 1st attempt to
the respective examination and will lose the eligibility for First Class with Distinction
d. The student shall be allowed to drop FSI course either 7th or 8th semester within 4
weeks from the commencement of the FSI Programme due any uncertainty from either
side. In such case s/he will automatically entered into Non-FSI pattern of curriculum,
and s/he needs to register for respective courses in that semester and appear for
semester end examinations. In case if s/he has earned equivalent number of credits or
near to the equivalent number of credits with respect to clause 9, s/he shall forbid the
courses either partially or fully
e. If any student withdraws from FSI course after the stipulated period mentioned in the
clause 10.d, s/he will be considered as detained from the semester. S/he needs to
register for the semester in the next academic year

xix

General

a. s/he represents “she” and “he” both
b. Where the words ‘he’, ‘him’, ‘his’, occur, they imply ‘she’, ‘her’, ‘hers’ also
c. The academic regulations should be read as a whole for the purpose of any interpretation
d. In the case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of
the Chairman, Academic Council will be final

The college may change or amend the academic regulations or syllabi from time to time and the
changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students with effect from the dates
notified by the institute.

11. Curriculum: The curriculum of all the UG Programmes is given below
xx

Department of ECE, GMRIT | Curriculum | Regulation 2016 | Approved in 11th ACM (March 24, 2018)
Department Vision
To be a nationally preferred department of learning for students and teachers alike, with dual
commitment to research and serving students in an atmosphere of innovation and critical
thinking.
Department Mission
1. To provide high-quality education in Engineering to prepare the graduates for a

rewarding career in Electronics and Communication Engineering and related industries,
in tune with evolving needs of the industry.
2. To prepare the students to become thinking professionals and good citizens who would
apply their knowledge critically and innovatively to solve professional and social
problems.
Program Educational Objectives

PEO 1: Excel in their technical and professional careers with the spirit of learning to learn, think
and live by acquiring solid foundation in Science and Engineering.
PEO 2: Contemplate real life problems, design and develop novel products that are technically
sound, economically feasible and socially acceptable.
PEO 3: Embrace ethical attitude and exhibit effective skills in communication, management,
teamwork and leadership qualities.
Program Outcomes
Engineering graduate will be able to
PO 1: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an

engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.(Engineering
knowledge)
PO 2: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering
problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural
sciences, and engineering sciences.(Problem analysis)
PO 3: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or
processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public
health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations.(Design/development of solutions)
PO 4: Use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments,
analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid
conclusions.(Conduct investigations of complex problems)
PO 5: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering and
IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an
understanding of the limitations.(Modern tool usage)
PO 6: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety,
legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional
engineering practice.(The engineer and society)
PO 7: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and
environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable
development.(Environment and sustainability)
PO 8: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms
of the engineering practice.(Ethics)
PO 9: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in
multidisciplinary settings.(Individual and team work)
PO 10: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and
receive clear instructions.(Communication)
PO 11: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management
principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to
manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.(Project management and
finance)
PO 12: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent
and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.(Life-long
learning)
PO 13: Apply the knowledge of technological evolutions, model / character the devices and
design the integrated as to build analog and digital systems. (Program Specific)
PO 14: Understand and apply the fundamentals of communication and signal processing to
develop systems wrapped with industry standard protocols and standards. (Program
the integrated as to build analog and digital systems. (Program Specific)
Specific)
CURRICULUM FEATURES
UNDER ACADEMIC REGULATION 2016
1. Choice based credit system

2. Types of learning strategies
Curriculum is designed and developed in such a way that it provides a high degree of
flexibility to promote a learner centric environment through different types of learning
strategies viz. Independent learning, collaborative learning and interactive learning.
 Independent learning
o Self study elective courses
o Self study topics in each unit in all the courses
 Collaborative Learning
o Laboratory classes
o Mini projects in all laboratory courses
o Main project to demonstrate all the possible learning outcomes
 Interactive Learning
o Tutorial classes in all the courses wherever possible
3. Industry engagement
 Industry driven 3-credit elective courses
 Industry driven 1-credit courses from 3rd semester onwards
 Summer internship (One month duration) at the end of 2nd year during the program
of study
 Full semester internship (FSI) (Six month) during fourth year during the program of
study
4. Layered learning
5. Research oriented electives in the form of term paper
6. Credited courses for employability skills, extra - and co - curricular activities
7. Assessment pattern for all courses in accordance with revised Bloom’s taxonomy
8. Distribution of courses
B.Tech –ECE-Course Structure

[Minimum Credits to be earned: 174 (for regular students)/132(for Lateral entry students)]
First Semester
Periods
No Course Code Course POs
L T P C
1 16HSX01 English Communication Skills –I 10 3 1 - 3
2 16MAX01 Engineering Mathematics –I 1,2 3 1 - 3
3 16PYX01 Engineering Physics 1,2 3 1 - 3
4 16MEX01 Engineering Mechanics 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
5 16CSX01 Problem solving using C 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
6 16PYX02 Engineering Physics Lab 4 - - 3 2
7 16CSX02 Problem solving using C Lab 4 - - 3 2
8 16MEX02 Engineering Drawing 4,9,10 - - 3 2
Total 15 5 9 21
Second Semester
1 16HSX03 English Communication Skills –II 10 3 1 - 3
2 16MAX02 Engineering Mathematics –II 1,2 3 1 - 3
3 16CYX01 Engineering Chemistry 1,2 3 1 - 3
4 16EEX01 Basic Electrical Engineering 1,3 3 1 - 3
5 16CHX01 Environmental Studies 1,3,6,7 3 1 - 3
6 16HSX02 English Communication Skills Lab 10 - - 3 2
7 16CYX02 Engineering Chemistry Lab 4 - - 3 2
8 16MEX03 Engineering Workshop 1,2,10,12 - - 3 2
Total 15 5 9 21
Third Semester
Periods
L T P C
1 16MA304 Complex Variables 1,2,13 3 1 - 3
2 16EC302 Digital Electronics 1,2,3,13 3 1 - 3
3 16EC303 Electronic Devices and Circuits 1,2,3,13 3 1 - 3
4 16EC304 Linear Circuit Analysis 1,2,4,5,14 3 - 2 4
5 16EC305 Random Variables & Stochastic Processes 1,2,14 3 1 - 3
6 16EC306 Signals & Systems 1,2,14 3 1 - 3
7 16EC307 Digital Electronics lab 1,2,4,13 - - 3 2
8 16EC308 Electronic Devices and Circuits Lab 2,3,4,13 - - 3 2
9 16EC309 Signals and Systems Lab 2,14 - - 3 2
10 16HSX05 CCEC Activities I 9,10 - - 3 -
11 16ESX1A Employability Skills I - 2 - -
Total 18 7 14 25
Fourth Semester
1 16EE410 Linear Control Systems 1,2,13,14 3 1 - 3
2 16IT306 Object Oriented Programming through 1,2,3,5,13
3
java 3 1 -
3 16EC403 Analog Communications 1,2,14 3 1 - 3
4 16EC404 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves 1,2,14 3 1 - 3
5 16EC405 Electronic Circuit Analysis 1,2,3,13,14 3 1 - 3
6 16EC406 Pulse and Digital Circuits 1,2,3,5,13 3 - 2 4
7 16IT309 Java Lab 4,5 - - 3 2
8 16EC408 Analog Communications lab 4,7,8,9,10,11,13 - - 3 2
9 16EC409 Electronic Circuits Lab 4,5, 8,9,10,13,14 - - 3 2
10 16HSX05 CCEC Activities I 9,10 - - 3 1
11 16ESX1B Employability Skills II - 2 - 1
Total 18 7 14 27
Fifth Semester
Periods
L T P C
1 16EC501 Antennas and Wave Propagation 1,2,3,14 3 1 - 3
2 16EC502 Digital Communications 1,2,3,14 3 1 - 3
3 16EC503 Linear IC Applications 1,2,3,13,14 3 1 - 3
4 16EC504 Structured Digital Design 1,2,3,4,5,13 3 - 2 4
5 16EC505 VLSI Design 1,2,3,13 3 1 - 3
6 Elective I / CC 3 1 - 3
7 16EC507 Digital Communications Lab 1,2,4,14 - - 3 2
8 16EC508/ 2,3,4,5,9,10,11,13,14 - - 3 2
Term Paper/Mini project
16EC509
9 16HSX06 CC & EC Activities II 9,10 - - 3 -
10 Summer Internship 8,9 - - - -
11 16ESX2A Employability Skills III - 2 - -
Total 18 7 11 23
Sixth Semester
1 16EC601 Cellular and Mobile Communications 1,2,3,14 3 1 - 3
2 16EC602 Digital Signal Processing 1,2,3,14 3 1 - 3
3 16EC603 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 1,2,3,4,5,13 3 - 2 4
4 16EC604 Microwave Engineering 1,2,14 3 1 - 3
5 Elective II/CC 3 1 - 3
6 Elective III (Open Elective) 3 1 - 3
7 16EC607 Linear IC Applications Lab 2,3,4,13,14 - - 3 2
8 16EC509/ 2,3,4,5,9,10,11,13,14 - - 3 2
Mini Project/Term paper
16EC508
9 Audit Course 8,12 - - - -
10 16HSX06 CC & EC Activities II 9,10 - - 3 1
11 16ESX2B Employability Skills IV - 2 - 1
Total 18 7 11 25
Seventh Semester
Periods
L T P C
1 Engineering Economics and Project 11 3 1 - 3
16HSX04
Management
2 Elective IV/CC 3 1 - 3
3 Elective V/CC 3 1 - 3
4 16EC703 Digital Signal Processing Lab 1,2,4,14 - - 3 2
5 16EC704 Microwave Engineering Lab 2,3,4, 8,10 - - 3 2
6 16EC705 Full Semester Internship* 8,9,10,12 - - - 16
Total 9 3 6 13/16
Eighth Semester
1 16EC801 Professional Ethics and Standards 6,7,8,12 3 1 - 3
2 16EC802 Wireless Sensor Networks 1,2,3,14 3 1 - 3
3 Elective VI 3 1 - 3
4 16EC804 Project work 2,3,4,5,9,10,11,13,14 - - - 10
5 16EC706 Full Semester Internship** 8,9,10,12 - - - 16
Total 9 3 - 19/16
*Student who opt for FSI-16EC705 during 7th semester, have to register one more additional elective and 16EC703
& 16EC704 as an additional lab courses during 8th semester
** Student the who opt for FSI-16EC705 during 8th semester, have to register an additional course in consultation
with HoD during 7th semester
List of Elective Courses, Contemporary Courses, Audit Courses, Employability Skills and
One Credit Courses
Elective I
Periods
L T P C
1 16CS303 Computer Organization and Architecture 2,3,13 3 1 - 3
2 16EC001 Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation 1,2 3 1 - 3
3 16EC002 Transmission Lines and Waveguides 1,2 3 1 - 3
4 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective II
1 16IT404 Computer Networks 1,2,13 3 1 - 3
2 16CS304 Database Management Systems 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
3 16EC003 Optical Communication and Networks 1,2 3 1 - 3
4 - - - 3
Elective III(Open Electives –Mathematics, Chemistry, Entrepreneurship Skills, Industrial Safety
and Engineering & Technology)
1 16CE007 Disaster Management 2 3 1 - 3
2 16EE004 Renewable Energy Sources 2,7 3 1 - 3
3 16ME009 Principles of Entrepreneurship 1,5,8,11 3 1 - 3
4 16EC004 Fundamentals of Global Positioning System 1,2,6,13 3 1 - 3
5 16CS006 Computational Intelligence 3,5,6 3 1 - 3
6 16CS007 IoT Engineering Applications 1,5 3 1 - 3
7 16CH007 Industrial Safety and Hazard Management 1,2,3,6,8 3 1 - 3
8 16IT005 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing 2,5,6 3 1 - 3
9 16PE007 Smart Grid Technology 3,5 3 1 - 3
10 16MA001 Computational Mathematics 1,2 3 1 - 3
11 16CY001 Nanoscience & Technology 1,12 3 1 - 3
Elective IV
1 16EC005 Digital Image Processing 1,2,3,14 3 1 - 3
2 16EC006 Radar Engineering 1,2,14 3 1 - 3
3 16EC007 Speech Processing 1,2,3,14 3 1 - 3
4 16EC008 Wavelet Theory and its Applications 1,2,3,14 3 1 - 3
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective V
1 16EC009 Biomedical Signal Processing 1,2,3,14 3 1 - 3
2 16EC010 Electromagnetic Interference and 1,2,7 3 1 - 3
Compatibility
3 16EC011 Embedded Systems 1,2,3,13 3 1 - 3
4 16EC012 RF Circuit Design 1,2,3,13,14 3 1 - 3
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective VI
1 16EE502 Power Electronics 1,2,3 3 1 - 3
2 16CS004 Real Time Operating Systems 1,2,13 3 1 - 3
3 16EC013 Adaptive Signal Processing 1,2,3,14 3 1 - 3
4 16EC014 Analog and Mixed Signal Design 1,2,3,13 3 1 - 3
5 16EC015 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic 1,2,3,13,14 3 1 - 3
6 16EC016 Satellite Communications 1,2,14 3 1 - 3
7 MOOCs - - - 3
Contemporary Courses (CC)
1 16EC017 ARM Processor Architecture and Applications 1,2,3,13 3 1 - 3
2 16EC018 ASIC Design 1,2,3,13 3 1 - 3
3 16EC019 Software Defined Radio 2,3,5,13,14 3 1 - 3
4 16EC020 Testing of VLSI Circuits 1,2,13,14 3 1 - 3
5 16CSX16 Digital Marketing (Self Study Mode) 1,2,3,4,5,14 - - - 1
One Credit Course (s)3

1 16ECI01 Modelling and Simulation of Basic Electronic
1 - - 1
System
2 16ECI02 Efficient Design of RF Transceiver 1 - - 1
3 16ECI03 Antenna Design 1 - - 1
4 16ECI04 Internet of Things 1 - - 1
5 16ECI05 Full Custom VLSI Design 1 - - 1
Audit Courses
Contemporary India: Economy, Polity &
1 16AT001
society (ME)
2 16AT002 Indian Heritage and Culture (EEE)
3 16AT003 Intellectual Property Rights and Patents (ECE)
4 16AT004 Introduction to Journalism (CSE)
Professional Ethics and Morals (CE) ------
5 16AT005
Science, Technology and Development
6 16AT006
(Chem)
7 16AT007 Industrial sociology (PE)
8 16AT008 Organizational Behavior (IT)
9 16AT009 Communication Etiquette in workplaces(BSH)
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016. Approved in 11th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16HSX01 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS I

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Infer explicit and implicit meaning of a text
2. Construct clear, grammatically correct sentences using a variety of sentence structures
3. Analyze and Produce various types & formats of emails, letters in formal & informal ways to meet
particular purposes
4. Select and apply appropriate words and phrases in different contexts
5. Formulate and present ideas effectively in spoken form
6. Discuss social issues with concern and imagine possible solutions
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO10
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
CO6 3
3–Strongly linked | 2–Moderately linked | 1–Weakly linked
Unit I
In London by M. K. Gandhi
Using appropriate word/phrases, synonyms and antonyms, nouns, pronouns, paragraph writing, changing
autobiography into biography
Montgomery Bus Boycott
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Pecuniary Independence by P. T. Barnum
Using appropriate word/phrases, synonyms and antonyms, Adjectives, Adverbs, Note-making, Rewriting
sentences and Short talk
TED-Sashi Tharoor
12+3 Hours
Unit III
The Drunkard by W. H. Smith
Similes, Rhythmic expressions, One-word substitution, Describing people, Synonym and Antonyms, Tenses
(past and present), Gerund and Verbal Adjective, Summarizing, essay writing, writing paragraph
Essay writing tips
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Three Days to see by Hellen Keller
Deriving words, adjective formation, Tenses (future), prefixes, ModalAuxiliary verbs, Dialogue writing,
Expressing opinions/ideas, collecting information
Famous Indians with disability
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. M. S. Rama Murty and M. Hariprasad, Prose for Communication Skills, Ravindra Publishing House,
Hyderabad, 2012
1
Reference (s)
1. J. Seely, Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking, OUP, 2013
2. Quirk, Greenbaum, Leech and Svartvk, A Comprehensive Grammar of the English language, Pearson,
India, 2010
3. R. Murphy, English Grammar in Use, 4th Ed, CUP, Cambridge, 2012
4. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Montgomery_Bus_Boycott
5. https://www.ted.com/talks/shashi_tharoor?language=en
6. http://www.internationalstudent.com/essay_writing/essay_tips
7. http://www.thebetterindia.com/16449/famous-indians-with-disability
Internal Assessment Pattern

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 1 (%)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 25 25 -
Apply 50 50 40
Analyze - - 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Find a synonym for each of the following words.
i. Emulate ii. Mend
2. Find an antonym for each of the following words
i. Intensive ii. Extravagance
Understand
1. Sketch the personality of Edward Middleton as he emerges from the conversation in the play.
2. Summarize Gandhi’s attempts to model himself on the English gentleman and which circumstances
force him to realize that he has been pursuing a false idea?
Apply
1. Construct a dialogue between students about organizing music club activities in their college.
2. Construct a dialogue between two friends about how they plan their own careers.
Analyze and Create

1. Prepare an essay in about 300 words on ‘some concrete measures to combat pollution.
2. Create an imaginary conversation between a blind boy and his friend on their visit to a drama.
1
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
2
16MAX01 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS I

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Classify and solve analytically a wide range of first and higher order ordinary differential equations
with constant coefficients
2. Apply the knowledge of Mean value theorems, Maxima and Minima of functions of several variables
3. Analyze the characteristics and trace the curve of an equation
4. Adapt methods for measuring lengths, volumes, surface area of an object and transformation of
coordinates in practical situations
5. Utilize basic knowledge of conservative field, potential function and work done in engineering
problems
6. Identify the relationships between line, surface and volume integrals
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Differential Equations
Differential equations of first order and first degree–exact, linear and Bernoulli Applications to Newton’s Law
of cooling, Law of natural growth and decay, orthogonal trajectories, Non-homogeneous linear differential
equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients with RHS term of the type e ax, Sin ax, cos ax,
polynomials in x, eaxV(x), xV(x)
Heat flow problems–Variation of parameters 11+4 Hours
Unit II
Mean Value Theroms and Functions of Several Variables
Generalized Mean Value theorem (All theorems without proof), Functions of several variables-Partial
differentiation, Functional dependence, Jacobian, Maxima and Minima of functions of two variables with
constraints and without constraints. Curve tracing-Cartesian-Polar and Parametric curves
Rolle’s, Lagrange’s and Cauchy’s mean value theorems–Generalized Mean Value theorem proofs
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Applications of Integration
Applications of Integration to Lengths, Volumes and Surface areas of revolution in Cartesian and Polar
Coordinates. Multiple integrals-double and triple integrals, change of variables (Cartesian and Polar
coordinates), Change of order of Integration
Applications of Integration–Centroid–Mass 12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Vector Calculus
Vector Differentiation-Gradient, Divergence, Curl and their related properties of sums-products,
Laplacianoperator, Vector Integration - Line integral, work done, Potential function, area, surface and volume
integrals, Vector integral theorems: Greens, Stokes and Gauss Divergence Theorems (All theorems without
proof) and related problems
Vector identities–Proof of Green’s theorem 11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
3
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42 nd Ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012
2. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9 th Ed., Wiley, 2012
3. R. K. Jain, S. R. K.Iyengar, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4 th Ed., NarosaPublishingHouse,
NewDelhi, 2014
Reference (s)
1. B. V. Ramana, Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009
2. D. S. Chandrashekharaiah, Engineering Mathematics, Volume 1, Prism Publishers, 2010
3. T. K. V. Iyengar, B. Krishna Ghandhi, S. Ranganathan and M.V. S.S.N. Prasad, Engineering
Mathematics, Volume-I, 12th Ed., S. Chand Publishers, 2014
4. U. M. Swamy, P. VijayaLaxmi, K. L. Sai Prasad and M. Phani Krishna Kishore, A Text Book of
Engineering Mathematics–I, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2010

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test2 (%)
Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze - - -
Evaluate -- - 30
Create -- - 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Find the Integrating factor of x 2
  
y  2 xy 2 dx  x3  3x 2 y dy  0

2. Define solenoidal and irrotational for a Vector point function f .
3. Find the volume of solid generated by the revolution of the cardioid r = a(1+cos𝜃) about the initial line
𝜃=0
Understand
1. Solve ( D 2  4 D  4) y  0
d2 y dy
2. Solve 2
 6  25 y  e2 x  Sin x
dx dx
3. Find the volume of the greatest rectangular parallelopiped that can be inscribed in the ellipsoid
x2 y 2 z 2
  1
a 2 b2 c 2
Apply
1. A body originally at 80 0Ccools down to 60 oC in 20 minutes, the temperature of the air being
40oC.What will be the temperature of the body after 40 minutes from original?
∞ ∞ 𝑒 −𝑦
2. Evaluate the integral by the change of order of integration ∫0 ∫𝑥 𝑑𝑦 𝑑𝑥
𝑦
3. Show that the vector (𝑥 2 − 𝑦𝑧)𝑖̅ + (𝑦 2 − 𝑥𝑧)𝑗̅ + (𝑧 2 − 𝑦𝑥)𝑘̅ is irrotational and find its Scalar
potential
Create
1. Apipe 20 cm in diameter contains steam at 200 0C. It is covered by a layer of insulation 6cm thick and
thermal conductivity 0.0003. If the temperarature of the outer surface is 30 oC. Find the heat lose per
hour from 2 meter length of the pipe
2
4
16PYX01 ENGINEERING PHYSICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the concepts of Interference, Diffraction, Polarization and their applications
2. Summarize the concepts of electric fields, magnetic fields and superconductivity and make out the
scope of applications in various engineering fields
3. Outline the quantum mechanics to infer conductivity nature of metals
4. Explain the properties and application of dielectric, magnetic and Nano-materials
5. Demonstrate the emission of laser light, optical fibers and their applications in various Engineering
fields
6. Analyze the engineering Applications based on Fundamental concepts
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Optics
Interference:Superposition of waves-Coherence-Young's double slit experiment-Interference in thin films by
reflection (Qualitative treatment)–Newton's rings.Diffraction: Fresnel and Fraunhoffer diffractions-Fraunhoffer
diffraction at a single slit-Diffraction grating-Grating spectrum, Polarization–Types of Polarization-Double
refraction-Nicol prism-Quarter and Half wave plate. Lasers: Characteristics of laser–Stimulated absorption–
Spontaneous emission-Stimulated emission–Population inversion–Pumping mechanism–Active medium–Laser
systems: Ruby laser-He-Ne laser–Semiconductor laser–Applications of Lasers
Wedge shaped film–Polarization–Holography
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Electrostatics and Electromagnetism
Gauss law in electricity and it’s applications: Coulomb’s law from Gauss law-spherically distributed charge-
Infinite line of charge-Infinite sheet of charges–Ampere's Law-Magnetic field due to current (Biot-Savart’s
Law)-B due to a current carrying wire and a circular loop,-Faraday’s law of induction-Lenz’s law-Induced
fields-Maxwell’s equations (Qualitative treatment)-Hall Effect-Electromagnetic Wave and poynting vector
(Qualitative treatment), Superconductivity–Superconductivity phenomenon-General properties-Meissner effect-
Penetration depth-Type I and type II superconductors-Flux quantization-DC and AC Josephson effect-
Applications of superconductors
Infinite line of charge–Infinite sheet of charges Quantum Interference (SQUID)
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Quantum Theory of Solids–Semiconductors–Optical Fiber
Quantum theory of solids: Dual nature of matter, properties of matter waves-Schrödinger’s wave equation–
Physical significance of wave function–Particle in a box (one dimensional)-Free electron theory of metals,
electrical conductivity-quantum free electron theory–Fermi Dirac Distribution-Kronig-Penney model
(qualitative)-Classification of materials into conductors-semi-conductors & insulators. Semiconductors: Carrier
Concentration (Intrinsic and Extrinsic, qualitative treatment only), Carrier drift, Carrier diffusion, Optical Fiber:
–principle and propagation of light in optical fibers–Numerical aperture and acceptance angle–types of optical
fibers–single and multimode, step index and graded index fibers–applications–fiber optic communication
system
5
Uncertainty principle–Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductor–Fiberoptic sensors

12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Magnetic, Dielectric & Nanomaterials
Magnetic Materials: Origin of magnetic moment (Bohr Magneton)-Classification of Magnetic materials-Dia,
para, ferro, Anti-ferro and Ferri magnetism-Domain and Weiss field theory (qualitative treatment only)-
Hysteresis Curve-Soft and Hard magnetic materials-Applications of magnetic materials
Dielectric Materials: Dielectric Polarization-Electronic, ionic and orientation polarizations (Qualitative treatment)
-Dielectrics in alternating fields-frequency dependence of the Polarizability ((Qualitative treatment), Important
dielectric materials
Nanomaterials: Introduction to nano materials-Physical, mechanical-electrical and optical properties of nano
materials-Preparation techniques of nano materials (Sol-Gel, CVD, Ball Milling)-Nano tubes-Different methods
of preparation carbon nano tubes (CNT’s) (CVD)-Applications of Nanomaterials
Permeability–Magnetization–Dielectric constant–Ferro and Piezo electric effect and materials
10+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Halliday, Resnick and Krane, Physics Part-II, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2012
2. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, 6th Ed., Newage International Publishers, 2015
3. M. R. Srinivasan, Engineering Physics, 2 nd Ed., Newage International Publishers, 2014
4. A. S. Vasudeva, Modern Engineering Physics, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi, 2006
5. C. M. Srivastava and C.Srinivasan, Science of Engineering Materials, Wiley Eastern Pvt. Ltd, 1997
6. C. P. Poole and F. J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley, New Delhi, 2007
Reference (s)
1. R. K. Gour and S. L. Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpathrai Publications, New Delhi, 2002
2. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private LTD, 2010
3. M. Armugam, Engineering Physics, Anuradha Agencies, 2007

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 3(%)
Remember 40 40 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 20 20 80
Analyze - - 20
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Define Principle of Superposition?
2. State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction and Lenz’s law.
3. Summarize Meissenr’s effect of super conductors.
Understand
1. Explain the construction and working principle of Nicole’s prism.
2. Construct Ruby laser and explain its working principle with energy level diagram.
3. Conclude the inferences from the M-H characteristics of Type-1 and Type-2 super conductors.
Apply
3
6
1. List any four applications of lasers with reference to their characteristics.

2. Apply Biot-Savart’s law, and calculate the Magnetic field induction along the infinite length of a straight
conductor at points close to the conductor.
3. Calculate electric field intensity due to infinite line of charge by applying Gauss law.
Analyze
1. Compare Fraunhoffer’s diffraction and Fresnel’s diffractions.
2. Discuss the role of Meta stable states in lasing action.
3. Discuss the BCS theory of Superconductors.
7
16MEX01 ENGINEERING MECHANICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Draw the free body diagram of a given physical system and compute the resultant of a given coplanar
system of forces
2. Estimate the centroid of composite figures and bodies
3. Estimate area moment of inertia and mass moment of inertia of composite figures and bodies
4. Explain concepts of friction and principle of virtual work
5. Summarize power transmission through belts
6. Analyze plane truss (frame) by method of joints and method of sections
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 2 2
4 3 2 2
5 3 2 2
6 2 3 3
Unit I
System of forces-Equilibrium of system of forces
Types of Force systems-Coplanar Concurrent Forces–Resultant–Moment of a Force and its application–
Couples and Resultant of a Force System, Free body diagrams, equations of equilibrium of coplanar concurrent
and non-concurrent force systems, Lami’s theorem, resolution of a force into a force and a couple
Polygon law of forces for resultant
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Centroid-Centre of Gravity-Area Moments of Inertia-Mass Moment of Inertia
Centroids of simple figures (from basic principles)-Centroids of Composite Figures, Centre of gravity of simple
body (from basic principles), center of gravity of composite bodies, Definition–Moments of Inertia of simple
Figures, Polar Moment of Inertia, Transfer Theorem, Moments of Inertia of Composite Figures. Definition,
Moment of Inertia of simple bodies, Transfer Formula for Mass Moments of Inertia
Mass moment of inertia of composite bodies
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Friction-Power transmission through belts
Theory of friction–Angle of friction–Laws of friction-static friction–Kinetic friction, friction in bodies moving
up or down on an inclined plane-Introduction to belt and rope drives, types of belt drives, velocity ratio of belt
drives, slip of belt drives, tensions for flat belt drive, angle of contact, centrifugal tension, maximum tension of
belt
Condition for transmission of maximum power
11+4Hours
Unit IV
Analysis of perfect frames (Analytical Method)-Virtual Work
Types of Frames-Assumptions for forces in members of a perfect frame, Method of joints, Method of sections,
Force table, Cantilever Trusses, Structures with one end hinged and the other freely supported on rollers
carrying horizontal or inclined loads, Principle of Virtual Work-Application of the Principle of Virtual Work-
potential Energy and Equilibrium
Stable and Unstable Equilibrium 11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
8
Textbook (s)
1. K. Vijay Kumar Reddy, J. Suresh Kumar, Singer's Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, BS
Publications, 3rd Edition, 2011
2. A. K. Tayal, Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, Umesh Publications, 14th Edition, 2011
3. S. S. Bhavikatti, Engineering Mechanics, New Age International, 2008
4. S. Timoshenko & D. H. Young, and JV Rao, Engineering Mechanics, 4th Ed., TMH Education, 2006
Reference (s)
1. Irving H. Shames and G. Krishna MohanaRao, Engineering Mechanics, 4 th Ed., Pearson, 2006
2. R. K. Bansal, Engineering Mechanics, Laxmi Publications, 3rd Edition, 2004
Remember 20 20 -
Understand 30 30 -
Apply 50 50 60
Analyze -- - 40
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)
Remember
1. Define centroid
2. List the different types of belt drives
3. Define angle of repose
Understand
1. Explain Lami’s theorem
2. Compare mass moment of inertia and area moment of inertia
3. Explain the difference between frame and truss
Apply
1. Solve the resultant of three forces acting on a hook as shown in below figure
2. Identify the centroid of T-section shown in below figure
3. Solve to find the power transmitted by a belt running over a pulley of 600 mm diameter at 200 r.p.m.
The coefficient of friction between the belt and the pulley is 0.25, angle of lap 160° and maximum
tension in the belt is 2500 N
4
9
16CSX01 PROBLEM SOLVING USING C

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Develop the flow charts and algorithms, and then implement, compile and debug programs in C
language for solving a problem
2. Design programs involving decision structures, loops for problem solving
3. Design programs to develop applications using array data structure
4. Solve scientific problems using functions
5. Make use of pointers to design applications for efficient and dynamic memory allocation
6. Design programs to create/update basic data files
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 3 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2
4 3 3 3
5 2 2 3
6 2 3 3
Unit I
Programming Basics
Introduction, Algorithm / pseudo code, flowchart, program development steps, structure of a C program, Types,
Operators, and Expressions: C-tokens, Variable Names, Data Types and Sizes, Constants, Declarations, C-
operators, Type Conversions, Precedence and Order of Evaluation
Control Flow: Statements and Blocks, If-Else, Else-If, Switch, Loops-While and For, Loops- Do-while, Break
and Continue
Comma and size of operators–Conditional Expressions–goto and Labels
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Arrays and Functions
Array concept, definition, declaration, accessing elements, storing elements, strings and string manipulations, 2-
D arrays, Multidimensional arrays, Array Applications
Basics of Functions, Functions Returning Non-integers, External Variables, Scope Rules, Static Variables,
Block Structure, Storage Classes, user defined functions, standard library functions, recursive functions, passing
Arrays to functions, Functions Applications
Arithmetic operations on string–nesting of functions–preprocessor commands
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Pointers and Structures
Pointer concepts, initialization of pointer variables, pointers and function arguments, passing by address,
dangling memory, address arithmetic, Character pointers and functions, pointers to pointers, dynamic memory
management functions
Basics of Structures, Structures and Functions, Arrays of Structures, Pointers to Structures, Self-referential
Structures, typedef, Unions
Programs on Dynamic memory management using functions–Table Lookup
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
File Structures
Standard Input and Output, Formatted Output-printf, Variable-length Argument Lists, Formatted Input-scanf,
File Access
Data Structures: Introduction to linear and non-linear data Structures, definition: stack, queue
10
Error Handling-stderr and exit–Introduction to Single Linked Lists

11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B. W. Kernighan, Dennis M. Ritchie, The C–Programming Language-, 2nd Ed., PHI, 1990
2. H. Sahni and A. Freed, Fundamentals of Data Structures in C, 2nd Ed., Universities Press, 2008
Reference (s)
1. Y. Kanetkar, Let us C, 8th Ed., BPB Publication, 2004
2. F. E. V. Prasad, C Programming: A Problem-Solving Approach, Giliberg, Cengage, 2010
3. A. S. Tenenbaum, Y. Langsam and M. J. Augenstein,Data Structures using C, Pearson Education, 2009
Remember 25 20 -
Understand 35 40 30
Apply 40 40 40
Analyze - - 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Define computer
2. List out operators
3. What is dangling pointer
Understand
1. Explain structure of a c program
2. Describe linear and nonlinear data structures
3. Explain multidimensional arrays
Apply
1. Implement matrix multiplication using arrays
2. Draw flow chart of program development steps
3. Demonstrate pointe to pointer concept.
Analyze
1. Compare structure and union
2. Differentiate logical and relational operators
3. Classify linear and nonlinear data structures
5
11
16PYX02 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Build the knowledge in the scientific methods and learn the process of measuring different physical
parameters
2. Develop the laboratory skills in handling of electrical and Optical instruments
3. Demonstrate the interference and diffraction phenomena of light
4. Inspect and experience physical principles of Magnetic fields and optical fiber communications
5. Apply the principles of physics and measure the solid state properties of materials
6. Design and analyze experiment based on physics concepts
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Variation of magnetic field along the axis of current-carrying circular coil-Stewart and Gee’s Method
2. Determination of wavelengths of spectral line of mercury spectrum using diffraction grating
3. Determination of radius of curvature of convex lens by forming Newton’s rings
4. LCR circuit- Study of parallel and series Resonance
5. Measurement of thickness of a thin paper using wedge method
6. Fiber optics-Numerical aperture of a given fiber and study of bendig losses
7. Meldie’s Experiment–Transverse and longitudinal modes
8. Determination of wave length of Laser by diffraction grating
9. Determination of Hall Coefficient and charge carrier density of semi-conductor
10. Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor
List of Augmented Experiments6

1. To study the magnetization (M) of a ferromagnetic material in the presence of a magnetic field B and to
plot the hysteresis curve (M vs. B)
2. Study theThermoemf of the thermo couple
3. LCR Series and Parallel–Design of circuit for various resonance frequencies
4. Determination of characteristics of Laser beam
5. Determination of Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field
6. Study of double refraction in calcite crystals
7. Dispersive power of various liquids using spectrometer
8. Photo cell–Characteristics and determination of Planks constant
Reading Material (s)

1. Physics Lab manual–Department of Physics, BS & H, GMRIT, Rajam, 2015
2. Y. Aparna and K. Venkateswararao, Engineering Physics–I and II, VGS Techno series, 2010
3. S. Panigrahi and B. Mallick, Engineering Practical Physics, Cengage leaning, Delhi, 2015
6
Students shall opt any one of the Augmented Experiments in addition to the regular experiments
12
16CSX02 PROBLEM SOLVING USING C LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Implement, compile and debug programs in C language for solving a problem
2. Design programs involving decision structures, loops for problem solving
3. Design programs to develop applications using array data structure
4. Apply functions to solve real world problems
5. Make use of pointers to design applications with efficient use of memory
6. Design programs to create/update basic data files
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Algorithms and Flow charts design and evaluation (Minimum 2)
2. Write C Programs to demonstrate C-tokens and operators
3. Write C Programs to demonstrate Decision Making And Branching (Selection)
4. Write a C program to demonstrate different loops
5. Write a C program to demonstrate arrays
6. Write a C program to demonstrate functions
7. Write a C program to implement the following
A. To manipulate strings using string handling functions.
B. To manipulate strings without using string handling functions
8. Write a C program to demonstrate different library functions
9. Write a C program to implement the following
A. To exchange two values using call by value and reference
B. To multiply two matrices using pointers
10. Write a C program to demonstrate functions using pointers
11. Write a C program to implement the following operations using structure and functions:
i) Reading a complex number ii) Writing a complex number
12. Write a C program
A. To copy data from one file to another
B. To reverse the first n characters in a given file (Note: The file name and n are specified on the
command line)
1. Merging of two arrays
2. Arithmetic operations on two complex numbers
3. Employee's Management System
4. Library management
5. Department store system
6. Personal Dairy Management System
7. Telecom Billing Management System
8. Bank Management System
9. Contacts Management
10. Medical Store Management System

1. C Programming Lab manual–Department of CSE-GMRIT Rajam
7
13
16MEX02 ENGINEERING DRAWING

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Understand Principles of engineering drawing
2. Construct Conic sections using general methods and other methods
3. Construct Orthographic projections of Points, Lines and Planes
4. Construct Orthographic projections of Solids using basic drafting software
5. Construct Isometric projections using basic drafting software
6. Construct Orthographic projections from given isometric projections of an object and vice versa
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO4 PO9 PO10
1 3 3 3
2 3 3 3
3 3 3 3
4 3 3 3
5 3 3 3
6 3 3 3
List of Experiments
Unit I
Conic Sections-Introduction to Orthographic Projections
Construction of conics using general method and other special methods
Orthographic Projections of Points, Straight Lines parallel to both planes, parallel to one plane and inclined to
other plane
9 Hours
Unit II
Orthographic Projections of Straight Lines and Planes
Projections of Straight Lines inclined to both planes; Projections of Planes; Regular Planes Perpendicular
Parallel to one Reference Plane and inclined to other Reference Plane; inclined to both the Reference Planes
Practice the following topics by using any one 2D drafting software
9 Hours
Unit III
Projections of Solids &Isometric Projections
Projections of Prisms, Cylinders, Pyramids and Cones with the axis inclined to one Principal Plane and Parallel
to the other, Projections of Prisms, Cylinders, Pyramids and Cones inclined to both the Principal Planes
Introduction to Isometric Projections, Isometric axes, angles, Isometric views, Construction of Isometric views
of Simple planes and Solids in various positions
15 Hours
Unit IV
Conversion of Engineering Views
Conversion of Orthographic Views of Simple Solid objects into Isometric View, Conversion of Isometric View
of Simple Solid objects into Orthographic Views
9 Hours
Total: 42 Hours
List of Drawing Sheets
1. Conics by General Method
2. Conics by using Special Methods
3. Projections of Points and Straight lines in Simple Positions
4. Projections of Lines inclined to both planes
5. Projections of Planes in Simple positions
14
6. Projections of Planes inclined to both planes

7. Projections of Solids
8. Projections of Solids inclined to both planes
9. Isometric Projections
10. Conversion of Orthographic views into Isometric views
11. Conversion of Isometric views into Orthographic views

1. Draw the Knuckle Pin and fork end of the knuckle joint
2. Draw the Socket and spigot cotter joint
3. Draw the Tommy bar and body of the Screw jack
4. Draw the Cup and Big and Small screws of screw jack
5. Draw the Connecting rod of IC Engine using AutoCAD
6. Draw the Pipe spool with flanges and a valve
7. Draw a sample pipe line construction design in oil and gas industries using AutoCAD
8. Draw the Pipe truss design using AutoCAD
9. Draw a 3-D bolt and nut with Threads using AutoCAD
10. Draw a 3-D Cross head pattern using AutoCAD
11. Draw the sample Bridge using AutoCAD
12. Draw the pipe vice using AutoCAD
13. Draw the Ni-Cd Battery zapper circuit diagram using AutoCAD
14. Draw the circuit diagram of battery charger with automatic cutoff using AutoCAD
15. Draw the satellite dish and Antenna using AutoCAD

Textbook (s)
1. N.D. Bhatt, V. M. Panchal, Pramod R. Ingle, Engineering drawing, Charotar Publications, 54th Edition,
2014
2. D. M. Kulkarni, A.P. Rastogi, Ashoke K. Sarkar, Engineering Graphics with Auto CAD, Prentice Hall
of India, 2nd Edition, 2010
Reference (s)
1. K. C. John, Engineering Graphics for Degree, PHI Publications, 2nd Edition, 2009
2. M. B. Shah and B. C. Rana, Engineering Drawing, Pearson Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2009
3. D. A. Jolhe, Engineering Drawing, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 1st Edition, 2008
8
15
16HSX03 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS II

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Build new academic vocabulary & phrases and make use of them in different contexts
2. Construct clear, grammatically correct sentences using a variety of sentence structures
3. Analyze and Produce various types & formats of emails, letters in formal & informal ways to meet
particular purposes
4. Compose and present ideas logically in written form
5. Organize ideas effectively in spoken form
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO10
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
The Knowledge Society by A. P. J. Abdul Kalam
Forming Negative words, Quantifiers, Letter Writing, Interviews, Scientific Terminology
Famous Indian Scientist Inventions
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Principles of Good Writing by L. A. Hill
Word definitions, Articles, e-mail writing, Debates, Noticing changes in English, Origin and meaning of
borrowed words
Effective writing tips
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Man’s Peril by Bertrand Russell
Deriving nouns, Prepositions, Phrasal verbs, Speeches, Report Writing, Problem solving
Bertrand Russell and Einstein Manifesto
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Shooting an Elephant by George Orwell
Using an appropriate word, conjunctions, voices, Cover letters, Resume, Dialogue writing, Group Discussion
Abridged version of Animal Farm
11+4 Hours
Total :45+15Hours
Textbook (s)
1. M. S. Rama Murty and M. Hariprasad, Prose for Communication Skills, Ravindra Publishing House,
Hyderabad, 2012
16
Reference (s)
1. J. Seely, Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking, OUP, 2013
2. Quirk, Greenbaum, Leech and Svartvik, A Comprehensive Grammar of the English language, Pearson,
India, 2010
3. Raymond Murphy, English Grammar in Use, 4th Ed, CUP, Cambridge, 2012
4. http://www.famousscientists.org/15-famous-indian-scientists-inventions/
5. http://www.grammarbook.com/grammar/effWrite.asp
6. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russell%E2%80%93Einstein_Manifesto)
7. http://cbhs.portlandschools.org/UserFiles/Servers/Server_1098483/File/Migration/Animal-Farm-
Abridged.pdf

Remember 25 25 -
Understand 25 25 -
Apply 50 50 40
Analyze 30
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Write one synonym for each of the following words.
a) Generate (b) Vivid
2. Write an antonym for each of the following words.
a) Unique (b) Interesting
3. Fill in the blanks with some or any in the following sentences.
a) There isn’t ______ milk here.
b) She has _____ books and pens.
Understanding
1. Read the following passage
There is no dearth of fake patriotism in the world to disguise one’s weakness of failure in
administration and planning. It rather becomes an instrument in the hands of dictators and selfish rulers to keep
their position safe. One can hear the slogans of patriotism on both the sides of the line of demarcation in the
Indian sub-continent. When there is dissatisfaction among the masses these slogans would be raised—‘danger is
lurking on the borders’, ‘the enemy is making preparation to attack our country’. This is not patriotism but
perverse thinking for selfish motives. Patriotism does not require a whip to rouse the sentiments of the people—
if it is true patriotism. The unity achieved during war may be a result of apprehension of slavery, not necessarily
true emotion generated by patriotism. It is in the blood of the people to mould their life according to the needs of
the motherland. It is not in the expediency to create circumstances befitting one’s own interests. It is rather
regrettable that patriotism is the greatest casualty in almost all the fields in our country. Political expediency and
self-motives have become supreme, to the extent that even to talk of patriotism is labeled as puerile of
reactionary. Let us take inspiration from the young girl who wept and cried bitterly for she could not offer
flowers on the war memorial in London, for none of her forefathers had laid his life for the cause of the nation.
Let us inculcate this noble spirit among people if we have to bring back the glory that was India.
Answer the following question.
a) Show the effect of fake patriotism?
b) When are the slogans of patriotism raised?
c) Is this type of patriotism real patriotism? Whom does it benefit?
d) Is the unity during war real patriotism? Does true patriotism require any instigation?
e) What does the author regret?
f) Explain the result of political expediency and selfish motives?
9
17
g) Why did the little girl cry bitterly? Do we learn anything from her?
h) Locate the synonym of the word ‘conceal’ from the passage.
i) Find the antonym of the word ‘cheerful’ from the passage.
j) Suggest a suitable title to the passage.
2. Read the following passage and answer the questions on it:
Many matters, however, are less easily brought to the test of experience. If, like most of mankind, you have
passionate convictions on many such matters, there are ways in which you can make yourself aware of your own
bias. If an opinion contrary to your own makes you angry, that is a sign that you are subconsciously aware of
having no good reason for thinking as you do. If someone maintains that two and two are five, you feel pity
rather than anger, unless you know so little of arithmetic that his opinion shakes your own conviction. The most
savage controversies are those about matters as to which there is no good evidence either way. Persecution is
used in theology, not in arithmetic because in arithmetic there is knowledge, but in theology there is only
opinion. So, whenever you find yourself getting angry about your difference of opinion, be on your guard; you
will probably find, on examination, that your belief is going beyond what the evidence warrants.
Answer the following questions

a) Do you consider the content of the passage, legal or logical? Ans: logical
b) Is the author of the passage finally telling you about changing your opinion? Ans: No giving info.
c) According to the passage when do we feel pity? Ans: When someone knowledge so poorer then
minimum standards.
d) What is the meaning of the word ‘savage’ as used in the passage? Ans: uncivilized / unfair
e) What is the general reaction to an opinion contrary to your own? Ans: we get angry at first.
f) ‘In arithmetic there is no scope for opinion’-explain.
Apply
1. Develop an essay on the theme of “Digital India and its consequences” in about 200 words.
2. Write a letter to your friend who is exclusively occupied with his studies. Advise him to take part in
games
Analyze
1. Discuss the chief components of knowledge society with reference to India according to Dr. A. P. J.
Abdul Kalam.
2. Analyze L. A. Hill’s principles of good writing in achieving ‘vivid expression, simple and
conversational tone’ to make the writing interesting to the readers.
3. Explain how L.A. Hill’s principles of good writing are helpful to become a successful writer. (in about
250 words)
Create
1. Imagine yourself to be the instructor of a course in which 75 students have registered. Draft an email to
all your students asking them to prepare a presentation on the topic of their choice.
2. Build a model essay on impact of social media on youth.
18
16MAX02 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply matrix knowledge to Engineering problems
2. Solve problems related to engineering applications using integral transform techniques
3. Make use of Laplace transforms in solving the differential equations with the initial and boundary
conditions
4. Apply the concept of Fourier series of periodic functions and expand a function in sine and cosine
series
5. Solve problems related to basic linear and non-linear partial differential equations
6. Formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering using partial differential equations
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 3
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Matices
Linear systems of equations: Rank-Echelon form, Normal form–Solution of Linear Systems–Rank Method and
Gauss Seidal Method
Eigen values–Eigen vectors–Properties–Cayley-Hamilton Theorem (without proof)–Inverse and powers of a
matrix by using Cayley-Hamilton theorem, Quadratic forms-Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form–
Rank–Positive, negative, semi definite–index–signature
LU Decomposition Method
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Laplace Transforms
Laplace transforms of standard functions–Shifting Theorems, Transforms of derivatives and integrals–Unit step
function–Dirac delta function
Inverse Laplace transforms by Partial fractions–Convolution theorem (without proof)-Application of Laplace
transforms to ordinary differential equations with constant coefficients
Laplace Transform of Periodic Functions 11
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Fourier Series and Transformations
Fourier series–even and odd functions–Half-range sine and cosine series, Fourier integral theorem (without
proof)–Fourier transforms–sine and cosine transforms–properties–inverse transforms–Finite Fourier transforms
Fourier Transform of Convolution Products
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Partial Differential Equations and Applications
Formation of partial differential equations-by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions–
solutions of first order linear (Lagrange) equations and nonlinear equations (standard types)–Method of
19
Separation of Variables-Applications to wave equation, heat conduction equation in one dimension and
homogeneous Laplace equation in Cartesian coordinates in two dimensions
Charpits Method
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42 nd Ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012
2. S. R. K. Iyengar, R. K. Jain, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4 th Ed., Narosa Publishing House,
New Delhi, 2014
3. B. V. Ramana, Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009
Reference (s)
1. T. K. V. Iyengar, B. Krishna Ghandhi, S. Ranganathan and M. V. S. S. N. Prasad, Engineering
Mathematics, 12th Ed.,Volume–I, S. Chand Publishers, 2014
2. U. M. Swamy, P. Vijaya Laxmi, K. L. Sai Prasad and M. Phani Krishna Kishore, A Text Book of
Engineering Mathematics–II, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2010
3. D. S. Chandrashekharaiah, Engineering Mathematics, Vol–1, Prism Publishers, 2010
4. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9 th Ed., Wiley, 2012

Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze - - -
Evaluate -- -- 30
Create -- -- 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Define rank of the matrix
2. Define unit step function
3. Write the Fourier sine transform of 𝑓(𝑥)
Understand
1. If 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 𝑛 , 𝑛 ∈ ℕ in the interval[−𝜋, 𝜋], then for what values of 𝑛 the Fourier series of 𝑓(𝑥)
contains only sine terms
2. Form the partial differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants𝑎, 𝑏 from
z  ( x 2  a)( y 2  b)
3. Evaluate L 2t 
Apply
1.
Use Laplace transform technique to solve the differential equation
y ''  2 y '  3 y  sin t if
y(0)  0, y '(0)  0.
𝑠
2. Using Convolution theorem, find 𝐿−1 [ ]
(𝑠 2 +𝑎2 )2
3. A tightly stretched string with fixed end points x  0 and x  l is initially in a position given by
x
y  y 0 Sin 3 . If it is released from rest from this position, find the displacement y( x, t )
l
10
20
Create
1. Compare the direct and iterative methods in solving system of equations.
2. Identifying the method to solve sparse systems.
3. What is the advantage of Fourier series over the Taylor’s series in some real time problems?
21
16CYX01 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the fundamental chemistry with an applied perspective as future engineers with a focus on
engineering and industry
2. Analyze the quality of water and its treatment methods for domestic and industrial applications
3. Utilize the polymers, plastics, elastomers and advanced materials (Nano materials) as engineering
materials and apply them in domestic and industrial life
4. Infer the concepts of renewable & non-renewable energy sources, quality of fuels and apply a suitable
fuel as an energy source
5. Outline the corrosion factors and implement the prevention measures
6. Interpret the Nernst equation for electrode potentials and construction and working of various types of
energy storage devices
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3
4 3 2
5 3
6 3 2
Unit I
Water Technology & Advanced Materials
Water technology: sources of water–hardness of water–disadvantages of hard water–boiler troubles–internal
treatment methods, softening methods–lime soda, zeolite, ion exchange and reverse osmosis -specifications for
drinking water–BIS & WHO standards–municipal water treatment–analysis of water for hardness, chloride &
fluoride, numerical problems
Advanced materials–Nanomaterials–Introduction–Preparation by chemical methods–Characterization–SEM–
Applications in industry–solar, water purification and battery technology
Preparation of some important membranes for reverse osmosis process
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Polymers & Composites
Polymers: Introduction–Advantages of polymers over Metals and Alloys; Types of polymers–Types of
polymerization–Physical properties: viscosity, polydispersity, molecular weight distribution etc., and
mechanical properties–Plastics: Thermosetting & thermoplastics–Compounding of plastics–Moulding methods
(Compression, Injection, Transfer, Extrusion)–Preparation, Properties and Engineering applications of important
industrial polymers–Poly Ethylene, Poly Styrene, PVC, PTFE, Bakelite–Molecular Imprinting Polymers (MIP)
–Conducting Polymers–Biodegradable polymers-Fiber reinforced plastics-Glass fiber reinforced plastic–Bullet
Proof Plastics–Rubbers: processing of natural rubber–Vulcanization and compounding of rubber–Engineering
applications of rubber
Inorganic rubbers-silicone rubbers
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Fuels & Energy Resources
Fuels–Introduction-Calorific value–determination of calorific value–Bomb calorimeter and Junker’s
calorimeters-Classification of fuels–characteristics of a good fuel–classification and analysis of coal-Extraction
of Crude Oils–refining of crude oil–Cracking-Thermal and Catalytic cracking–Synthetic petrol–Polymerization,
Fischer Tropsch and Bergius processes–Knocking–Anti Knocking–Octane &Cetanenumber–ASTM standards of
22
fuels–Energy Resources: Energy scenario in India–working of thermal power plants–advantages and

disadvantages–non Renewable energy–solar energy–harnessing of solar energy–solar heaters–photo voltaic
cells–bio energy–biodiesel
Rocket fuels
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Corrosion & Energy Systems
Introduction–process of corrosion–Dry corrosion–Wet corrosion–galvanic corrosion–concentration cell
corrosion–water line corrosion–pitting corrosion–stress corrosion–Factors influencing corrosion–Control of
corrosion–Proper designing–passivity–using alloys–modifying the environment–using corrosion inhibitors:
Inorganic and Organic inhibitors-Cathodic protection–Metallic coatings–galvanization and tinning-Industrial
examples of high corrosion
Electrochemical energy systems:Introduction–Electrode potential–Nernst equation–EMF of cell–Storage
devices–Batteries: primary cell–dry cell; secondary cells–Lead acid battery, Lithium ion battery, flow batteries–
H2–O2 fuel cell and Photo galvanic cell
Organic coatings
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, Engineering Chemistry, 16th Ed., Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, New
Delhi, 2015
2. S. S. Dara, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, S. Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi, 1994
3. C. N. R. Rao, A. Muller and A. K. Cheetham, Nanomaterials Chemistry: Recent Developments and
New Directions, 2010
Reference (s)
1. S. Chawla, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, 3 rd Ed., Dhanpat Rai& Co (Pvt) Ltd, New Delhi,
2012
2. P. Murthy, C. V. Agarwal, A. Naidu, Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, B. S. Publications,
Hyderabad, 2006
3. T. Pradeep, Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, McGraw Hill Education,India,
Pvt.Limited, 2013

Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 80
Analyze - - 20
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. Define hardness. Which salts are responsible for different types of hard nesses?
2. Differentiate between polymer and plastic? List out the differences between thermoplastics and
thermosetting plastics?
3. Define calorific value, HCV and LCV
11
23
Understand
1. What is meant by desalination? Explain the procedure for softening of water by Reverse osmosis
process?
2. What is compounding of plastics? Explain the role of Fillers and Stabilizers with examples
in compounding of plastics?
3. How a photo-voltaic cell constructed and what is is the working mechanism of it?
Apply
1. Water contains the constituents like CO2 , HCO3- , Mg(HCO3)2 , H+, CaSO4 , NaCl and Na2SO4 and
this water is subjected to Lime and Soda softening, which type of chemical reactions are involved
between these constituents with Lime and Soda?
2. Which moulding technique is involved in making a plastic ball in toys industry? Explain the process in
detail with neat sketch?
3. By which methods, the underground pipelines are protected from corrosion? Explain the involved
mechanisms?
Analyze
1. The Boiler fed water contains the following compositions: CaSO 4, CaCl2, MgCl2, SiO2 &
Na2CO3.Suggest the suitable methods and involved principle to prevent the formation of scale and
sludge by these constituents?
2. When a metal X (of reduction potential = 0.337V at 250C) is connected to another
metal Y (of reduction potential = -0.140V at 250C) and this structure is exposed
continuously to sea water, which type of corrosion would take place? Explain with
suitable mechanism.
3. Which type of corrosion is involved in the following jointed pipeline and why? Explain the involved
mechanism in detail
Iron pipe Copper pipe
Sea water inlet Sea water outlet
24
16EEX01 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the basic principles of electrical components
2. Outline electric circuits using network laws and reduction techniques
3. Illustrate the behavior of basic circuit elements for an AC excitation
4. Relate the laws of electro-magnetism and select a machine for practical applications
5. Outline the working principle and construction of the measuring instruments
6. Choose appropriate safety measures and wiring schemes
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO3
1 3 1
2 3 1
3 2 1
4 3 1
5 3 1
6 2 3
Unit I
Basic Electrical Components
Definition of charge, electric potential, electric field, voltage, current, power and energy, Ohm’s law, Faraday’s
Law of Electromagnetic Induction, Classification of network elements, Basic circuit elements–R, L and C,
Types of energy sources-Dependent and independent sources, Kirchhoff’s laws, Resistive, inductive and
capacitive networks–series, parallel circuits, Self Inductance, mutual inductance, Types of induced emfs, Dot
Convention, Coefficient of coupling
Types of resistors–inductors and capacitors
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Fundamentals of Electrical Circuits
DC Circuits:Voltage and current division rule, Source transformation, mesh and nodal analysis, Star-delta
transformation. AC Circuits:Generation of alternating current, periodic waveforms and basic definitions, RMS
and average values of periodic and non-periodic waveforms, form factor and peak factor, AC through pure R
and L, Phasor representation, J-operator, Power in ac circuits
AC through pure capacitor
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Electrical Machines & Measuring Instruments
Electrical Machines:Principle of operation, Construction and Applications-DC Machines, 1-phase Transformers,
1-Phase Induction Motors, Stepper motors. Measuring Instruments: Classification of Measuring Instruments,
Construction and basic working principle of Voltmeter, Ammeter, Wattmeter
Working principle of Energy meter
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Electrical Safety, Wiring and Introduction to Power System
Indian electricity safety rules, Electric shock- effects, protective measures and first aid, Earthling-Basic
principles and types.Electrical wiring-wiring accessories, staircase, tube light.Single line diagram of power
system
Design of corridor wiring 10+3Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
25
Textbook (s)
1. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Theory and Problems of Basic Electrical Engineering, 4th Ed., PHI
Learning Private limited, 2013
2. S. Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical & Electronics Engineering, 2nd Ed., PHI, 2010
3. V. K. Mehta and Rohit Mehta, Basic Electrical Engineering, S Chand and company Ltd, New Delhi,
India, Revised Edition, 2012
Reference (s)
1. J. B. Gupta, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, 3rd Ed., S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2009
2. B. L. Theraja, Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics, 5 th Ed., S. Chand & Company
Ltd, 2013
3. K. Alice Mary and P.Ramana, Basic Electrical Engineering, 1st Ed., Winger Publications, 2013
4. Basic Electrical Engineering by K.Alice Mary and P.Ramana, Winger Publications, 1 st Edition, 2013

Remember 40 40 -
Understand 60 60 20
Apply - - 40
Analyze - - 40
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. State Faradays laws of Electro-magnetic Induction.
2. Define
i. Charge ii. Power
iii. Energy iv. Potential
3. State any five Indian electricity safety rules
4. Define coefficient of coupling
Understand
1. Explain the principle of operation of transformer.
2. Describe the working of DC generator.
3. Explain the construction and working of Wattmeter.
4. Illustrate the emf equation of a transformer
12
26
16CHX01 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Translate the learner’s attitude to think globally and act locally
2. Motivate environmental organizations to create a concern about our present state of Environment.
3. Find solutions for conservation of natural resources
4. Identify the benefits of ecosystem conservation, biodiversity protection, implement pollution
prevention and control measures
5. Illustrate social issues of environmental protection and adopt sustainable developmental practices
6. Perceives the basic structure of environmental policy and law pertaining to specific environmental
issues (water quality, air quality, biodiversity protection, Forest, etc.)
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO3 PO6 PO7
1 - - 3 3
2 - - - 3
3 3 3 - 3
4 - - 3 3
5 - - 3 3
6 - - - 3
Unit I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies & Natural Resources
Definition, Scope and Importance, Multidisciplinary nature of Environmental Studies, Value of Nature-
Productive, Aesthetic/Recreation, Option, Need for Public Awareness, Institutions (BNHS, BVIEER, ZSI, BSI)
and People in Environment (MedhaPatkar, Sundarlal Bahuguna, Indira Gandhi, Rachael Carson)
Natural Resources: Renewable and Non–renewable resources–Importance, uses, overexploitation/threats, and
conservation of (i) forest (ii) water (iii) mineral (iv) food and (v) energy resources, role of an individual in
conservation of natural resources
Biotic and abiotic components–Case studies of forest-water-mineral-food-energy resources
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Ecosystem & Biodiversity
Ecosystems: Concept of an ecosystem, Structure and function of an ecosystem, Biogeological cycles (Energy
flow, Carbon and Nitrogen Cycles), Ecological succession, Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids,
Introduction, types, characteristic features, structures and functions of the following ecosystems: a. Forest
Ecosystem b. Aquatic Ecosystem Biodiversity and its Conservation: Definition and levels of biodiversity, Bio–
geographical classification of India, hot spots of biodiversity–India as a mega diversity nation, Threats to
biodiversity, Endangered and endemic species of India, Conservation of biodiversity: In–situ and Ex–situ
conservation
Phosphorus cycle–Desert ecosystems–Grassland ecosystem–Case studies on conservation of biodiversity
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Environmental Pollution & Social Issues
Environmental Pollution: Definition, Cause, effects, control measures and case studies of: Air pollution b. Water
pollution c. Soil pollution Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and
industrial wastes. Disaster management (floods and cyclones) Social Issues and the Environment: Sustainability,
Urban problems related to energy, Water conservation and watershed management, Resettlement and
rehabilitation of people; Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions, global warming, ozone layer
depletion, Consumerism and waste products
Noise pollution–Case studies on pollution–Wasteland reclamation 11+4 Hours
27
Unit IV
Human Population and the Environmental Acts
Human Population and the Environment: Population growth, Affluence, Technology and Environmental Impact
(Master Equation), Population explosion and Family Welfare Programme, Value Education, HIV/AIDS,
Women and Child Welfare, Role of information Technology in Environment and human health, Environment
Protection Acts: Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act,
Wildlife Protection Act and Forest Conservation Act. Issues involved in enforcement of environmental
legislation
Human Rights–The environment (Protection) Act, 1986
10+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. E. Bharucha, Textbook of Environmental Studies, 1 st Ed., University Press (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2005
Reference (s)
1. W. P. Cunningham, M. A. Cunningham, Principles of Environmental Science, 6 th Ed., Tata McGraw
Hill, 2008
2. A. Kaushik, C. P. Kaushik, Perspectives in Environmental Studies, 4 th Ed., New Age International
Publishers, 2008
3. H. S. Peavy, D. R. Rowe, G. Tchobanoglous, Environmental Engineering, 1 st Ed., McGraw Hill, 1984
4. T. E. Graedel, B. R. Allenby, Industrial Ecology and Sustainable Engineering, 1st Ed., Pearson
Publications, 2009

Remember 40 35 15
Understand 45 50 50
Apply 15 15 35
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Sample question (s)

Remember
1. List important natural resources & important institutions related to the environment.
2. Recall a simple food chain.
3. List important acts in environment.
Understand
1. Money deposited in a bank- identify under which environment value.
2. Summarize the methods for creating public awareness regarding environment.
3. Explain the consequences of over utilization of water resources.
Apply
1. Select the economic method of conservation of biodiversity and describe it.
2. Predict the effects and control methods of water pollution.
3. Find the urban problems related to energy and suggest suitable alternatives.
4. Assess why women and children need special care and what are all the supports that our Government is
extending to them?
13
28
16HSX02 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Develop the pronunciation ability by using their gained knowledge of the English sound system
2. Improve the articulation of sounds and pronunciation of words for intelligible English
3. Recognize the use of language in conversational style with focus on communication in English
4. Organize ideas effectively in spoken form
6. Develop the pronunciation abilityby using their gained knowledge of the English sound system
COs – POs Mapping
COs P010
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
Module 1–Sounds of English-Consonants

Module 2–Interaction-1: Greeting and taking leave, introducing oneself to others.
Module 3–Sounds of English-Vowels
Module 4–Interaction-2: Making request and response to them ask for and give/refuse permission, Ask for and
give directions, thank and respond
Module 5–Some rules of Pronunciation
Module 6–Interaction-3: Invite, accept, and declining invitations, Make complaints and respond to them,
Express sympathy
Module 7–Word Stress and Sentence stress
Module 8–Interaction-4: Apologize and respond, advise and suggest, Telephone Skills
Module 9–Presentation Skills: Oral and PPT Presentations
Module 10 Group Discussion
Extra Module
Module 11–Debate

1. Common Errors in English
2. Listening Skills
3. Speaking Skills
4. Writing Skills
5. Presentation Skills–observations
6. Reading Skills
7. Public Speaking
8. Interview Skills
9. Office Communication
10. Telephone Skills
11. Report Writing
12. Vocabulary
13. Body Language
14. Resume Writing
15. Functional English
14
29

1. K. Nirupa Rani, Jayashree Mohanraj and B. Indira, Strengthen Your Steps-Maruthi publications, 2012
2. K. Nirupa Rani, Jayashree Mohan Raj, B. Indira, (Ed) Speak Well (C.D) Orient Black Swan Pvt Ltd,
Hyderabad, 2012
3. D. Jones, English Pronouncing Dictionary (Software)CUP, Ver.1.0, 2003
4. J. Sethi, S. Kamlesh, D. V. Jindal. A Practical Course in English Pronunciation, Prentice-hall of India,
New Delhi, 2007
5. T. Balasubramanian, A Textbook of English Phonetics for Indian students, McMillan, 1981
6. K. Mohan and M. Raman, Effective English Communication, 1st Ed., Tata McGraHills, 2000
7. R. K. Bansal and J. B. Harrison, Spoken English, 3 rd Ed., Orient Black Swan, Hyderabad, 1983
30
16CYX02 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize different Analytical tools and develop the necessary skills in executing experiments involving
estimation of metals in alloys, raw materials, finished products and environmental samples etc.
2. Utilize modern instruments like flame photometer, ion analyzer, UV Vis spectrophotometer, Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometer for characterization of materials used in industry & environmental
monitoring
3. Determine the amount of hardness, chloride, fluoride, nitrite, DO of water for its quality and know its
utility in domestic and industry
4. Summarize the characteristics of lubricants and able to choose/modify lubricants according to purpose
5. Compose some cross-linked polymers like Bakelite, Nylon etc.
6. Identify the adulteration of food items such as milk, honey, tea, coffee & fertility of soil to increase
crop production
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
CO6 3
List of Experiments
Introduction to Quantitative Analysis
1. Assessment of Quality of water
i) Hardness ii) Chloride iii) Fluoride iv) Dissolved Oxygen v) Nitrite
2. Testing quality of lubricants
i) Viscosity Index ii) Flash & Fire point iii) Acid Number
3. Quality Analysis of engineering materials
i) Cement ii) Al/Cu wire iii) Steel
4. Preparation of Engineering and Nano materials
i) Bakelite ii) Nylon iii) Silver nano particles
5. Estimation of Purity of Iron in Ingot
6. Analysis of fertility of soil
i) Sodium & Potassium ii) Micro Nutrients
7. Determination of acid strength (for a citrus fruit) by Conductometr
8. Detection of adulteration of Food in Honey/ Milk/ Tea
9. Estimation of heavy metals in fast food items by AAS.
10. Testing of corrosion of metal
Note: Student should perform minimum of 12 experiments at least one form each head.

1. Assessment of ground water quality of your village/Mandal
2. Preparation of desired Viscosity Index lubricating oil
3. Studies on the effect of various factors on corrosion
15
31

1. K. Gouru Naidu, Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual, 1 st Ed., 2014
2. G. Svehla, Vogel’s Qualitative Inorganic Analysis, 7th Ed., Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
3. Standard methods for the examination of water and waste waters, American Public Health Association,
21st Ed., EPA, Washington, 2005
4. Metcalf and Eddy, Waste Water Engineering Treatment and Reuse, 4 th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2003
5. D. Srinivasulu, Engineering Chemistry laboratory manual & Record, Parshva publications, 2010
32
16MEX03 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize basic carpentry tools for the preparation of wooden joints
2. Make use of basic hand tools for the preparation of mild steel joints
3. Build simple house hold items with GI sheet using tin smithy tools
4. Make use of house wiring accessories to build simple electrical circuits
5. Build simple components with hand tools for making experimental setups
6. Build simple components with hand tools as per the drawing specifications
COs - POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO10 PO12
1 3 2 2 2
2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 2 1
4 3 2 3 2
5 3 3 1 3
6 3 2 1 3
List of experiments
Trades
Carpentry : 1. Cross Lap joint
2. T-Lap joint
3. Dovetail Joint
4. Mortise and Tennon Joint
Fitting : 1. Square Fit
2. V- Fit
3. Half Round Fit
4. Dovetail Fit
Tin Smithy : 1. Square Box without lid
2. Taper Tray
3. Open Scoop
4. Funnel
House Wiring : 1. Parallel/Series Connection of three bulbs
2. Florescent Lamp Wiring
3. Stair Case Wiring
4. Godown Wiring
Total: 45 Hours
1. Prepare Tee–bridle joint
2. Prepare Corner dovetail joint
3. Make Corner bridge joint
4. Make Dovetail lap joint
5. Prepare 900 round elbow pipe
6. Prepare Ellipse using GI sheet
7. Make cylindrical pipe
8. Make Round T-pipe
9. Prepare hexagonal fitting
10. Prepare diagonal dovetail fitting
11. Prepare universal fitting
16
33
12. Make square fitting

13. Set the general house wring
14. Set the dim & bright lighting
15. Set the test lamping

1. Engineering workshop Lab manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, GMRIT Rajam
34
16MA304 COMPLEX VARIABLES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Implement the knowledge of Z-Transformations in signal analysis and solve difference equations
2. Define and assess limits and continuity for complex variable functions as well as consequences of
continuity
3. Identify the significance of differentiability and Analyticity for complex variable functions and be familiar
with the Cauchy-Riemann equations
4. Compute integrals along a path in the complex plane using the Cauchy's theorem and Residue theorem
5. Classify the singularities of complex variable function by expanding them into Taylor’s and Laurent’s
series
6. Interpret various types of transformations in complex plane
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO13

1 3 3 2
2 3 2 2
3 2 2 2
4 2 3 2
5 3 2 2
6 3 2 2
3–Strongly linked | 2–Moderately linked| 1–Weakly linked
Unit I
Z transforms
Z transform – properties – Damping rule – Shifting rule – Initial and final value theorems , Inverse z transform -
Convolution theorem – Solution of difference equation by z transforms.
Two-sided Z-Trans forms – properties
11 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Functions of a complex variables and complex integration
Functions of a complex variable – Continuity – Differentiability – Analyticity – Properties – Cauchy-Riemann
equations in Cartesian and polar coordinates (without proof).Harmonic and conjugate harmonic functions – Milne –
Thomson method.
C
Elementary functions: Exponential, trigonometric, hyperbolic functions and their properties – General power Z
(c is complex), principal value.
Complex integration: Line integral – evaluation along a path and by indefinite integration – Cauchy’s integral
theorem, Cauchy’s integral formula – Generalized integral formula.
CR equations in Cartesian, polar form theorems proofs
12 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Complex power series and Contour integration
Complex power series: Radius of convergence – Expansion in Taylor’s series, Maclaurin’s series and Laurent series.
Singular point –Isolated singular point – pole of order m – essential singularity. Residue – Evaluation of residues -
Laurent series - Residue theorem.
Evaluation of integrals of the type
35
 c  2
(a) Improper real integrals 
f ( x)dx (b) 
c
f (cos , sin  )d

(c) 
e imx f ( x)dx (d) Integrals by indentation.
The Laplace inversion integral-Stability Criteria
11 + 3 Hours
Unit IV
Calculus of complex functions and Conformal Mappings
Argument principle – Rouche’s theorem – determination of number of zeros of complex polynomials - Maximum
Modulus principle - Fundamental theorem of Algebra, Liouville’s Theorem. (Theorems without proofs)
n
Conformal mapping: Transformation by e z , lnz, z2, z (n positive integer), Sin z, cos z, z + a/z. Translation,
rotation, inversion and bilinear transformation – fixed point – cross ratio – properties – invariance of circles and
cross ratio – determination of bilinear transformation.
The Schwartz-Christoffel Transformation
11 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s):
1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 42 nd Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
2. R.K.Jain and S. R. K Iyengar, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Narosa Publishing
House, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
Reference (s)
1. T.K.V Iyengaret. al, Engineering Mathematics Volume-III, S.Chand Co., 2nd Edition, New Delhi,2007.
2. Kreyszig, Irvin, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 9 th Edition, 2012.
3. C.Ray Wylie and C.Louis Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Com. Ltd, 6th Edition, 2003.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 30 30
Understand 45 40 40
Apply 30 30 30
Analyse -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out four standard z-transforms

2. State the steps involved in solving difference equations using z-transforms
3. Define analytic function and write C-R equations
4. Define conformal transformation, Bilinear transformation
-------------------------------------------
5
36
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the physical significance of the convolution theorem for z-transforms.

2. Formulate the mathematical principle involved in cauchy’s theorem and integral formula to evaluate
definite integral
1
3. Interpret the transformation w  and find the image of z  2i  2
z
z  sin z
4. Explain the nature and location of singularities of the function
z2
APPLY
1. Carry out z-transform to solve difference equation un  2  4un  n  1

x
2. If     i represents the complex potential for an electric field and   x 2  y 2  , find the
x  y2
2
function .
3. Implement residue theorem to evaluate the definite integral  f ( z )dz , where C is the circle
C
z  2.5 and
2
z
f ( z) 
 z  1  z  2 
2
4. An electrostatic field in the xy-plane is given by the potential function   3x 2 y  y 3 , find the stream
function.
37
16EC302 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the conversion of a number from one number system to another
2. Identify Boolean algebra and K-map as a tool to simplify and design logic circuits
3. Implement combinational circuits using gates
4. Design PLDs and Flip-flops
5. Implement various types of counters and shift registers
6. Attribute innovative designs by modifying the traditional design techniques
COs – POs Mapping

1 3 2 2 1
2 3 2 2 2
3 3 2 1 2
4 3 3 2 3
5 3 2 2 3
6 3 3 2 3
Unit I
Number systems and Boolean algebra
Review of number systems, conversion of numbers from one radix to another radix, Complements. Signed Binary
Numbers, Weighted and Non weighted codes, Basic Gates NOT, AND, OR, Boolean Theorems, Complement And
Dual of Logical Expressions, Universal Gates, Ex-Or and Ex-Nor Gates, SOP,POS, Minimizations of Logic
Functions Using Boolean Theorems, Two level Realization of Logic Functions Using Universal Gates error
detection and error correction codes, parity checking even parity, odd parity, Hamming code
Integrated circuits: IC specifications and pin diagram of gates, Floating point number representation
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Boolean functionminimization and combinational logic circuits
Karnaugh Map Method(K-Map): Minimization of Boolean Functions maximum up to Four Variables , POS and
SOP, Simplifications With Don’t Care Conditions Using K-Map, Tabular minimization, Problem solving using K-
map such as code converters binary Multiplier. Half adder, Full adder, Full subtractor, Ripple carry adder, Carry
look ahead adder, Multiplexer, De-Multiplexer, Encoder, Priority encoder, Decoder, MUX Realization of switching
functions.
Applications of Full adder ,Realization of switching functions by using Decoder, Encoder, MUX, Tri-State Devices
11+4 Hours
Unit III
PLDs and sequential circuits–I
PLA, PAL, PROM. Realization of Switching Functions Using PROM, PAL and PLA. Comparison of PLA, PAL
and PROM. Classification of Sequential Circuits, Basic Sequential Logic Circuits: Latch and Flip-Flop, RS- Latch
Using NAND and NOR Gates, Truth Tables. RS, JK,T and D Flip Flops , Truth and Excitation Tables, Conversion
of Flip Flops. Flip Flops with Asynchronous Inputs (Preset and Clear).
Random-Access Memory, Memory Decoding, Sequential Memory
11+4 Hours
38
Unit IV
Sequential circuits–II
Design of registers, Buffer register, Control buffer register, Shift register, Bi-directional shift register, Universal
shift register, Design of Asynchronous &Synchronous counters - Up, Down, Up down, Johnson counters, Ring
counters, Mealy and Moore state machines, Mealy to Moore conversion and vice-versa, Reduction of state tables
and state assignment
Sequence generator and sequence detector
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Morris Mano,Digital Design,3 rd Edition, PHI, 2001
2. Charles H. Roth, Fundamentals of Logic Design,3 rdEdition,Thomson Publications, 2014
3. John F. Wakerly ,Digital Design Principles & Practices, 3 rdEdition,PHI/ Pearson Education Asia, 2001
Reference (s)
1. Zvi Kohavi, Switching & Finite Automata theory, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2008
2. R P Jain, Modern Digital Electronics, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2003
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 -- --
Understand 45 20 --
Apply 20 50 50
Analyse 10 30 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Retrive the decimal value of the fractional binary number 0.1011

2. List any two postulates of Boolean algebra
3. List the four uses of decoders.
4. Define Flip flop
5. Define asynchronous sequential circuit
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain how digital circuits are more frequently constructed with NAND or NOR gates than with AND &
OR gates
2. Represent the following Boolean expression to minterms and maxterms A+BC’+ABD’+ABCD
3. Represent the Boolean function T=F (w, x, y, z)= ∑ m (0,1,2,4,5,7,8,9,12,13) by using 8 to 1mux.
4. Illustrate a half adder using NAND – NAND
5. Represent a JK flip flop using SR flip flop
1
39
APPLY
1. Find a circuit that has no static hazards and implements the Boolean function F(A,B,C,D) = Σ
(0,2,6,7,8,,10,12) ..
2. Construct a four input NAND gate using gates with 2 inputs. Write down the truth table. Do the same for a
4 input NOR gate.
3. Implement D Flip-flop by using JK flip flop.
4. Construct a combinational circuit to convert BCD to EX-3 code.
5. Implement a combinational logic circuit, which can compare two bits binary numbers.
ANALYSE
1. Analyze the following in two ways to get sums of product and product of sums equations. Then show how
you can get one from the other using DeMorgan's Theorem
A E1
B
C
D
F
E2
C
A
2. Why the input variables to a PAL are buffered

3. Why the fixed format in not used and floating format is used
4. What happens when an electric signal is grounded?
5. Design a Sequence detector to detect 10111001
40
16EC303 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the properties of semiconductor materials in the formation of PN diode and Zener diode
2. Classify the V-I characteristics of CB & CE configurations
3. Design various biasing circuits to achieve the required stability in transistor amplifiers
4. Illustrate the operation of FETs and special diodes for different applications
5. Design half wave, full wave rectifiers with and without filters for different applications
6. Design regulated power supply using Zener diode and transistors
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 1
2 2 1 1
3 3 1 2 3
4 2 2 1 2
5 3 2 2 3
6 3 2 2 3
Unit I
Semiconductors–Diodes
Review of semiconductor Physics- mobility, conductivity–n and p–type semiconductors, Mass Action Law, Fermi
level in intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, Effect of temperature on Fermi level.
Formation of PN junction, open-circuited p-n junction, Energy band diagram of PN diode, PN diode: Forward bias
and Reverse bias, Volt-ampere characteristics of p-n diode, Temperature dependence on VI characteristics,
Transition and Diffusion capacitances, Breakdown Mechanisms in Semiconductors Diodes: Avalanche breakdown
and Zener breakdown, Zener diode characteristics.
Poisson and continuity equations, Hall Effect
12+4 Hours
Unit II
BJT–Biasing
Junction transistor, Transistor current components, Transistor as an amplifier, Relation between Alpha and Beta,
Input and Output characteristics of Common Base and Common Emitter configurations.
BJT biasing: criteria for fixing operating point, Fixed bias, Collector to base bias, Self-bias techniques for
stabilization, Stabilization factors: S, S', S'’, Compensation techniques: Compensation against variation in VBE and
Ico, Thermal run away, Thermal stability.
Transistor switching characteristics
11+3 Hours
41
Unit III
FET-special semiconductor devices
Qualitative and Quantitative discussion on JFET characteristics, FET biasing, MOSFET characteristics:
Enhancement mode and depletion mode, FET as VVR.
Characteristics of Tunnel Diode with the help of energy band diagrams, Varactor Diode, LED, photo diode, UJT
characteristics, SCR characteristics.
Solar cell, Liquid Crystal display
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Regulated power supplies
Half wave rectifier, full wave rectifier, Harmonic components in a rectifier circuit, Inductor filter, Capacitor filter,
L-section filter,  -section filter, Multiple L section and Multiple  section filter, and comparison of various filter
circuits in terms of ripple factors.
Basic Regulator Circuit, Series voltage regulator, Shunt regulator, Short circuit protection, Current Limiting,
Specifications of Voltage Regulator Circuits. Design of regulator using Zener diode and Transistors.
Other Full-wave circuits, IC Voltage regulators
11+ 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. J.Millman, C.C.Halkias and Chetan D Parikh, Integrated Electronics, 2ndEdition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuits Theory, Pearson/Prentice Hall,
11th Edition, 2015
3. K.Venkata Rao, K. Rama Sudha, Electronic Devices and Circuits, McGraw Hill, 1st Edition, 2015
4. T.F. Bogart Jr., J.S. Beasley and G.Rico, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Pearson Education, 6 th Ed, 2004
Reference (s)
1. Visvesvara Rao, K. Bhaskara Rama Murty, K. Raja Rajeswari, P.Chalam Raju Pantulu, Electronic Devices
and Circuits, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2007.
2. S.G.Burns and P.R.Bond, Principles of Electronic Circuits, Galgotia Publications, 2nd Edition, 1998.
3. Millman and Grabel, Microelectronics, Tata McGraw Hill, 7thEdition.
4. P. John Paul, Electronic Devices and Circuits, New Age International publishers, 2007.
5. A.Salivahanan, N.Suresh Kumar, A.Vallavaraj, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Limited, Second Edition, 2008.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 30 --
Understand 40 30 --
Apply 30 40 100
Analyze 20 10 --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
2
42
REMEMBER
1. List any two advantages of JFET over BJT.

2. State Mass Action Law.
3. Define Rectifiers. List any two types of Rectifiers.
4. List any four specifications of voltage Regulators.
5. Define stability factor, S.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the consequences due to applied reverse voltage at Collector junction in CB configuration.
2. Represent the structure of JFET and explain the operation of n channel JFET.
3. Illustrate the current components of BJT.
4. Interpret FET as a Voltage Controlled Device.
5. Compare compensation techniques for the variations in I CO due to temperature.
6. Explain about thermal runaway.
7. Explain the Breakdown Mechanism in Semiconductor Diodes.
8. Explain the working principle of Tunnel diode with its V-I characteristics.
APPLY
1. Find the value of IC and IE of a transistor at room temperature for I co=5μA, IB=100μA and β= 100, If the
temperature is raised by 100oC.
2. Design a Self-biasing circuit such that IC= 5mA and VCE=8v and VE=6v and S=10, β=200 and VCC=20v.
3. A Specimen of pure germanium at 300 0K has a density of charge carriers 2.5x10 ^19/m3. It is doped with
donor impurities atoms at a rate of one impurity atom every 10 ^6 atoms of germanium. Assume complete
ionization of impurities. The density of germanium atom is 4.2 x 10 ^28 atoms/m3. Compute the resistivity of
the doped germanium if the electron mobility is 0.38 m^2/V-s.
4. An a.c supply of 230V is applied to a half-wave rectifier circuit through transformer of turns ration 5:1.
Assume the diode is an ideal one. The load resistance is 300Ω. Find
(a) dc output voltage
(b) PIV
(c) maximum power delivered to the load and
(d) average power delivered to the load
5. Show that if Rh is the Hall co-efficient and σ is the conductivity of a metal then the drift mobility of the
conduction electron is given by
43
16EC304 LINEAR CIRCUIT ANALYSIS

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the characteristics of RL, RC, RLC series and parallel circuits in both time and frequency
domain.
2. Find the power and power factor of RL, RC, RLC series and parallel circuits.
3. Design resonant circuits which are used in wireless transmission and communication networks.
4. Implement the theorems to simplify complex networks
5. Outline the transient analysis in electrical circuits and to analyze the system stability
6. Determine the parameters of two port networks to analyze the performance of transmission lines.
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO4 PO5 PO14
1 2 1 1 2 1
2 2 1 1 2 1
3 3 2 2 2 2
4 3 2 2 2 2
5 2 1 1 2 1
6 2 1 1 2 1
Unit I
Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis
Concept of Phasor and J notation, Impedance and Admittance – Time domain and frequency domain response of R,
L, C series, parallel and series- parallel circuits to sinusoidal excitation. Computation of active, reactive, complex
power and power factor, Series and parallel resonance of RLC circuits –Selectivity, bandwidth and quality factor-
implications with voltage and current excitation.
Applications of resonant circuit
Practical Components
1. Verification of series RLC circuits.
2. Verification of parallel RLC circuits.
3. Verification of series Resonance circuits.
4. Verification of Parallel Resonance circuits.
12+8 Hours
Unit II
Network Theorems
Source transformation, Superposition, Thevinin’s, Norton’s, Maximum power transfer, Reciprocity, Tellegen’s,
Millman’s and Compensation theorems for DC and AC excitations.
Star Delta transformations, Theorems for Magnetic Circuits.
1. Verification and analysis of linear circuits using superposition Theorem.
2. Verification and analysis of linear circuits using Thevenins Theorem.
3. Verification and analysis of linear circuits using Nortons theorem.
4. Verification and analysis of linear circuits using Compensation Theorem
10+8 Hours
Unit III
Transient Analysis
D.C Transients: Transient response of R-L, R-C, R-L-C circuits for d.c excitation – initial conditions –solution using
differential equations and Laplace transform approaches.
44
A.C Transients: Transient response of R-L, R-C, R-L-C circuits for sinusoidal excitation – initial conditions –
Solution using Laplace transform approaches.
Transient behavior of RLC circuits for Impulse and Ramp excitations.
1. Determine the time constant of a RL (series & parallel) circuits.
2. Determine the time constant of a RC (series & parallel) circuits.
15+4 Hours
Unit IV
Network Parameters
Two port networks, Impedance parameters, Admittance parameters, Transmission parameters, hybrid parameters –
Interrelationship between parameters – Concept of transformed network – two port network parameters using
transformed variables – Interconnection of two port networks.
Image impedance, Iterative and Characteristic impedance of Two port networks
1. Measurement of Impedance parameters of linear circuits.
2. Measurement of Admittance parameters of linear circuits.
08+4 Hours
Total: 45+30 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Engineering circuit analysis –by W.H.Hayt, J.E.Kimmerly, and S.M.Durb, McGraw Hill Education private
limited, 8th Edition, 2013
2. Network Analysis by M.E Van Valkenburg, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd Edition, 2015
Reference (s)
1. Fundamentals of Electric circuits by Charles K Alexander, Mathew N.O Sadiku Tata McGraw Hill, 5 th
Edition.
2. Electrical Circuit Analysis by ASudhakar and SP Shyam Mohan, TMH, 3rd Edition.
3. Engineering Network Analysis and Filter Desgin- Gopal G. Bhise, Prem R. Chadha,Durgesh C.
Kulshreshtha - Umesh Publications, 2009.
4. Network analysis - MahmoodNahvi, Joseph Edminister, Schaum's Outlines, 4th edition, McGraw-Hill
Companies Incorporated, 2003.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Lab Examination (%)
Remember 25 15
Understand 35 15
Apply 20 25 100
Analyze 20 25
Evaluate -- 10
Create -- 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define power factor, active power, reactive power and apparent power.
2. Define Thevinins theorem.
45
3. Define Nortons theorem.

4. Draw the Two Port network using Y parameters
5. A series-connected circuit has R = 4Ω & and L = 25 mH. Calculate the value of ‘C’ that will produce a
quality factor of 50.
6. Define resonant frequency.
7. Draw the circuit of a low-pass T-section filter.
UNDERSTAND
1. Draw a power triangle for L-C-R parallel circuit.

2. Explain the principle of superposition.
3. Explain the uses of various types of filters.
4. Explain sinusoidal steady state response of the series RL circuit and derive expressions for the voltage
across R, voltage across L and the current flowing through the circuit.
5. The voltage across a 1-µF capacitor is 10V for t < 0. At t = 0, a 1-MΩ resistor is connected across the
capacitor terminals. Find the time constant τ, and the expression for v(t).
6. The current in a series circuit of R = 5Ω and L= 30mH lags the applied voltage by 800.Determine the
source frequency and the impedance Z.
7. What do you mean by cut off frequency?
APPLY
1. Design a T and ∏ section constant-K high pass filter having cut-off frequency of 10 kHz and nominal
impedance is 500Ω. Also find i) its characteristic impedance and phase constant at 25kHz.
2. Determine the Y- parameters of the network shown in fig. and also find Z- parameters
3. Express z-parameters in terms of h-parameters and ABCD-parameters.

4. Find the current response when a series RL circuit is connected to a sudden ac voltage Vs = V0cosωt
5. A series RC circuit with R = 5kΩ and C = 20 mF has a constant-voltage source of 100V applied at t = 0;
there is no initial charge on the capacitor. Obtain i, and q, for t > 0.
6. Obtain an expression for resonance frequency of parallel circuit considering internal resistances of
inductance and capacitance.
ANALYSE
1. The switch in the simple RC circuit closes at t = 0. For the circuit, VS = 12 V, R= 10 kΩ, C = 10 nF. The
capacitor was initially charged to 6 volts. At what time does the capacitor voltage reaches to 10.5 V?
2. Find the voltage V using Norton’s theorem for the circuit shown in Figure.
46
3. For the circuit shown in below figure, find the value of Xc in ohms at which the circuit under resonance.
EVALUATE
1. Evaluate V0 in the network shown below using superposition theorem
2. Validate reciprocity theorem for the circuits shown in figure below.
3. Evaluate the value of ZL to be connected between the terminals AB of the circuit shown below for
maximum power transfer. Also find maximum power.
CREATE
1. A series combination of R and C is in parallel with a 25 Ω resistor. A 50 Hz source results in a total current
of 6.5 A, a current of 5 A through 25 Ω resistance and a current of 2.3 A in the RC branch. (i) Draw the
phasor diagram of the circuit and find values of R and C (ii) Find apparent, active, reactive power and
power factor of the circuit.
47
16EC305 RANDOM VARIABLES & STOCHASTIC PROCESSES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate probability concepts and Bayes theorem
2. Find the distribution and density functions of random variables
3. Compute various moments of random variables
4. Demonstrate vector random variables and their statistical averages
5. Outline the temporal and spectral characteristics of random processes
6. Summarize noise sources and characteristics
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO14

1 2 1 1
2 2 1 2
3 3 2 2
4 2 1 2
5 2 1 2
6 2 1 2
Unit I
Probability theory
Set theory, Classical definition of Probability, Axioms of probability, Probability as a Relative Frequency, Joint
Probability, Conditional Probability, Total Probability, Bayes’ Theorem, Independent Events, Mutually Exclusive
events, combined sample space, permutations, combinations, Bernoulli trails.
Binary symmetric channel, Applications of Bayes theorem
10+3 Hours
Unit II
The Random Variable
Definition of a Random Variable, Conditions for a Function to be a Random Variable, Discrete and Continuous
random variables, Distribution function, Density functions, Examples of random variables: Binomial, Poisson,
Uniform, Gaussian, Exponential, Rayleigh, Conditional Distribution and density function, Expectation, Moments,
Functions that give moments: Moment generation function, Characteristic function.
Chebyshev’s Inequality, Transformation of random variable
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Multiple Random Variables
Vector random variables, Joint Distribution Function and properties, Marginal Distribution
Functions, Joint density function and properties, Marginal density function, Conditional distribution and density,
Statistical independence, Expectation, Joint moments, Joint moment generating function, Joint characteristic
function, Joint Gaussian random variables.
Sum of two random variables, sum of several random variables
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Random Processes
Temporal Characteristics: The Random Processes, Classification of Random Processes, Stationarity and
Independence: Wide Sense Stationary processes, Strict sense stationary processes, Time Averages and Ergodicity,
48
Spectral Characteristics: Power Spectral density and its Properties, Relationship between Power Spectrum and
Autocorrelation Function, Cross Power Density Spectrum, Properties, Relationship between Cross Power Spectrum
and Cross Correlation Function, Modeling of noise sources: Noise Temperature, Noise figure.
Noise Bandwidth, White Noise
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s):
1. Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal Principles - Peyton Z. Peebles, TMH, 4th Edition, 2001
2. Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes – Athanasios Papoulis and S. Unnikrishna Pillai,
PHI, 4th Edition, 2002
Reference book(s):
1. Communication Systems Analog & Digital – R.P. Singh and S.D. Sapre, TMH, 1995
2. Probability and Random Processes with Application to Signal Processing – Henry Stark and John W.
Woods, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition
3. Probability Methods of Signal and System Analysis. George R. Cooper, Clave D. MC Gillem, Oxford, 3 rd
Edition, 1999
SAMPLE QUESTION(S)

Remember 15 10 --
Understand 45 45 --
Apply 40 45 60
Analyse -- -- 40
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Probability and State the Axioms

2. State Baye’s theorem
3. Define the following terms: i) Independent events ii) Mutually exclusive events iii) Probability
4. State the axioms of probability
5. List any five properties of probability density function
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the Gaussian density function

2. Explain the Rayleigh density function
3. Compare discrete and continuous density functions
4. Classify the distribution function
5. Compare uniform and exponential density functions
3
49
APPLY
1. Let f(x) be the Gaussian density function of R.V. ‘X’ What is the significance of CDF and find CDF.
2. A R.V. ‘X’ has the distribution function
12
n2
FX ( x )   u ( x  n) . How do you calculate the probability?
n 1 650
3. The density function of the random variable ‘X’ is

5 x
fx (x) = 5e 0 x
0 elsewhere
Find (i) E[X] (ii) E[(X-1)2 ] (iii) E[(3X-1)]
4. Find the expected value of the function g(X)=X3 where X is a random variable defined by the density
1
f x (x)=   u(x)exp  x 2
2
5. A Random Variable ‘X’ has a mean of 10 and variance of 9 and is of unknown distribution. Find
P (5<X<15)?
ANALYSE
1. A discrete random variable X has possible values xi=i2 (i=1,2,3,4,5) which occur with probabilities
0.4,0.25,0.15,0.1 and 0.1 respectively. Compute the mean value of E[X] = X of X
2. A Random variable ‘X’ has pdf given by,
1
f (x)  exp((x  a) / b) x  a
b
 0 else
Compute its characteristic function and the first moment

3. A random process is given as x(t) = At, where A is a uniformly distributed R.V. on (0, 2). Justify whether
x(t) is WSS or not
a 
4. A WSS Random process has RXX ( )  5e where a is real positive constant is applied to the input of
an LTI system with h(t)  e2t u (t) .Compute the PSD of the output of the system
5. Compare moment generating and characteristic function
50
16EC306 SIGNALS & SYSTEMS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret various types of signals and systems with the basic signal operations
2. Explain the concept of orthogonality for periodic signals approximation
3. Implement the various transform techniques for analyzing continuous time signals
4. Implement correlation and convolution techniques for various signals
5. Find the response of LTI system
6. Attribute the concept of sampling theorem and Laplace transform
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO14
1 2 1 2
2 2 1 2
3 3 2 3
4 3 2 3
5 2 2 2
6 3 2 3
Unit I
Introduction: Signal analysis
Classification of Continuous time & Discrete time signals, Concept of impulse function, unit step function, Signum
function, Signal operations, Representation of signals using impulse function, Power and Energy of signals,
Analogy between vectors and signals, Orthogonal signal space, Signal approximation using orthogonal functions,
Mean square error, Closed or complete set of orthogonal functions, Orthogonality in complex functions.
Introduction to Multidimensional real time signals
9+3 Hours
Unit II
Fourier Series and Fourier Transform
Representation of Fourier series for Continuous time periodic signals , Dirichlet’s conditions, , properties of Fourier
series, Exponential Fourier series, Relationship between Exponential Fourier series and trigonometric Fourier series,
Complex Fourier spectrum
Concept of Fourier transform, Fourier transform of arbitrary signal, Fourier transform of standard signals, Fourier
transform of periodic signals, properties of Fourier transforms, Parseval’s theorem, Fourier transforms involving
impulse function and Signum function.
Introduction to Hilbert Transform
14+4 Hours
Unit III
Linear Time Invariant Systems
Classification of Systems, Impulse response of a system, Response of Linear time invariant (LTI) system, Properties
of LTI system, Transfer function, Ideal filter characteristics, Signal bandwidth, System bandwidth, Distortion-less
transmission, Causality and Paley-Wiener criterion for physical realization.
Concept of convolution in time domain and frequency domain, Graphical representation of convolution,
Convolution property of Fourier transforms, Cross correlation and auto correlation of functions, properties of
correlation functions, Energy density spectrum, Power density spectrum, Relation between auto correlation function
and energy/power spectral density function, Relation between convolution and correlation.
Detection of periodic signals in the presence of Noise by Correlation
13+4 Hours
51
Unit IV
Sampling and Laplace Transforms
Sampling theorem: Graphical and analytical proof for Band Limited Signals, impulse sampling, Natural and Flat top
Sampling, Reconstruction of signal from its samples, Aliasing, Introduction to Band Pass sampling
Review of Laplace transforms, Properties, Inverse Laplace transform, Concept of region of convergence,
constraints on ROC for various classes of signals, Relation between Laplace & Fourier Transform.
Zero-order Hold sampling
9+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B.P. Lathi, Linear systems and Signals, Oxford university press, 2nd edition, 2005
2. V. Oppenheim, A. S. Willsky and S. H. Nawab,Signals and Systems, PHI, 2 nd Edition, 2014
Reference (s)
1. Simon Haykin and Van Veen, Signals & Systems, 2 ndEdition, Wiley, 2008
2. Michel J. Robert, Fundamentals of Signals and Systems,MGH International Edition, 2008
3. L. Philips, J.M.Parr and Eve A.Riskin, Signals, Systems and Transforms, 3 rd Edition, Pearson education,
2004
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 20 --
Understand 30 30 --
Apply 40 40 50
Analyse -- 10 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define impulse function

2. List out any two Dirichlet’s conditions
3. State linearity property
4. Define Nyquist rate
5. List out any two types of sampling
6. List out any three types of continuous time signals
UNDERSTAND
1. Classify two types of continuous time signals

2. Illustrate the relationship between exponential Fourier series and trigonometric Fourier series
3. Compare Autocorrelation and cross correlation function
4. Illustrate the effect of under sampling
5. Explain the properties of Region of convergence
6. Illustrate the orthogonality between two complex functions
4
52
APPLY
 j t  j 2 t  j 3 t
1. Show that the set of exponentials 1, e 0 e 0
,e 0
….. is orthogonal over any interval T o
2. Implement trigonometric Fourier series for the following periodic signal and obtain Fourier series
components
3. Find out Fourier transform to the rectangular pulse shown below and draw the magnitude and phase
spectrum
4. Find out the autocorrelation function of e-atu(t)

5. Find out the Fourier transform of normalized Gaussian pulse
6. Find the Fourier transform of exponentially damped sinusoidal signal
ANALYSE
1. Contrast the distortion less transmission system

2. Outline the signal approximation using orthogonal functions
3. Examine the following signals for causality and time invariance
(i) y(t) = tx(t) (ii) y(t) = x(-t)
4. Justify whether the following signal is energy signal or power signal
𝑡, 𝑜 ≤ 𝑡 ≤ 1
𝑥(𝑡) = {2 − 𝑡, 1 ≤ 𝑡 ≤ 2
0 𝑜𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑤𝑖𝑠𝑒
5. Functions with half-wave symmetry have only odd harmonics. Justify the statement
53
16EC307 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Implement the Universal gates using logic gates
2. Implement the logic circuits using Universal gates
3. Design and analyze combinational logic circuit
4. Design flip-flop using gates and ICs
5. Design and analyze synchronous and asynchronous counter
6. Implement shift registers using flip-flops and design an application using registers and counters
List of experiments
Perform any twelve experiments from the following
1. Verification of logic gates and implementation of universal gates by using logic gates.
2. Realization of a Boolean function by using NAND-NAND and NOR-NOR logic.
3. Design a half adder circuit using gates and implement full adder using half adder
4. Design a half subtractor circuit using gates and implement full subtractor by using half subtractor
5. Implementation of BCD adder using 4bit binary adders
6. BCD to excess- 3 code converter.
7. Design a 4X1 multiplexer and 1X4 Demultiplexer using logic gates
8. Design a 8X3 Encoder and 3X8 Decoder using gates
9. Design a simple 2-bit multiplier using half adders
10. Design a BCD to 7-segment decoder/driver
11. Implementation of 8 bit binary comparator using 4 bit binary comparators
12. Implementation of any two flip-flops using NAND & study of 7476
13. Design of synchronous counter
14. Design of asynchronous counter
List of Augmented Experiments*
1. Design a Universal shift register.

2. Design a sequence detector
3. Design of ALU
4. Design a Digital Clock

1. Morris Mano, Digital Design, PHI, 3rd Edition, 2001
2. Charles H. Roth, Fundamentals of Logic Design, Thomson Publications, 3 rd Edition, 2014
___________________
*Students shall opt any one of the Mini–Projects in addition to the regular experiments
54
16EC308 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate various electronic components and test equipment like multimeter, function generator, and
CRO in order to measure passive components and observe the waveforms
2. Predict the V-I characteristics of PN junction and Zener diodes
3. Compare the operation of BJT and FET through their V-I characteristics
4. Compare half wave and full wave rectifiers with and without filters
5. Implement D.C. Regulated power supplies circuits using Zener and BJT
6. Design and verify the self-biasing CE configuration circuit
List of Experiments
(For Laboratory examination–Minimum of 10 experiments)
Identification and Testing of Components
Demonstration of Measuring Instruments
1. PN Junction diode characteristics A. Forward bias B. Reverse bias.
2. Zener diode characteristics
3. Transistor CB characteristics (Input and Output)
4. Transistor CE characteristics (Input and Output)
5. Half wave rectifier with and without capacitor filter.
6. Full wave center tapped rectifier with and without capacitor filter.
7. FET characteristics
8. Design of self bias for CE configuration
9. Design of Zener regulator.
10. Design of series voltage regulator.
11. Design of shunt voltage regulator.
12. UJT characteristics

1. Design of Regulated DC Power Supply using transistors
2. Design of IR transmitter
3. Design of IR Receiver
4. Water level indicator using transistors
5. Burglar Alarm
1. N.N.Bhargava, D.C.kulshreshtha S.C.Gupta, Basic electronics and linear circuits Tata MC Graw Hill
company Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2. R.L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 9 thEdition,
2006.
5
Students shall opt any one of the Mini–Projects in addition to the regular experiments
55
16EC309 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate signal representation techniques and signal characteristics
2. Interpret the process of sampling and the effects of under sampling
3. Design suitable filters to process the analog signals
4. Contrast the signals in Time and Frequency domain through its respective tools
5. Determine the power content and power spectral density of the signal
6. Determine the Autocorrelation and power density spectrum of the processes
List of programs (Eleven programs to be done)

Implement the following using SCILAB /MATLAB
1. Familiarization with SCILAB/MATLAB: Matrix operations, plotting, relational operators, loops and
functions
2. Generation of basic signals: Exponential, step, impulse, ramp, sinusoidal signals
3. Operations on signals: Signal addition, folding, shifting and multiplication
4. Find the trigonometric Fourier series coefficients of a rectangular periodic signal and reconstruct the signal
by combining the Fourier series coefficients with appropriate weights
5. Find the Fourier transform of a square pulse. Plot its amplitude and phase spectrum
6. Verification of Parsvel’s theorem
7. Design the first order low pass passive filter for given specifications and Plot the magnitude response
8. Design the first order high pass passive filter for given specifications and Plot the magnitude response
9. Find the autocorrelation and cross correlation of the given sequences
10. Generate a discrete time sequence by sampling a continuous time signal. Show that with sampling rates less
than Nyquist rate, aliasing occurs while reconstructing the signal
11. Generate the response of an LTI system for the given input and impulse response
12. Obtain Stability and frequency response of LTI system
13. Generate a Gaussian distributed random sequence for a specified mean and variance. Plot the same.

1. Design Notch filter which removes power line interference in ECG signal
2. Design a low pass filter for the noise suppression in instrumentation amplifier
3. Design a filter for separation of spectral components in music signal
4. Design a filter for separation of back ground noise in sound signal

1. Simon Haykin and Van Veen, Signals & Systems Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2008
2. A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H. Nawab, Signals and Systems. PHI, 2nd Edition,2014
3. Peyton Z. Peebles Probability, Random Variables & Random Signal Principles.MH, 4th Edition, 2001
4. Athanasios Papoulis and S. Unnikrishna Pillai, Probability Random Variables and Stochastic Processes,
PHI, 4th Edition, 2002.
6
56
16ESX1A EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS I

0200
Soft Skills: Communication Skills & Confidence: How Communication Skills affect
Confidence? How to communicate effectively.(with Examples) ; Listening: Listening? ,
Listening Vs Hearing, Possible reasons for why people do not Listen at times, Active Listening
Vs Passive Listening, How Listening can affect our relationships? How Listening helps in
Campus Placements also? (with Examples);Goal Setting: Vision Vs Mission Vs Goals, Why
Goal Setting? SMART Technique to Goal Setting, Putting First things First, SWOT Analysis and
Time Management; Attitude & Confidence: Attitude Vs Skills Vs Knowledge, Attitude Vs
Behaviour, How to develop Positive Attitude? Confidence? Fear? Steps to Overcoming the Fear
of Public Speaking? Public Speaking: JAM, J2M, Presentations by Students on General Topics.
Quantitative Aptitude: Problems on numbers - H.C.F and L.C.M - Problems on ages –

Averages - Time and Work - Time & Distance – Percentages - Profit & loss - Ratio &
Proportions – Partnership - Simple interest & Compound interest – Clocks – Calendars - Pipes
and Cisterns - Mensuration
Verbal reasoning: Number series - Direction test - Blood relations – Syllogisms - Seating
arrangement - Permutations, combinations and Probability – Dice - Cube and Cuboid - Data
sufficiency - Logical deductions – Analogies - Course of action - Cause and effect - Data
interpretation
57
16EE410 LINEAR CONTROL SYSTEMS
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain mathematical models of control systems in continuous time

2. Formulate a control system using block diagram and signal flow graph techniques
3. Find the transient and steady state performances of a control system
4. Contrast the stability of a system using time domain and frequency domain techniques
5. Design different compensators and controllers in time/frequency domain
6. Compute the controllability and observability of a given system
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 1 1
2 2 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1
4 3 2 2 2
5 3 2 2 2
6 3 2 2 2
Unit I
Mathematical Models of Physical Systems
Concepts of Control Systems: Open Loop and closed loop control systems, Classification of control
systems, Transfer function, Modeling of Electric systems, Translational and rotational mechanical systems,
Block diagram reduction Technique, Signal flow graph, Feedback Characteristics-Effects of feedback.
Effect of feedback on disturbance
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Time Domain Analysis
Standard test signals, Time response of first and second order systems, time domain specifications,
characteristic Equation, Static error constants, Generalized error series, Effects of P, PI, PD and PID
controllers, Concept of stability, Routh-Hurwitz stability criterion, Difficulties and limitations in RH stability
criterion, Root locus concept, construction of root loci, Stability analysis using root locus, Effects of addition
of poles and zeros on root locus plot.
PID controller, Rate feedback controller
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency response characteristics, Frequency domain specifications, Time and frequency domain parameters
correlations, Bode plot, transfer function from the Bode plot, Stability Analysis using Bode Plot, Polar Plot
and Nyquist’s stability criterion.
M & N circles, Nicholas Chart
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
State Space Analysis and Compensators
Concepts of state, state space modeling of physical systems, Representation of state space model in different
canonical forms, Transfer function and state space model correlations, Solution of state equations, State
Transition Matrix and it’s Properties, Basic concept of Controllability and Observability.
Lag, lead and lag-lead compensators.
Diagonalization
10+3 Hours
59
Total =45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Control Systems Engineering by I.J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, New Age International (P) Limited, 6th
edition, 2015.
2. Modern Control Engineering by Katsuhiko Ogata, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 4 th edition, 2006.
Reference (s)
1. Control Systems by K. Alice Mary and P. Ramana, Universities Press (India) Pvt. Ltd., 1 st edition,
2016.
2. Control Systems by Smarajit Ghosh, Pearson education. 2nd edition, 2012.
3. Automatic Control Systems by Benjamin C.Kuo, John Wiley & Sons, 9th edition, 2011.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 10 10 --
Understand 40 20 10
Apply 25 30 45
Analyze 25 40 45
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define a closed loop control system
2. List any 4 applications of closed loop control system
3. Define transfer function
4. List 2 advantages of Signal flow graph over Block-diagram reduction technique
5. List any 3 properties of state transition matrix
6. Label different types of frequency domain analysis methods
UNDERSTAND
1. Compare SISO and MIMO systems
2. Explain the traffic control system concepts using open loop as well as closed loop system
3. Explain f-v and f-i analysis
4. Explain different cases in R-H criteria
5. Represent state transition matrix
6. Explain Mason’s gain formula
APPLY
1. Find Open Loop and closed loop control systems for the person walking on a road.
2. Construct root locus for the open loop T.F function G(s) = (s+2)/(s+1)(s+3)
3. Implement transfer function for the state space equation give bellow
.
x  AX  BU y  CX  DU
4. Construct the Bode plot for given open loop transfer function
G(s) = (s+2)/(s+1)(s+3)
5. Find the Nyquist plot for the given open loop transfer function. G(s) = (s+2)/(s+1)(s+3)
1
60
ANALYZE
1. Compare the properties of time domain and frequency domain analysis
2. Outline the effect of disturbance on the system performance due to feedback
3. Differentiate the advantage and disadvantages of the root locus and Bode plot
4. Outline the variation of root locus with respect to variations in K
5. Outline the state space model in different canonical forms.
61
16IT306 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING THROUGH JAVA

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply object oriented concepts to real world problems
2. Develop applications using different types of inheritances
3. Create and use user defined packages
4. Analyze and recover runtime exceptions arise in the applications
5. Apply parallel processing applications using threads
6. Develop internet based interactive applications using peripheral functions
COs–POs Mapping
1 1 3 2 3 2
2 2 3 3 3 2
3 1 2 3 3 2
4 3 2 3 3 2
5 2 3 3 3 2
6 1 3 3 3 3
Unit I
Introduction to Java
Overview of Object Oriented Programming principles, Importance of Java to the Internet, Byte code,
Methods, classes and instances, Data types, arrays, control statements, simple java program, Classes and
Objects– constructors, methods, access control, this keyword, overloading methods and constructors,
garbage collection
Features of object oriented programming–Java History–Computer Programming Hierarchy–Role of Java
Programmer in Industry
11+3 Hours
Unit II
Inheritance, Packages & Interface
Inheritance: Hierarchical abstractions, Base class and subclass, subtype, substitutability, forms of
inheritance-specialization, specification, construction, extension, limitation, combination, Benefits of
inheritance, super keyword, final keyword with inheritance, polymorphism, abstract classes
Packages: Defining, Creating and Accessing a Package, Understanding CLASSPATH, importing packages,
Member access rules, Interface: Defining an interface, differences between classes and interfaces,
implementing interface, variables in interface and extending interfaces
Nested–Inner Class & Anonymous Classes–Generic Class Types
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Exception Handling & Multithreading
Exception handling: Concepts and benefits of exception handling, exception hierarchy, usage of try, catch,
throw, throws and finally, built-in and User Defined Exceptions
Multithreading: Definition thread, thread life cycle, creating threads, synchronizing threads, daemon threads
Control Flow In Exceptions– JVM reaction to Exceptions– Inter Communication of Threads– Critical Factor
in Thread–Deadlock 11+4 Hours
62
Unit IV
Applets & Event Handling
Applets: Concepts of Applets, differences between applets and applications, life cycle of an applet, types of
applets, creating applets, passing parameters to applets, The AWT class hierarchy, user interface components
labels, button, Text components
Event Handling: Events, Delegation event model, handling mouse and keyboard events, Adapter classes,
inner classes, Compare basic AWT components with swing components, More user interface components-
canvas, scrollbars, check box, choices, lists panels–scroll pane, dialogs, menu bar, layout managers.
Applet Security Policies–Anonymous Inner classes a Short–cut to Event Handling–Java Utilities (java.util
Package)
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. H. Schildt, Java: The complete reference, 7th Edition, TMH, 2006
2. T. A. Budd, An Introduction to Object–Oriented Programming, 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley
Longman, 2002
Reference (s)
1. Dietal & Dietal, Java: How to Program, 8th Edition, PHI, 2010
2. C. S. Horstmann and G. Cornell, Core Java, Vol 1. Fundamentals, 7 th Edition, Pearson Education,
2004
3. C. Horstmann, BIG JAVA Compatible with Java 5 & 6, 3 rd Edition, Wiley Publishers, 2008
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 15 --
Understand 40 25 --
Apply 20 40 70
Analyze 10 20 20
Evaluate -- -- 10
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List all OOPs principles
2. Define class and object
3. Illustrate various data types supported by JAVA
4. State various access controls available in JAVA
5. Define inheritance
6. Define thread
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain byte code
2. Explain the use of super, static and final keywords
3. Illustrate the use of try, catch, throw and throws
4. Java is purely object oriented programming language. Explain
5. Explain types of polymorphism with Example
2
63
APPLY
1. Write statements that perform the following one-dimensional-array operations:
a) Set the 10 elements of integer array counts to zero
b) Add one to each of the 15 elements of integer array bonus
c) Display the five values of integer array best Scores in column format
2. Create two arrays that store all even no’s in one array and all odd no’s in another array for a
given set of elements
3. Write a java program to implements final variable, Method and classes
4. Explain the reason for the following code giving compiling errors.
abstract class AbstractClass
{
abstract void abstractMethod()
{
System.out.println("First Method");
}
}
5. Write a java program to implement the following techniques
a) Method Overloading
b) Method Overriding
6. Write a Java program to implement Virtual function technique
ANALYZE
1. Compare and Contrast an abstract class and an interface
2. Differentiate method overloading and overriding
3. Differentiate abstraction and encapsulation
4. Identify the uses of calling a synchronize method inside a synchronize method
5. Identify memory leak problems in Java objects
64
16EC403 ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain various blocks in communication systems

2. Compute modulation indexes for AM and FM modulation techniques
3. Illustrate the analog modulator and demodulator circuits
4. Implement different types of Pulse modulation techniques
5. Compare the noise level in Analog communication systems
6. Explain the operations of Transmitters and Receivers
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO14
1 2 1 1
2 3 2 2
3 2 1 1
4 2 1 2
5 3 2 2
6 2 1 1
Unit I
Amplitude Modulation
Introduction to communication system, Need for modulation, Frequency Division Multiplexing, Amplitude
Modulation, Definition, Time and frequency domains description, single tone modulation, power relations
in AM waves, Generation of AM waves: square law Modulator, Principle of Detection of AM Wave:
Envelope detector
DSB Modulation: Double side band suppressed carrier modulators, time and frequency domains description,
Generation of DSBSC Waves, Balanced Modulators, Coherent detection of DSB-SC Modulated waves
SSB Modulation: Frequency domain description, Frequency discrimination method for generation of AM
SSB Modulated Wave, Time domain description, Phase discrimination method for generating AM SSB
Modulated waves. Demodulation of SSB Waves, Vestigial side band modulation: Frequency description,
Generation of VSB Modulated wave, Time domain description.
Switching modulator, Square law detector, COSTAS loop
14+4 Hours
Unit II
Angle modulation
Basic concepts, Frequency Modulation: Single tone frequency modulation, Spectrum Analysis of Sinusoidal
FM Wave, Narrow band FM, Wide band FM, Constant Average Power, Transmission bandwidth of FM
Wave, Generation of FM Waves, Direct FM, Detection of FM Waves: Balanced Frequency discriminator,
Zero crossing detector.
Phase locked loop
9+3Hours
Unit III
Noise & Pulse modulation
Noise in Analog communication System, Noise in DSB & SSB System Noise in AM System, Noise in Angle
Modulation System, Threshold effect in Angle Modulation System, Pre-emphasis & de-emphasis
Time Divison Multiplexing, Types of Pulse modulation, PAM (Single polarity, double polarity) PWM:
Generation & demodulation, PPM: Generation and demodulation.
Noise performance of Analog Pulse Modulation systems 10+4Hours
65
Unit IV
Transmitters & Receivers
Radio Transmitter: Classification of Transmitter, AM Transmitter, FM Transmitter:Variable reactance FM
Transmitter, frequency stability in FM Transmitter
Receiver Types: Tuned radio frequency receiver, Superheterodyne receiver, RF section and Characteristics,
Frequency changing and tracking, Intermediate frequency, AGC, FM Receiver, Comparison of FM and AM
Receiver.
Phase modulated FM transmitter
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 hours
Textbook (s)
1. Simon Haykin , An Introduction to Analog& Digital Communications, John Wiley, 2nd Edition,
2012
2. George Kennedy and Bernard Davis , Electronic Communication Systems, TMH, 4thEdition, 2004
Reference (s)
1. H Taub & D. Schilling, Gautam Sahe, Principles of Communication Systems , TMH, 3 rd Edition.
2007
2. R.P. Singh, SP Sapre, Communication Systems TMH, 3rd Edition, 2017
3. John G. Proakis, Masond, Salehi, Fundamentals of Communication Systems, Pearson Education, 3rd
Edition, 2008
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 20 --
Understand 40 30 --
Apply 30 40 70
Analyse -- 10 30
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define angle modulation

2. Define modulation index
3. List any two advantages of DSBSC
4. List any two advantages of VSB
5. Define noise figure
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the need for modulation
2. Illustrate the operation of square law modulator
3. Explain quadrature null effect of the coherent detector
4. Compare SSB modulation with DSB-SC modulation
5. Illustrate the operation of Frequency modulation
3
66
6. Explain the demodulation procedure for PWM signal demodulation
APPLY
1. AM transmitter radiating 132 KW, when a audio sine wave is modulating it to a depthof 80% and
150KW, when a second sinusoidal audio wave also modulates it simultaneously, Find the depth of
modulation for second audio wave?
2. The antenna current of an AM transmitter is 8A when only the carrier is sent, but it increases to
8.93A when the carrier is modulated by a single sine wave. Calculate the percentage modulation.
Find the antenna current when the percentage of modulation changes to 0.8
3. An FM signal with single tone modulation has a frequency deviation of 15KHz and a bandwidth of
50KHz. Find the frequency of the modulating signal
ANALYSE
1. Certain transmitter is radiating 132KW when a certain audio sinewave is modulating it to a depth of
80% and 150KW when a second sinusoidal audio wave also modulates it simultaneously. What is
the depth of modulation for the second audio wave?
2. The maximum frequency deviation allowed in an FM broadcast system is 75 kHz. If the modulating
signal is a single-tone sinusoid of 10 kHz, find the bandwidth of the FM signal. What will be the
change in the bandwidth, if modulating frequency is doubled?
3. When the modulating frequencies in an FM system is 400Hz and the modulating voltage is 2.4v the
modulation index is 60. What is the modulation index when the modulating frequency is reduced to
250 Hz and the modulating voltage is simultaneously raised to 3.2V Calculate the maximum
deviation
4. Prove that the figure of merit of AM system for single tone modulation with 100% modulation is
1/3
5. What is the required transmitter power and channel bandwidth if the following modulation schemes
are employed? a) DSB AM b) SSB AM c) Conventional AM with modulation index=0.8.The
message signal m(t) has a bandwidth of 10KHz, a power of 16W and a maximum amplitude of 6.It
is desirable to transmit this message to a destination via a channel with 80dB attenuation and
additive white noise with power-spectral density Sn(f)= N0/2 =10 -12 W/Hz, and achieve a SNR at
the modulator output of at least 50dB
67
16EC404 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS AND WAVES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Classify different coordinate systems
2. Execute the problems on different charge distributions using Coulomb’s law & Gauss law
3. Assess the problems on current elements of electrostatics and magneto statics
4. Implement Maxwell’s equations for plane waves and their propagation in different media
5. Predict the reflection and refraction of uniform plane waves in different media interfaces
6. Compare wave equations for uniform plane waves
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO14
1 2 1 2
2 2 1 2
3 3 2 2
4 3 2 2
5 3 2 2
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Vector calculus and coordinate systems
Vector fields, Different co-ordinate systems, Physical significances of grad, div, curl and Laplacian, line
integral, surface integral, volume integral with examples in the context of electricity and magnetism,
statements of Stokes theorem and Gauss theorem, Expression of grad, div, curl and Laplacian in spherical
and cylindrical co-ordinates.
Differential surface and differential volumes in spherical coordinate systems
9+4 Hours
Unit -II
Electrostatics
Coulomb's Law and Electric Field Intensity: Experimental Law of Coulomb, Electric Field Intensity. Fields
due to Continuous charge distributions: Line Charge, Ring charge, Sheet Charge, Related Problems, Electric
Flux Density, Gauss' Law and Divergence: Electric Flux Density, Gauss' Law, Gauss' Law Differential
form, Related Problems.
Energy and Potential: Work done in moving a point charge in an Electric Field, Line Integral, Definition of
Potential, Relation between E & V, Energy Density in static Electric Field, Maxwell’s Two Equations for
Electrostatic Fields, Related Problems. Poisson’s and Laplace's Equations.
Application of Gauss' Law
13+4 Hours
Unit -III
Magneto-statics and Maxwell’s equations
The Steady Magnetic Field: Biot-Savart Law and Ampere's Circuital Law, Magnetic Flux and Flux Density,
Scalar and Vector Magnetic Potentials, Related Problems, force on a moving charge and differential current
element, Energy in static magnetic fields, self-inductance, related problems.
Maxwell’s Equations: Faraday's law, Inconsistency of Ampere’s law, Displacement Current, Maxwell's
Equation in point and integral form of different media, Dielectric–Dielectric boundary condition, Dielectric–
conductor boundary condition, related problems.
Applications of Biot-Savart Law
12+4 Hours
68
Unit IV
Plane waves, reflection and refraction of plane waves
Uniform Plane Waves: Wave equations for conducting and perfect dielectric, Relation between E & H,
Sinusoidal Wave equations, Wave Propagation in lossless and conducting media, and propagation in good
Conductors, Skin Effect, good dielectrics, Poynting Vector and power considerations, Power loss in plane
conductor, Wave polarization, related problems.
Reflection and Refraction of Uniform Plane wave: Definitions of Reflection coefficient and Transmission
coefficient, Waves at Normal Incidence for perfect conductor-dielectric boundary & dielectric-dielectric
boundary. Oblique incidence: Perpendicular and Parallel Polarization, for dielectric-dielectric boundary,
Brewster angle, Surface Impedance, related problems.
Surface impedance, Poynting theorem
11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text Book (s)
1. William H. Hayt Jr. and John A. Buck ,Engineering Electromagnetics, Tata McGraw Hill, 6 th
Edition, 2003
2. E. C. Jordan and K.G. Balman ,Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating systems, PHI, 2 nd Edition,
2011
3. Matthew N.O. Sadiku, Elements of Electromagnetics, Oxford Univ. Press, 3rd Edition, 2004
Reference (s)
1. Joseph Edminister ,Electromagnetics, Schaum Outline Series, McGraw Hill, 2 ndEdition,1994
2. David K. Cheng, Field and Wave Electromagnetics, Pearson Education Asia, 2 ndEdition, Indian
Reprint 2001
3. Gottapu Sasibhushana Rao, Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines, Wiley
Publishers, 1st Edition, 2012
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 20 --
Understand 40 40 --
Apply 40 40 70
Analyze -- -- 30
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List co-ordinate systems
2. State Gauss Law
3. State Stokes theorem
4. State Coulomb’s law
5. List the four Maxwell’s Equations
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the significances of gradient, divergence, curl
2. Explain Four point charges each 20C are on x and y axis at 4 m. Find the force on a 100C point
charge at (0,0,3)m
3. Illustrate ampere’s law
4
69
4. Formulate the relationship between unit vectors of Cartesian and Cylindrical Coordinates
5. Formulate the Electric field intensity due to a circular disc of charge density s C/m2
APPLY
1. A circular ring of charge with radius 2m, lies in z = 0 plane with center at origin. The charge
density on the ring is 10nC/m. Find the point charge q at the origin which produces the same
electric field at(0,0,5)m on that of the ring at the same point
r
2. Let D  a r nC / m 2 in free space , (i)Find E at r = 0.2m, (ii)Find the total charge within the
3
sphere of radius 0.2m
3. Construct the expressions of electric field for point charge and infinite line charge by using Gauss
law
4. Two infinite sheets of charge, each with charge density s C/m2located at x = 1 m. Find Electric
field intensity in all regions
5. Two point charges of equal mass m and charge Q are suspended at a common point by two threads
of negligible mass and length. Find the inclination angle  of each thread at equilibrium to the
vertical.
ANALYSE
1. Differentiate the propagation characteristics of conducting and dielectric medium

2. Outline modified Maxwell’s equations
3. Outline the wave propagation in conducting medium
4. Conduction current is equal to displacement current in parallel plate capacitor. Justify the
statement
5. Differentiate between vertical and horizontal polarizations
70
16EC405 ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Implement single stage amplifiers at low and high frequencies using transistors and FETs
2. Implement multistage amplifiers at low and high frequencies using transistors and FETs
3. Illustrate feedback amplifiers for different applications
4. Design sinusoidal Oscillators for a specified frequency
5. Design power amplifier for different applications
6. Assess tuned amplifiers for communication systems
COs – POs Mapping

1 3 2 1 2 2
2 3 2 1 2 2
3 2 1 1 2 2
4 3 2 2 2 2
5 3 2 2 2 2
6 3 2 1 2 2
Unit I
Low frequency amplifiers
h-parameter representation of a transistor, Analysis of single stage transistor amplifier using h-parameters:
voltage gain, current gain, input impedance and output impedance of CE, CB, and CC amplifiers using exact
and approximate analysis. Miller’s and Dual of Miller’s theorem.
Analysis of single stage FET amplifiers - voltage gain, input impedance and output impedance of CS, CG,
and CD amplifiers.
Analysis of single stage MOSFET amplifiers.
12+4 Hours
Unit II
High frequency and multi stage amplifiers
Hybrid-  CE transistor Model, Determination of Hybrid-  Conductances, CE Short Circuit Current Gain,
Parameters of f  and fT , Current Gain with resistance load using approximate analysis, Gain Bandwidth
product, Emitter follower at high frequencies.
Methods of Inter Stage Coupling, Frequency response of RC coupled CE and CS amplifiers. n–Stage
Cascaded Amplifier, Low frequency analysis of High Input Resistance Transistor Circuits-Darlington pair,
Cascode amplifier, CE-CC Amplifiers.
Variation of hybrid- π parameters with voltage, current and temperature, Frequency response of single stage
CB,CC and JFET amplifiers and its gains at low and high frequency.
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Feedback amplifiers and oscillators
Concept of feedback, effect of negative feedback on the amplifier Characteristics. Feedback Amplifier
Topologies. Method of Analysis of Voltage Series, Current Series, Voltage Shunt and Current Shunt
feedback Amplifiers, Design considerations.
Condition for oscillations, LC Oscillators–Hartley and Colpitts oscillators, RC Oscillators - RC Phase Shift
and Wein bridge Oscillators, Frequency and amplitude Stability of Oscillators, Crystal Oscillators. Design
considerations.
Clapp oscillator, Tuned collector oscillator
11+4Hours
71
Unit IV
Power and tuned amplifiers
Class A Power Amplifier, Maximum Value of Efficiency of Class A Amplifier, Transformer Coupled
Amplifier, Push Pull Amplifier, Complimentary Symmetry Circuits (Transformer Less Class B Power
Amplifier), Phase Inverters, Class–C amplifier, Class D Operation, , Heat Sinks.
Tuned amplifiers, Quality factor of a tank circuit, Single Tuned Capacitive Coupled Amplifier, CE Double
Tuned Amplifier, Stagger tuned amplifiers, Synchronous tuned amplifiers and application of Tuned
Amplifiers.
Single tuned transformed coupled amplifier, stability of tuned amplifiers
11+4Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. J.Millman, C.C.Halkias and Chetan D Parikh, Integrated Electronics, 2ndEdition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2017
2. K.Venkata Rao, K.Rama Sudha, Electronic Devices and Circuits, McGraw Hill, Ist Edition, 2015
3. Theodore F. Bogart Jr., J.S. Beasley and G. Rico, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Pearson Edition,
6th Edition, 2004
Reference (s)
1. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices and Circuits Theory,
Pearson/Prentice Hall, 11th Edition, 2015
2. M.H. Rashid, Thomson , Micro Electronic Circuits: Analysis and Design, PWS Publishers,1999
3. B. Visvesvara Rao, K. Raja Rajeswari, P. Chalam Raju Pantulu , K. Bhaskara Rama Murty,
Electronic Circuit Analysis, Pearson Education Ist Edition, 2012
4. Donald A. Neaman, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design Mc Graw Hill, 2 ndEdition, 2001
5. Sedra A.S. and K.C. Smith , MicroElectronic Circuits , Oxford University Press, 5 thEdition, 2009
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 30 30 --
Understand 35 35 --
Apply 35 35 50
Analyse -- -- 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State Millers theorem.

2. Recall the concept of CE configuration and draw the transistor equivalent circuit at high frequencies
3. Define characteristics of negative feedback amplifiers.
4. List any two applications of Cascode Amplifier.
5. Define fT , f  and also obtain relation between them.
5
72
UNDERSTAND
1. Identify an appropriate transistor amplifier for (i) High Power gain (ii) High Voltage gain (iii) High
current gain.
2. Explain the small signal model for CD amplifier and derive the expression for voltage gain, input
and output impedance of common drain amplifier.
3. Explain the operation of Hartley oscillator? Draw the circuit diagram? Show that the frequency of
1
oscillation is f 
2 ( L1  L2 )C
4. Classify various types of oscillators? Explain in brief.
5. Identify where the Darlington connection is used? Explain
APPLY
1. Find current gain, overall voltage gain, input and output resistances for the amplifier shown in
figure-1. Here for the transistor hrb=0, hib=25Ω, hfe=-0.99, h0b=1µ℧ .
2. Find the voltage gain and input resistance for fig.1 shown below. use Typical values of h-
parameters.
3. The gain of amplifier is decreased to 2000 with negative feedback from its gain of 5000. Find the
feedback factor and the amount of negative feedback.
4. The following circuit parameters are specified for a single-tuned capacitive coupled transistor RF
amplifier: R0 of the amplifier stage is 40K Ω, Ri of the next stage is 20K Ω, and C=47 pF, The stray
capacitance at the output terminals is 3 pF. Compute (i) 𝑓0, (ii) 𝑄𝑒 and (iii) band with.
5. Use the equivalent circuit of a transistor at high frequencies and derive an expression for feedback
conductance, input conductance and base spreading resistance.
6. In the circuit shown in Fig2, C = 500 pF and the coil has L = 50.7µH and R L = 1 MΩ. Find
(i) the resonant frequency(ii) d.c. load and a.c. load.
73
ANALYSE
1. Differentiate class A and class B amplifier.

2. Compare the bandwidth of a single tuned with double tuned capacitive coupled amplifier.
3. Justify the small-signal voltage gain and input resistance of a common-emitter circuit with an
emitter resistor. For the circuit in below figure, the transistor parameters are: β = 100, VBE(on) = 0.7
V.
4. A high frequency amplifier uses a transistor which is driven from a source with Rs=0. calculate
value of fH, if RL =0 and RL=1kΩ. Assume typical values of hybrid-π parameters.
5. Compare positive and negative feedback amplifiers.
74
16EC406 PULSE AND DIGITAL CIRCUITS
3024
Course Outcomes
1. Design of linear wave shaping circuits for different applications

2. Construct nonlinear wave shaping circuits to remove undesired portion of input signal
3. Construct nonlinear circuits to clamp the input signal to desired level
4. Differentiate multivibrators for different applications
5. Design of Time base generators for different applications
6. Design of pulse generation circuits and sampling gates
COs – POs Mapping

1 3 2 2 3 3
2 3 2 2 3 3
3 3 2 2 3 3
4 3 2 2 3 3
5 3 2 2 3 3
6 2 1 2
Unit I
Linear Wave Shaping Circuits
High pass, low pass RC circuits, their response for sinusoidal, step, pulse, square, ramp and Exponential
inputs. RC/RL network as differentiator and integrator, attenuators, RLC circuits and their response for step
input.
Double differentiator
1. Design and simulate a high pass RC circuit for given input to observe the desired output wave
forms.
2. Design and simulate low pass RC circuit for given input to observe the desired output wave forms.
12+6 Hours
Unit II
Non Linear Wave Shaping Circuits
Diode clippers, Transistor clippers, clipping at two independent levels, Transfer characteristics of clippers,
Emitter coupled clipper, Clamping operation, clamping circuits using diode with different inputs, Clamping
circuit theorem, practical clamping circuits, Application of Clippers & Clampers
The Double differentiator as a Comparator
1. Design and simulate different types of clipping circuits for given sinusoidal input to observe the
desired output waveform shapes.
2. Design and simulate different types of clamping circuits for given input to observe the desired
output wave forms.
10 +6Hours
75
Unit III
Multivibrators
Diode as a switch, piecewise linear diode characteristics, Transistor as a switch, Breakdown voltage
consideration of transistor, Design of transistor switch, transistor-switching times.
BistableMultivibrator: Methods of triggering for multivibrators, Fixed, Self bias binary circuit and Schmitt
trigger using transistors.
MonostableMultivibrator: Collector coupled MonostableMultivibrator, Voltage to Time converter and
Emitter coupled MonostableMultivibrator.
AstableMultivibrators: Collector coupled AstableMultivibrator circuit, Voltage to Frequency converter and
Emitter coupled AstableMutivibrator.
Voltage- controlled- oscillator
1. Design and simulate Bistable multivibrator and observe the desired waveforms at each base and
Collector.
2. Design and simulate Monostable multivibrator and observe the desired waveforms at each base and
Collector.
3. Design and simulate Astable multivibrator and observe the desired waveforms at each base and
Collector.
13+12 Hours
Unit IV
Time Base Generators
General features of a time base signal, Voltage sweep generators using UJT, CB Configuration circuits,
Miller and Bootstrap time base generators, Current time base generators.
Application of blocking oscillator, Astable relaxation circuits, Monostable relaxation circuits, Unidirectional
and Bi-directional sampling gates, Applications of sampling gates.
Applications of Time base generators
1. Design and simulate UJT Relaxation Oscillator and generate time base signal.
2. Design and simulate Sampling gate circuit for given input to generate the desired output signal
10 +6Hours
Total: 45+30 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. J. Millman, H. Taub and M. Surya Prakash Rao, Millman’s Pulse, Digital and Switching
Waveforms, McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, 2010
2. VenkataRao.K, RamaSudha.K and Manmadha Rao.G, Pulse and Digital Circuits, Pearson
Education, 1st Edition, 2012
Reference (s)
1. Pulse and Digital Circuits – A. Anand Kumar, PHI, 2005.
76
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 30 30 --
Understand 50 50 --
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse - - 40
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Linear wave shaping

2. Define Ramp signal.
3. List any three applications of sampling gates
4. Define slope, displacement and transmission errors in voltage sweep generators.
5. State the clamping circuit theorem.
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the response of High pass RC circuit to square wave input When a Ramp signal is passed
through a low pass RC circuit what will be the output waveform. Derive the expression for the
output.
2. Illustrate the working of boot strap time base generator with transistor.
3. Identify the suitable methods to improve the linearity of simple current sweep generator.
4. Explain the voltage levels of hysteresis in Schmitt trigger.
5. Illustrate the synchronization of sweep circuit with symmetrical signals.
APPLY
1. Design transistor inverter let VCC=10V, IC=1mA and hfe=50.

2. Design a symmetric collector-coupled astable multivibrator to genereate the square wave of 10 kHz
having peak to peak amplitude 10V where hfe(min)=30, Ic=2mA.
3. Design a Schmitt trigger circuit for the following specifications: UTP=8V,LTP=5V, Vcc =15V,
hfe=25 and Ic =2mA.
4. Show a high pass circuit having a time constant smaller than the time period of input signal behaves
as a differentiator.
5. Show that an astable multivibrator can be used as a voltage to frequency converter.
ANALYSE
1. RLC circuit behaves as a ringing circuit. Justify.

2. Diode series clipper acts as an amplitude comparator.Justify.
3. Compare three logic families with their characteristics like propagation delay, power dissipation per
Gate, noise margin, noise immunity and fan out?
4. Compare the responses of perfectly compensated, under compensated and over compensated
attenuator.
5. Differentiate the bootstrap and miller sweep circuits.
EVALUATE
1. Determine how an uncompensated attenuator can be modified as a compensated attenuator.
77
2. Defend how diode series clipper acts as an amplitude comparator.

3. Determine the circuit of 3-input OR gate using diodes and resistors and explain with truth table.
4. Determine recovery time of a sweep circuit.
5. Determine the comparison of different logic families.
78
16IT309 JAVA LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Make use of JAVA SDK environment to create - debug and run java programs
2. Create applications based on code reusability
3. Develop programs using threads
4. Develop and debug real time problems using exception handling
5. Create interactive applications using event handling mechanisms
6. Design Graphical User Interface using AWT components
List of Experiments
1. Write a Java program to demonstrate String handling methods.
2. Write a Java program for sorting a given list using inheritance concept.
3. Write a Java program for creating one base class for student personal details and inherit those
details into the sub class of student Educational details to display complete student information.
4. Write a Java program to implement matrix operations using multidimensional arrays.
5. Write a Java program that illustrates runtime polymorphism.
6. Write a Java program - to demonstrate tokenizing given string/text using String Tokenizer class
7. Write a Java program to create a package which has classes and methods to read Student Admission
details.
8. Write a Java program to define and handle Exceptions in the implementation of Program3. (Also
make use of throw - throws).
9. Java program that simulates a traffic light.
10. Write a Java program for handling mouse events.
11. Write a Java Program to design a Job Application/ Student Admission Form and store the values in
a file.
12. Write a java program for a simple event handler to display cut/copy/paste events using swings.
13. Write a Java program that works as a simple Calculator.

1. New Patient Registry Management System
2. Restaurant Billing Management System
3. Library Management System
4. ATM Management System
5. Bus Ticket Booking Management System
6. Movie Ticket Booking Management System
7. Queuing Management System
8. Attendance Management System
9. Medical Store Billing Management System
10. Text Editor Projects in Java
11. Google Search Engine Filter
12. Electronic voting System
13. Day Planner
14. Library management System
15. Personal Finance Management System

1. JAVA Lab manual, Department of CSE and IT, GMRIT, Rajam
7Students shall opt any one of the Mini–Projects in addition to the regular experiments
79
16EC408 ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS LAB
0032
Course Outcomes
1. Implement sampling theorem
2. Compute and simulate analog modulation & demodulation techniques
3. Construct pre-emphasis and de-emphasis at the transmitter and receiver respectively
4. Construct diode detector and AGC circuit that are necessary for good reception of the signal
5. Assess the spectrum of modulating signal and modulated signal
6. Design and simulate the pulse modulation techniques
List of Experiments
(a)Any nine experiments from the following

1. Verification of Sampling Theorem
2. Amplitude Modulation & Demodulation
3. AM - DSB SC - Modulation & Demodulation
4. Frequency Modulation & Demodulation
5. Pre-emphasis & De-emphasis
6. Spectrum Analysis of Modulated signal using Spectrum Analyzer
7.Design of envelope Detector
8. AGC Circuits
9. Pulse Amplitude Modulation–Modulation& Demodulation
10. PWM, PPM - Modulation & Demodulation
11. Phase Locked loop(PLL)
12. Design of F.M receiver (90.4 MHz)
(b)Any three experiments from the following using SCILAB/ MATLAB software
1. Amplitude Modulation–Modulation & Demodulation

2. AM - DSB SC: Modulation & Demodulation
3. Frequency Modulation–Modulation & Demodulation
4. Pulse Amplitude Modulation–Modulation & Demodulation
5. PWM, PPM - Modulation & Demodulation
Equipments & Software required:

Equipment:
1. RPS - 0–30 V
2. CRO - 0–20 M Hz
3. Function Generators - 0–1 M Hz
4. Components
5. Multimeters
Software:
i.) Computer Systems with latest specifications
ii) Connected in LAN (Optional)
iii) Operating system (Windows XP)
iv) Simulations software (SCILAB/ MATLAB)

1. Mobile Phone Detector
2. FM Transmitter
3. FM Receiver
4. HAM Radio Receiver
6
80

1. John G. proakis, Masoundsalehi, Gerhard bakh ,Contempary communication system using
MATLAB &Simulink,Thomson India publishers, 2007
81
16EC409 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Design and verify linear and nonlinear wave shaping circuits
2. Parse the Mono stable Multivibrator and Schmitt trigger circuits
3. Implement the single stage amplifier circuits using BJT and FET for desired characteristics
4. Design of sinusoidal oscillations for the desired frequency
5. Check the output and efficiency of class-A power amplifier
6. Determine the gain and bandwidth of amplifiers
List of Experiments
Perform any twelve experiments from the following:
1. Linear Wave shaping (Different time constant, Differentiator, Integrator)

2. Non- Linear Wave Shaping – Clippers
3. Non- Linear Wave Shaping – Clampers
4. Design and analysis of Monostable multivibrator
5. Design and analysis of UJT relaxation oscillator
6. Schmitt trigger
7. Design and analysis of CE Amplifier
8. Design and analysis of CS Amplifier
9. Design and Analysis of voltage shunt feedback amplifier (with & without feedback) using BJT
10. Design and Analysis of current series feedback amplifier (with & without feedback) using BJT
11. Design of Wein bridge oscillator using BJT
12. Design of RC-Phase shift oscillator using BJT/ FET
13. Class-A Power Amplifier
14. Frequency response of CE, CS amplifier
15. Single tuned voltage amplifier
Equipments required for Laborataries:

i. RPS - 0 – 30 V
ii. CRO - 0 – 20 M Hz.
iii. Function Generators - 0 – 1 M Hz
iv. Components
v. Multimeters
List of Augmented experiments7

1. Design a Power Amplifier which gives 50% efficiency and Conducts for total input signal.
2. Design an Oscillator which is also used for the measurement of capacitance at Audio frequency.
3. Design an Emitter coupled Monostable Multivibrator.
4. Design a self-Bias Bistable Multivibrator.
5. Design a clamping circuit to clamp 10V P-P input voltage to +3v DC volts.

1. J. Millman and H. Taub,Pulse, Digital and Switching Waveforms , McGraw-Hill,International
student Edition,1991.
2. Jacob Millman and Christos C.Halkias, Integrated Electronics,McGraw-Hill,International
Edition,1991.
7
Students shall opt any one of the Augmented experiment in addition to the regular experiments
82
16ESX1B EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS II

0201
Soft Skills: Communication Skills (An Overview): Communication? Elements of

Communication, Communication Skills and Role of Feedback, Cross-Checking, Detail
Orientation and Follow-up in our Interactions (with Examples); Building Vocabulary:
Reading Articles, Exploring New Words, Meanings and the usage with examples; Self
Esteem: Definition? Types of Self Esteem, Causes of Low Self Esteem, Merits of Positive
Self Esteem and Steps to build a positive Self Esteem; Group Discussions (Practice): GD?
GD Vs Debate, Overview of a GD , Skills assessed in a GD, Dos & Don’ts, & Conducting
practice sessions (Simple Topics); Brain Storming Sessions (on Current affairs) ; Case
Study (on Problem Solving) ; Motivational Talk: Team Work: Team Vs Group? Stages in
Team Building, Mistakes to avoid and Lessons to Learn (Through Stories); (Can be a Case
Specific also)

Proportions – Partnership - Simple interest & Compound interest – Clocks – Calendars -
Pipes and Cisterns - Mensuration
arrangement - Permutations, combinations and Probability – Dice - Cube and Cuboid -
Data sufficiency - Logical deductions – Analogies - Course of action - Cause and effect -
Data interpretation
83
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016. Approved in 11 th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16EC501 ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the concepts of radiation for an antenna

2. Explain the properties and parameters of an antenna
3. Implement antenna arrays
4. Design an antenna system for given specifications
5. Differentiate various modes of Helical and Horn antennas
6. Illustrate the mechanism of the atmospheric effects on radio wave propagation
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 14
1 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 2
4 3 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 2
6 2 2 2 2
Unit I
Antenna Fundamentals & Linear Wire Antennas
Introduction, Radiation Mechanism: single wire, two wire, dipoles, Current Distribution on a thin wire antenna.
Antenna Parameters: Radiation Patterns, Patterns in Principal Planes, Main Lobe and Side Lobes, Beam width,
Beam Area, Bandwidth, input impedance, Radiation Intensity, Beam Efficiency, Directivity, Gain, Antenna
Apertures, Antenna efficiency, Antenna regions, Friis Transmission equation. Retarded Potentials.
Half wave Dipole: Evaluation of Field Components, Power Radiated, and Radiation Resistance.
Applications of half wave dipole
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Antenna Arrays
2 element arrays: Different cases, Principle of Pattern Multiplication. N element Uniform Linear Arrays:
Broadside, End fire Arrays, Concept of Scanning Arrays. Effects of Uniform and Non-uniform Amplitude
Distributions, Related Problems.
Arrays with Parasitic Elements: Yagi - Uda Arrays, Folded Dipoles & their characteristics. Paraboloidal
Reflectors: Geometry, characteristics, types of feeds, F/D Ratio, Spill Over, Back Lobes, Aperture Blocking,
Off-set Feeds and Cassegrain Feeds.
Applications of array
11+5 Hours
Unit III
Special Antennas
Helical Antennas: Significance, Geometry, basic properties, Design considerations for monofilar helical
antennas in Axial Mode and Normal Modes (Qualitative Treatment). Horn Antennas: Types, Optimum Horns,
Design Characteristics of Pyramidal Horns. Design of Rectangular and Circular Microstrip Patch antenna. Loop
antennas: Introduction, field components, D, Rr, Prad relations for small loops, related problems. Fractal
antennas: Introduction. Log Periodic antennas: Introduction, Planar wire surfaces.
Applications of microstrip patch antenna
12+2 Hours
Unit IV
Wave Propagation
Concepts of Propagation: Frequency ranges and types of propagations, Ground Wave Propagation. Sky Wave
Propagation: Formation of Ionosphere Layers and their Characteristics, Mechanism of Reflection and
Refraction, Critical Frequency, MUF & Skip Distance calculations for flat earth case, Optimum working
Frequency, Virtual Height.
84
Space Wave Propagation: Mechanism, LOS and Radio Horizon. Tropospheric Wave Propagation–Radius of
Curvature of path, Field Strength Calculations, Related problems.
Skip distance calculations for spherical earth case
10+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. C.A Balanis, Antenna Theory, John Wiley & Sons, 3rd Edition. 2016
2. John D Krauss, Ronald J Marhefka, Ahmad S Khan, Antennas for all applications, Tata McGraw-Hill,
3rd Edition, 2009
3. K. D. Prasad, Antennas & Wave Propagation, Satya Prakashan, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2011
Reference (s)
1. E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, PHI, 2ndEdition, 2011
2. John D Kraus, Antennas, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd Edition, 2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 40 35 --
Understand 30 35 --
Apply 30 30 60
Analyse -- -- 40
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out the different antennas under use

2. List out the different types of radiation and their possibilities
3. Define antenna and temperature efficiencies
4. Define critical frequency
5. Define MUF
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the various types of patch antennas

2. Interpret principle involved in the Radiation process
3. Illustrate the working principle of ionosphere propagation
4. Explain about helical antenna
5. Explain about two element antenna array with three different cases
APPLY
1. Show the expression for electric vector potential

2. Demonstrate different types of propagations above the earth surface
3. Predict the application of patch antennas and mention the types of patches
4. Show that the directivity of a half wave dipole is 1.5
5. Design a circular patch antenna which should be operated at a frequency of 10.6GHz with a radius of
3.6inchs for an FR4 substrate material
1Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
85
ANALYSE
1. Compare and Contrast between small dipole and an infinitesimal dipole

2. Compare different ways of increasing the efficiency of patch antennas
3. Justify different ways of increasing the efficiency of different layers in the atmosphere
4. Integrate the working of two element arrays
5. Outline the working of horn antenna with suitable figure
86
16EC502 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain different base band modulation techniques, and provide tools to analyze the performance of the
modulation techniques
2. Implement different pass band digital modulation and demodulation techniques (binary and M-level;
ASK, PSK and FSK), and provide tools to analyze the performance in noise
3. Find the bandwidth and transmission power in terms of time and frequency domain spectra of signal
required under various modulation schemes
4. Exemplify the channel performance using Information theory
5. Assess different error control coding schemes for the reliable transmission of digital information over
the channel
6. Contrast the design issues in a digital communication system
COs–POs Mapping
1 2 1 2
2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 1 2
4 3 3 1 3
5 3 3 2 3
6 3 3 1 3
Unit I
Pulse modulation
Model of Digital Communication Systems, Digital Representation of Analog Signal, Certain issues in Digital
Transmission, Advantages of Digital Communication Systems, Pulse Code Modulation: PCM Generation and
Reconstruction, Quantization noise, Non uniform Quantization and Companding, Time Division Multiplexing,
DPCM, DM and Adaptive DM. Noises in PCM and DM.
Classification of line encoding techniques, TDM Frame Structures
10+3 Hours
Unit II
Pass band Digital Modulations
Introduction, ASK,ASK Modulator, Coherent ASK Detector, Non-Coherent ASK Detector, FSK, Bandwidth
and Frequency Spectrum of FSK, Non coherent FSK Detector, Coherent FSK Detector, BPSK, Differential PSK
DEPSK, QPSK, MPSK,MSK, Probability of Error, Correlation Receiver, Matched filter Receiver.
Compare Probability of error for different modulation schemes
13+4 Hours
Unit III
Fundamental limits in Information theory
Information Theory: Information and entropy, conditional entropy, Joint entropy, Mutual information - Discrete
memory less channels–BSC, BEC–Channel capacity, Bandwidth-S/N tradeoff, Hartley Shannon Law, source
coding - Huffman Code, Shannon Fano coding.
Prefix Coding, Mathematical Models of Communication Channel
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Channel coding
Linear Block Codes: Matrix description of Linear Block Codes, Error detection and error Correction capabilities
of linear block codes, Cyclic Codes: Algebraic structure, encoding, syndrome calculation, shift register
implementation. Convolution Codes: Encoding, Decoding using State, tree and trellis diagrams, Decoding using
Viterbi algorithm.
Trellis Codes, Interleaver 11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
87
1. Simon Haykin , Digital communications, John Wiley, 4th Edition, 2013

2. H.Taub and D. Schilling, Principles of Communication Systems, TMH, 4th Edition, 2017
Reference (s)
1. Bernard Sklar, Digital communications Fundamentals and applications, 2nd Edition, PHI,2001
2. Sam Shanmugam, Digital and Analog Communication Systems, John Wiley, 2005
3. B.P.Lathi, Zhi Ding, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Oxford, 4 th Edition, 2011
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 10 --
Understand 45 40 --
Apply 30 40 50
Analyze -- 10 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define quantization noise power

2. Draw the NRZ and RZ code for the digital data 10110001
3. Define QAM, and draw its constellation diagram
4. Derive the expression for bit error probability due to a matched filter
5. Define matched filter
UNDERSTAND
1. State the Nyquist sampling theorem. Demonstrate its validity for an analog signal x(t) having a Fourier
transform x( f ) which is zero outside the interval - f < f < +f
2. Represent a neat block diagram of a typical digital communication system and explain the function of
the key signal processing blocks
3. Explain how encoding is done by convolution codes with a suitable example
4. Explain Binary PSK and QPSK with corresponding equations and constellation diagrams
5. Explain tree diagram, trellis diagram and state transition diagram of convolution codes
6. Compare coherent and non-coherent receivers
APPLY
1. Implement a (2,1) convolutional coder with constraint length 6.Draw the tree diagram, state diagram
and trellis diagram for the assumed coder. Find the (7,4) linear systematic block code word
corresponding to 1101.Assume a suitable generator matrix
2. Predict the parameter which is called a figure of merit of a digital communication system and why?
3. Execute the channel synchronization method in PCM systems
4. How a speech signal is coded at low bit rates
5. Demonstrate the need for demodulator in the case of baseband digital signaling when the received
signal waveforms are already in the form of pulse
88
ANALYSE
1. Outline the signal space diagram of quadrature amplitude modulation and its differences with respect to
QPSK. Analyze different ways of increasing the efficiency of steam power plant by giving appropriate
justification
2. Justify how a matched filter can maximize SNR for a given transmitted signal
3. A (7, 4) cyclic code has a generator polynomial: g(X) = X3 + X + 1.
a. Draw the block diagram of the encoder and syndrome calculator
b. Find out the code word for 1100
c. Verify the following code word is valid or not 0111001
4. Consider the convolutional code with g (1) = (111) and g (2) = (110)
(i) Draw the encoder block diagram
(ii) Draw the Code Tree and state diagram
(iii) Decode the following sequence 00001110 Viterbi Decoding Algorithm
5. Justify how channel synchronization is done on ADM systems
89
16EC503 LINEAR IC APPLICATIONS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Describe various stages of operational amplifier

2. Explain the characteristics of op-amps and its compensation techniques
3. Implement linear and non-linear applications of op-amp using IC741
4. Design Active filters, PLL and timers
5. Construct different types of voltage regulators and multipliers
6. Analyse different ADCs and DACs
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 2 2
2 2 1 2 2
3 3 2 2 3 3
4 3 2 2 3 3
5 3 2 2 3 3
6 3 2 1 3 3
UNIT-I
OP-AMPs
DC and AC analysis of dual input balanced output differential amplifier, Properties of other differential
amplifier configurations, DC coupling and cascade differential amplifier stages, current mirror, Level
Translator.
Integrated Circuits: types, classification, package types, temperature ranges, power supplies. Characteristics of
Op-Amps, Op-Amp Block diagram, ideal and practical Op-Amp specifications, DC and AC characteristics, 741
Op-Amp and its features, Op-Amp parameters and their measurement, input and output offset voltages and
currents, slew rate, CMRR, PSRR, Frequency compensation technique.
Constant current Bias circuit, FET input OP-Amps
11+4 hours
UNIT-II
APPLICATIONS OF OP-AMPS
Inverting and non-inverting amplifier, adder, subtractor, integrator and differentiator, difference amplifier,
instrumentation amplifier, AC amplifier, V-I, I-V converters , Non-linear function generation, comparators,
Multivibrators, square wave and Triangular wave generators, Schmitt Trigger, Log and antilog amplifiers.
Buffers, precision rectifiers

12+3 hours
UNIT-III
ANALOG FILTERS, TIMERS AND PHASE LOCKED LOOPS
Introduction, Butterworth filters-first order, second order LPF, HPF filters. Band pass, Band reject and all pass
filters, Introduction to 555 Timer, functional diagram, Monostable and Astable operations and applications,
Schmitt Trigger, VCO, PLL: Introduction, Block schematic, principles and description of individual blocks,565
PLL .applications of PLL: Frequency multiplication, frequency translation.
AM, FM and FSK demodulators using PLL.
11+4 hours
UNIT–IV
D/A & A/D CONVERTERS, ANALOG MULTIPLIERS AND IC REGULATORS
Introduction, Basic DAC techniques, weighted resistor DAC, R-2R Ladder DAC, Inverted R-2R DAC and IC
1408 DAC, different types of ADCs-parallel comparator type ADC, counter type ADC, successive
90
approximation ADC and Dual slope ADC, 78XX, 79XX, LM723,LM317, LM337, Four Quadrant multiplier,
balanced modulator, IC1496, Applications of analog switches and Multiplexers, Sample & Hold amplifiers.
DAC and ADC specifications
12+3 hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Op-Amps & Linear ICs - Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, 4th edition, PHI, 2002.
2. Linear Integrated Circuits – D. Roy Chowdhury, New Age International (p) Ltd, 2nd Edition, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Operational Amplifiers & Linear ICs by David A. Bell, 3rd edition, Oxford University Press, 2011.
2. Operational Amplifiers & Linear Integrated Circuits–R.F. Coughlin& Fredrick Driscoll, 6th edition, PHI,
2015.
3. Design with Operational Amplifiers & Analog Integrated Circuits - Sergio Franco, 3rd edition, McGraw
Hill, 2001.
4. Operational Amplifiers – George Clayton & Steve Winder, 5th edition, Butterworth & Company
Publ. Ltd./ Elsevier, 2003.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 20 --
Understand 30 30 --
Apply 30 30 60
Analyse 10 20 40
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define the non-ideal dc characteristics that add error components to the dc output voltage of Op-amp
2. The basic step of 9 bit DAC is 10.3mV. If 000000000 represents 0V, what output is produced if the
input is 101101111
3. List the ideal characteristics of operational amplifier
4. List the limitations of an ordinary Op-amp differentiator
5. List the components to assess the performance of R-2R ladder DAC
UNDERSTAND
1. Classify differential amplifiers

2. Explain the operation of R-2R ladder DAC
3. Explain about the Op-Amp parameters that should be considered for AC and DC applications
4. Explain the working of a trans conductance amplifier with floating load using Op-amp
5. Compare different types of ADCs
APPLY
1. Design a Practical differentiator that will eliminate the limitations of ordinary differentiator using op-
amp
2. Design a Practical integrator that will eliminate the limitations of ordinary integrator using op-amp
3. A differential amplifier has (i) CMRR = 1000 and (ii) CMRR = 10000. The first set of inputs is ν 1 =
100 µV and ν2 = -100 µV. The second set of inputs is ν1 = 1100 µV and ν2 = 900 µV. Find the
91
percentage difference in output voltages obtained for the two sets of input voltage and also comment on
this.
4. Design astable multivibrator using IC 555 and also determine its frequency
5. Design a filter to allow the signal frequency upto 2KHz
ANALYSE
1. Compare and Contrast between counter type ADC and dual slope ADC
2. Outline the applications of operational amplifiers
3. Compare the performance of SAR type A/D Converter and counter type ADC
4. Structure the nonlinear applications of op-amp using IC 741
5. Compare and Contrast between R-2R and Inverted R-2R type DAC
92
16EC504 STRUCTURED DIGITAL DESIGN

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the concepts of Verilog HDL constructs
2. Implement gate level Verilog HDL models for combinational and sequential circuits
3. Execute dataflow and switch level models for combinational and sequential circuits
4. Organize behavioral level Verilog HDL models for combinational and sequential circuits
5. Choose appropriate Verilog HDL constructs for RTL coding
6. Implement the combinational and sequential circuits in FPGA
COs – POs Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO13
1 2 1 - - - 2
2 3 2 2 2 3 3
3 3 2 2 2 3 3
4 3 3 2 2 3 3
5 3 3 2 2 3 3
6 3 2 2 2 3 3
Unit I
Verilog Language Constructs and Gate Level Modeling
Verilog as HDL, Levels of design description, Concurrency, Simulation and Synthesis, Functional verification,
System tasks, Programming Language Interface (PLI), Module, Simulation and Synthesis tools, Test benches,
Keywords, Identifiers, White space characters, Comments, Numbers, Strings, Logic values, Strengths, Data
types, Scalars and Vectors, Parameters, Memory, Operators, System tasks, AND gate primitive, Module
structure, Other gate primitives, Tristate gates, Array of instances of primitives, Delays, Strengths and
Contention Resolution, Net Types, Design of basic circuits.
Design of Flip-flops with Gate Primitives, adders
1. Introduction to EDA tool and Simulation of logic gates
2. Design and Simulate Full adder and Full Subtractor
3. Simulate the Flip-Flops using the Gate Primitives
11+9Hours
Unit II
Behavioral, Data Flow and Switch Level Modeling
Operations and Assignments, Functional Bifurcation, Procedural constructs: Initial, Always, Assignments with
delays, Wait, Multiple always blocks
Designs at Behavioral level, Blocking and Non-blocking assignments, Case statement, Simulation flow,
Conditional statements and loops- if, if-else, repeat, for, while, forever, parallel blocks, force-release, Event,
Continuous assignment structures, Delays and Continuous assignments, Assignment to Vectors, Operators,
Basic transistor switches, CMOS switch, Bi-directional gates, Time delays with switch primitives, Instantiations
with Strengths and Delays, Strength contention with Tri-reg Nets.
Behavioral level modeling of all flip-flops, 4 bit counter
1. Perform Behavioral model for multiplexer and demultiplexer
2. Perform data flow model for 8 to 3 priority encoder
3. Perform Behavioral model for 4 bit counter and shift register
11+6 Hours
Unit III
System Tasks, Functions and UDP
Introduction, Parameters, Path delays, Module parameters, System Tasks and Functions, File based tasks and
Functions, Compiler directives, Hierarchical access
93
User-Defined Functions, Tasks and Primitives-Introduction, Function, Tasks, User- Defined Primitives (UDP).
Implementation of two bit multiplication using tasks and functions
1. Perform the simulation of parity bit generation using functions and tasks
2. Perform a two bit binary addition using functions and tasks
3. Perform the simulation of half adder with path delay and display the stimulus, response of system
tasks-$monitor,$display,$monitoron,$monitorof, $stop, $finish
12+9 Hours
Unit IV
Verilog HDL Models: Decoders, encoders, multiplexers and de-multiplexers, comparators, adders &
subtractors, Latches and flip-flops, counters, shift register, Internal structure of ROM, Static RAM.
Design examples (using Verilog HDL) - Barrel shifter, floating point encoder
1. Design and Implement 4X16 Decoder using 74138IC
2. Implement logic gates and full adder in FPGA
3. Design a 4 bit PIPO Shift register using 7474 IC and implement in FPGA.
11+6 Hours
Total: 45+30 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. T.R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, Design through Verilog HDL, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2004
2. John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles & Practices, PHI/ Pearson Education Asia, 3rd Edition,
2005
Reference (s)
1. Stephen. Brown and ZvonkoVranesic, Fundamentals of Logic Design with Verilog, TMH, 2005
2. Michael D. Ciletti, Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL, PHI, 2005
3. J. Bhaskar, A Verilog Primer, BSP, 2 ndEdition, 2003
4. Charles H Roth, Digital Systems Design using VHDL, Jr. Thomson Publications, 2004
*Note: Implement the experiments in XILINX-Verilog HDL
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 10 10 --
Understand 20 20 --
Apply 45 50 60
Analyze 25 20 20
Evaluate -- -- 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define the Verilog Syntax for the case, for loop and if-else statements
2. List out the tri-state gate primitives with syntax
3. List out the Verilog operators
94
4. List out bidirectional gates with their syntax in Verilog

5. List out two system tasks with syntax
6. State the Procedural Constructs in Verilog
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the strengths and contention in Verilog HDL
2. Explain the following
i) Simulation and synthesis ii) Functional verification
3. Explain the concept of concatenation of vectors with an example
4. Illustrate Verilog primitives. Explain Verilog gate level primitives with suitable example
5. Explain User-Defined Primitives with syntax. Give an example of 4-to-1 multiplexer using UDPs
APPLY
1. Implement all logic gates using Verilog HDL
2. Design a nibble adder using Verilog HDL
3. Implement the half Subtractor in different levels of design description
4. Design an OR gate using multiplexer
5. Implement one bit comparator using Verilog
ANALYZE
1. Compare and contrast between blocking and non-blocking assignments

2. Differentiate continuous assignment and procedural assignment statements with an example
3. Resolve the concept of contention with Tri-reg Nets in Verilog HDL
4. Compare the gate level implementation of D flip-flop and JK flip-flop
5. Compare if and while constructs in Verilog HDL
EVALUATE
1. Judge whether the behavioral style suits for combinational circuits

2. Choose the WAND or WOR net data types to resolve the contention in Verilog HDL
3. Determine the number of gates required in the design of multiplexer
4. Check the following syntax is working as an AND gate in Verilog
And (input1, input2, output1);
5. Choose an appropriate type instantiation of UDP to describe 8-bit adder using Verilog
95
16EC505 VLSI DESIGN

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the operation and characteristics of MOS transistor

2. Interpret various MOS transistor fabrication techniques
3. Implement Boolean functions in CMOS technology and realize the same in layout diagrams
4. Summarize the effects of parasitics and scaling
5. Classify various programmable ASICs
6. Interpret different levels of testing of IC
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO 3 PO 13
1 2 1 1 2
2 2 1 1 2
3 3 2 1 3
4 2 2 1 2
5 2 2 1 2
6 2 2 1 2
Unit I
Introduction to IC technology and Basic Electrical properties of MOS circuits
Introduction to RTL, DTL, TTL, ECL logic families, Introduction to IC technology, Basic MOS transistors,
Enhancement and depletion modes of transistor action, Ids-Vds relationships, Aspects of MOS Transistor,
Threshold voltage, MOS Transistor conductance and output conductance, MOS transistor figure of merit, Pass
transistors, nMOS inverter , Determination of pull up to pull down ratio for an nMOS inverter driven by another
nMOS inverter and for an nMOS inverter driven through one or more pass transistors, Alternate forms of pull
up, CMOS inverter, BiCMOS Inverters.
Static power dissipation, Dynamic Power dissipation in CMOS circuits

12+4 Hours
Unit II
IC Fabrication process and Gate level Design
MOS and CMOS Fabrication processes, Bi-CMOS Technology, comparison between CMOS & Bipolar
technologies, Latch up in CMOS circuits, MOS Layers, Stick diagrams (nMOS design style), CMOS design
style, Design rules, Layout diagrams of CMOS inverter, NAND & NOR gates
Realization of gates using CMOS technology, other complex gates, Switch logic (pass transistor and
transmission gates) and design examples using transmission gates.
Layout diagram of 10T full adder and CMOS full adder
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Basic circuit concepts and Scaling of MOS Circuits
Sheet resistance , Sheet resistance concept applied to MOS transistors and inverters, Area capacitance of layers ,
standard unit of capacitance, some area capacitance calculations, The delay unit , inverter delays, Driving large
capacitance loads, Propagation delays, wiring capacitances, Fan-in and Fan-out characteristics, Choice of layers,
CMOS steady state electrical behavior, CMOS dynamic electrical behavior
Scaling of MOS Circuits, Scaling models and scaling factors, Scaling factors for device parameters, Limitations
of scaling (qualitative treatment only).
Drain Induced Barrier Lowering (DIBL) effect, Sub threshold conduction
11+4 Hours
96
Unit IV
Programmable ASICs & IC testing
Introduction, FPGA Design flow, ASIC Design flow ,Types of ASICs-Full custom, standard cell based Asics,
Gate array based ASICs, PLDs, FPGAs, Programmable ASICs- anti-fuse, SRAM, EPROM and EEPROM
technology
Manufacturing test principles, Design for testability (DFT) - Adhoc testing, Scan design, Built in self-test
(BIST).
Xilinx3000Series, FPGAarchitecture, Boundaryscan
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Kamran eshragian, Douglas.A.Pucknell and Sholeh Eshragian, Essentials of VLSI circuits and systems,
Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd, 3rd Edition, 2005
2. Weste and Eshraghian, Principles of CMOS VLSI Design, Pearson Education, 3 rdEdition, 1999
3. Michael john Sebastian smith, Application specification integrated circuits, Addition Wesley,1 st
edition,1997
4. John.P.Uyemura, Introduction to VLSI Circuits & Systems, John Wiley Ist Edition, 2009
Reference (s)
1. Wayne Wolf, Modern VLSI Design, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 1997
2. Jan M Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, B.Nikolic, Digital Integrated Circuits, Pearson, 3rdEdition, 2008
3. Richa Jain, Amrita Rai , Principles of VLSI and CMOS Integrated Circuits, S.Chand & Co Ltd,
First Edition, 2012
4. John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles & Practices, PHI/ Pearson Education Asia, 3rd Ed., 2005
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 30 --
Understand 40 40 --
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse -- -- 30
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the scaling models?
2. Why switch logic is better than pass transistor logic?
3. Show that pull up to pull down ratio of an nMOS inverter driven by another nMOS inverter is 4:1
4. How the delay varies with number of inputs for different fabrication processes?
5. Show that 11 is the best test vector for AND gate if there is a SA0 fault on one node
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain briefly about nMOS pass transistor
2. Compare Stick diagram and Layout
3. Explain about  based design rules in detail
4. Classify possible wiring capacitances in VLSI fabrication process
5. Explain about programming technologies of SPLD and CPLDs
APPLY
4 Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
97
1. Construct CMOS inverter having pull up to pull down ratio of 1:1 if n channel sheet resistance is 10k
and pchannel sheet resistance is 25k
2. Construct layout for 2-input NAND gate
3. Classify ASICs with neat sketch
4. Demonstrate your answer , If the disturbance is created at the output then there exist low resistance
path between supply rails of CMOS inverter, is that disturbance creates problem in the CMOS inverter,
5. Construct Enhancement load and depletion load nMOS inverters
ANALYSE
1. Distinguish ASICs and PLDs with examples

2. Contrast CMOS and Bipolar technologies
3. Analyse CMOS inverter with the help of transfer characteristics
4. Justify why scaling factors are greater than unity?
5. Differentiate FPGA with Programmable ASICs
98
16EC507 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the fundamentals of Digital communication systems
2. Implement different Baseband modulation techniques
3. Implement different passband modulation techniques
4. Outline Error correcting & detecting codes
5. Determine suitable modulation schemes and coding for various applications
6. Contrast the design issues in a digital communication system
List of Experiments
Minimum twelve experiments to be conducted:
1. Verify the operation of Time Division Multiplexing

2. Generation and Detection of pulse code modulation
3. Generation and Detection of Differential Pulse Code Modulation by sending variable frequency sine
wave and variable DC signal inputs
4. Verify the Encoding and Decoding process of Delta Modulator
5. Generation and Detection of FSK
6. Study the various steps involved in generating the phase shift keyed signal at the modulator end and
recovering the binary signal from the received PSK signal
7. Study the various steps involved in generating a differential phase shift keyed signal at the modulator
end and recovering the binary signal from the received DPSK signal
8. Verify the circuit to improve voice quality of lower signal levels and which describes the importance of
nonlinear quantization
9. Verify source encoding and decoding techniques
10. Design a [7,4] linear block Encoder and Decoder For a given generated matrix G, find out all possible
code vectors and verify error correction and detection possibility of considering any two examples
11. Design a [7, 4] binary cyclic Encoder and Decoder for a given generated by g(x) = 1 + x + x 3. Find out
all possible code vectors. And verify error correction and detection possibility of considering any two
examples
12. Design a convolution Encoder and Decoder of rate r=1/2 with constrain length 3, draw code tree, code
trellis and state diagram. By considering an example Decode the data by using the Viterbi algorithm
13. Transfer the Analog Data by Encoding and Decoding by using PCM between two PCs
Equipment required for Laboratories:
1. RPS
2. CRO, Function Generator
3. Multi Meters
4. Trainer kits
1. Verify the Encoding and Decoding process of Adaptive Delta Modulator

2. Generation and Detection of ASK by using MATLAB
3. Generation and Detection of FSK by using MATLAB
4. Generation and Detection of PSK by using MATLAB
5. Verify source encoding and decoding techniques by using MATLAB
99
6. Design a [7,4] linear block Encoder and Decoder For a given generated matrix G, find out all possible
code vectors and verify error correction and detection possibility of considering any two examples by
using MATLAB
Reading Material(s)
1. Simon Haykin , Digital communications, John Wiley, 4th Edition, 2013
2. H.Taub and D. Schilling, Principles of Communication Systems, TMH, 4th Edition, 2017
100
16ESX2A EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS III

0200
Soft Skills: Introduction to Campus Placements: Stages of Campus Placement, Skills

assessed in Campus Placements & How to get ready? ; Building Vocabulary: Through
reading Articles, Exploring New Words, Meanings and the usage with examples;
Motivational Talks on Positive Thinking: Beliefs, Thoughts, Actions, Habits & Results
(Success) ; Resume Preparation: Resume? Templates? Mistakes to be avoided in a Resume,
Steps to be followed in preparing it.(with examples); Group Discussions (Recap): GD?
Stages of a GD, Skills assessed in a GD, Blunders to be avoided, How to excel in a GD?
(through Practice Sessions); Psychometric Tests: Definition, Types of Psychometric Tests:
Numerical Computation, Data Interpretation, Verbal Comprehension, Verbal Critical
Reasoning and Personality Questionnaires ; Exercises related to Communication: JAMs, Case
Studies, Video Synthesis, Story Writing, TAT etc.

interpretation
101
16EC601 CELLULAR AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize evolution, performance criteria of cellular systems
2. State the principles of handoff, frequency reuse, cell splitting and sectoring
3. Differentiate various types of interference, channel assignment and its allocation
4. Compute the phase difference, propagation effects in various cell coverage environments
5. Classify various cell site and mobile antennas
6. Outline the GSM digital cellular system and principle of OFDM
COs–POs Mapping
1 1 2 1 2
2 2 2 2 3
3 2 3 2 2
4 3 2 2 2
5 2 2 2 3
6 3 3 3 2
Unit I
Introduction to Cellular systems
Introduction to cellular mobile system, Generations of wireless mobile systems, Performance criteria, Basic
cellular system, Hexagonal shaped cells, cellular geometry, concept of frequency reuse, trunking and grade of
service, Improving capacity of cellular systems: Cell splitting, Sectoring, Micro cell concept, Handoff and
dropped calls
Repeaters for range extension, Picocell zone concept
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Interference and frequency planning
Introduction to Interference and system capacity, Co-channel Interference reduction factor, Desired C/I from a
normal case in a Omni directional Antenna system, Design of directional Antenna system, Adjacent channel
interference: Next channel and neighboring channel interference, Frequency management: Numbering, grouping
of channels, channel types, channel assignment: fixed channel assignment, non-fixed channel assignment
Interference in heterogeneous network, Effect of lowering the antenna height
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Cell coverage for signal and traffic
Signal reflections in flat and hilly terrain, point to point model (Lee model), effect of human made structures,
phase difference between direct and reflected paths, constant standard deviation, straight line path loss slope,
general formula for mobile propagation over water and flat open area, foliage loss, antenna height gain,
horizontal oriented and vertically oriented space-diversity antennas
Near and long distance propagation
10+3 Hours
Unit IV
Cell site and Mobile Antennas
Cell Site and Mobile Antennas: Omni directional antennas, Directional antennas for interference reduction,
space diversity antennas, umbrella pattern antennas, minimum separation of cell site antennas, roof mounted and
glass mounted antennas, high gain antennas. Digital Cellular system: GSM Architecture, GSM Channels,
Multiple access schemes, OFDM principle and its applications
WCDMA Architecture, Key features of CDMA2000
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. W.C.Y. Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunications, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2006
102
2. Theodore. S. Rapport , Wireless Communications, Pearson education, 2nd Edition., 2002

3. Gottapu Sasibhushana Rao, Mobile Cellular Communication, Pearson International, 2012
Reference (s)
1. D.Tse and P.Viswanath, Fundamentals of wirless communication, Cambridge University press, 2005.
2. W.C.Y.Lee , Wireless and Mobile Communications, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2006.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 15 -- --
Understand 45 30 --
Apply -- 35 45
Analyze 40 35 55
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State two reasons for choosing 800MHz band for mobile radio systems.
2. List two disadvantages of conventional mobile system.
3. List two major approaches to achieve the ideal mobile telephone system.
4. Define multipath fading.
UNDERSTAND
1. Represent grade of service.
2. Abstract the term co-channel interference.
3. Identify the major functions of MTSO.
APPLY
1. Demonstrate cell splitting and types of cell splitting.
2. Demonstrate Handoff techniques.
3. Assess the frequency reuse concept of cellular systems.
ANALYSE
1. Justify the effect of lowering the antenna height on interference in a valley.
2. Compare the C/I worst case for K=4 and K=7 pattern cellular systems.
3. Outline the limitations of conventional mobile systems and spectrum efficiency considerations.
4. Compare sectoring and micro cell zone concept.
1
103
16EC602 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

3013
Course Outcomes
1. Classify Discrete time signals and systems

2. Execute Z transform on different systems and represent with realization technique
3. Implement discrete Fourier transform and Fast Fourier transform on time domain signals
4. Implement FIR and IIR digital filters with given specifications and find the frequency response
5. Demonstrate Multirate signal processing
6. Differentiate the architecture of Digital signal processors
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO 3 PO 14
1 2 1 2
2 2 1 2
3 3 2 1 3
4 3 2 1 3
5 3 2 2 3
6 3 2 2 3
Unit I
Introduction to Discrete–Time signals and systems
Classification of Discrete time signals, linear Time Invariant (LTI) systems, (BIBO) stability and causality,
Linear convolution in time domain and graphical approach
Concept of Z-transform, Region of Convergence, properties, Inverse Z-transform, Realization of Digital filter
structures: Direct form-I, Direct form-II, Transposed form, Cascaded form, Parallel form.
Lattice structure, Lattice-Ladder structure
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Discrete–Time signals in Transform domain
Discrete Fourier Series (DFS), Discrete Time Fourier transforms (DTFT), Discrete Fourier transform (DFT),
Properties of DFT, linear convolution using DFT, Circular convolution, Fast Fourier transforms (FFT) : Radix-2
decimation in time, decimation in frequency FFT Algorithm, Inverse FFT.
Overlap-save method, Overlap-add method, Radix-4FFT
10+ 3Hours
Unit III
IIR &FIR Digital Filters
Analog filter approximations: Butterworth and Chebyshev, Impulse Invariant transformation, Bilinear
transformation, Design of IIR Digital filters from analog filters, FIR Digital Filters: Characteristics of FIR
Digital Filters, frequency response, Design of FIR Digital Filters using Window Techniques, Comparison of IIR
& FIR filters.
Frequency Transformation in digital domain, Finite word length effects in FIR Digital filters
15+ 4 Hours
Unit IV
Multirate Signal Processing & TMS Processors
Multirate Signal Processing: Decimation, interpolation, sampling rate conversion, Implementation of sampling
rate conversion, Introduction to DSP processors: Overview of Digital signal processors, Von Neumann
Architecture, Harvard Architecture, Multiplier Accumulator (MAC), Pipelining, Architecture of TMS320C50,
Bus structure, CPU, on chip memory, on-chip peripherals.
Cascading sampling rate converters, Addressing modes
10+ 5 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
104
Textbook (s)
1. John G. Proakis, Dimitris, G.Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms, and
Applications: Pearson Education /PHI, 4th Edition, 2013
2. Digital Signal Processors – Architecture, Programming and Applications, B.Venkataramani, M.
Bhaskar, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002
Reference (s)
1. Sanjit K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing, Tata Mc Graw Hill publishers, 3 rd Edition, 2009
2. Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer Digital Signal Processing, PHI, 4 th Edition, 2007
3. Andreas Antoniou, Digital Signal Processing, TATA McGraw Hill, 2006
4. MH Hayes, Digital Signal Processing, Schaum’s Outlines, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2007
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 -- --
Understand 35 25 --
Apply 40 45 60
Analyse -- 30 40
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Signal and System

2. State the advantages and limitations of DSP
3. Define about Gibb’s phenomena
4. State the need of Multi rate signal processing
5. List the difference between FIR and IIR filters
UNDERSTAND
1. Identify the following systems for time invariant
(i) 𝑦(𝑛) = 𝑥(𝑛) − 𝑥(𝑛 − 1)
(ii) 𝑦(𝑛) = 𝑛𝑥(𝑛)
(iii) 𝑦(𝑛) = 𝑒 𝑥(𝑛)
2. Identify the stability of the given systems
(i) 𝑦(𝑛) = cos( 𝑥(𝑛))
(ii) 𝑦(𝑛) = 𝑥(−𝑛 − 2)
(iii) 𝑦(𝑛) = 𝑎𝑥 2 (𝑛)
3. Illustrate whether the signal x(n)=sin15πn+ sin√2πn is periodic or not
4. Illustrate windowing techniques to design FIR filters
5. Represent y(n)=x(n)+2x(n-1)+3x(n-2)+2y(n-1)+3y(n-2) in direct form-I structure
APPLY
1. Realize the system given by the difference equation
y(n)= -0.1y(n-1)+0.72y(n-2)+0.7x(n)-0.252x(n-2) in parallel form
2
105
2. Find the DFT of a sequence x[n] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 4, 3, 2, 1}using DITFFT algorithm
3. Compute the IDFT of the sequence X[k] = {12, 0, 0, 0, 4, 0, 0, 0} using DIFFFT Algorithm
4. A DSP system is characterized by linear difference equation 𝑦(𝑛) = 2𝑥(𝑛) + 4𝑥(𝑛 − 1) +

6𝑥(𝑛 − 2) + 8𝑥(𝑛 − 3) with digital input 𝑥(𝑛) = {1,0,1,1}. Find the output response of the system.
Find the transfer function of FIR system
5. Show the expression for the output in terms of x(n) for the multirate system given as follows
x(n) 4 2
y(n)
ANALYSE
1. Resolve analog filter with transfer function (s+0.1)/(s+0.1) 2+9, into a digital IIR filter using bilinear
transformation. The digital filter should have a resonant frequency of ω r = π/4
2. Design a Butterworth IIR digital filter using Impulse invariant transformation technique
0.8  H ( )  0.1 0    0.2
H ( )  0.2 0.32    
3. Compare the frequency response of Linear phase FIR filter

Case(1) impulse response ℎ(𝑛) is symmetrical N is odd
Case(2) impulse response ℎ(𝑛) is anti symmetrical N is even
Case(3) impulse response ℎ(𝑛) is symmetrical N is even
Case(4) impulse response ℎ(𝑛) is anti-symmetrical N is odd
4. Outline the structural realization of linear phase FIR filter for given N
Case(1) h(n) = {3 2 1 2 3} for N=5
Case(2) h(n) = {-3 -2 0 2 3} for N=5
Case(3) h(n) = {3 2 1 1 2 3} for N=6
Case(4) h(n) = {-3 -2 -1 1 2 3} for N=6
5. Compare different windowing techniques
106
16EC602 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the concept of microprocessor and Memory organization
2. Implement basic assembly language programming with 8086 microprocessor
3. Execute interfacing concepts through programming for I/O Devices
4. Differentiate the peripheral interfacing chips for 8086 microprocessor
5. Explain the concept of microcontroller and its addressing modes
6. Implement assembly level programming and interfacing with 8051 microcontroller
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO 3 PO 4 PO5 PO13
1 2 1 1 - - 2
2 3 2 1 2 2 3
3 3 2 2 2 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 3
5 2 1 1 - - 2
6 3 2 2 2 3 3
Unit- I
Introduction to Microprocessors
Evolution of Processors, Instruction cycle, Memory Management, Associative Memory, Virtual Memory and
Cache Memory, 8086 Register Organization, Architecture of 8086, Signal Description of 8086, Physical
Memory Organization, Addressing modes, instruction format, instruction set of 8086, Assembler Directives.
Architecture of 8085, Instruction set
1. Perform arithmetic operations on 8/16 bit numbers in assembly language programming.
2. Perform the Code conversion operations in assembly language programming.
3. Perform Logical and shift operations on 8/16 bit numbers in assembly language programming.
4. Perform String operations in assembly language programming.
14 + 8 Hours
Unit- II
8086 Operational Modes and Interfacing
Minimum and Maximum mode operations of 8086 with timing diagrams, Procedures and macros, Stack
Structure of 8086, Static RAM Interfacing, 8255 PPI Various modes of operations, Interfacing I/O ports,
Interfacing of Stepper Motor, ADC and DAC .
Dynamic RAM interfacing, interfacing of 7 segment display
1. Write an ALP for implementation of Procedures and macros.
2. Write an ALP to interface stepper motor with 8086 microprocessor.
3. Write an ALP to interface DAC with 8086 microprocessor.
10 + 6 Hours
Unit- III
Peripheral Interfacing
Traffic light controller, keyboard and message display, Interrupt vector table, Programmable Interrupt Controller
8259A, Programmable Communication Interface 8251 USART, DMA Controller 8257.
Programmable Interval Timers 8253, RS 232C
107
1. To study and Write an ALP to interface traffic lights.
2. Write an ALP to display the given message.
3. Write ALP to interface a matrix Keyboard with 8086 microprocessor.
9 + 6 Hours
Unit-IV
8051 Microcontroller
Introduction to microcontrollers, 8051 microcontrollers, 8051 pin description, connections, I/O ports and
memory organization, MCS-51 addressing modes and instructions, assembly language programming tools,
Parallel ports, Serial Communication, timer mode operations, ARM Architecture and organization
Interfacing of ADC with 8051, Thumb programming model
1. Perform Data transfer operations on 8 bit numbers in assembly language programming using 8051
microcontroller.
2. Perform Arithmetic operations on 8bit numbers in assembly language programming using 8051
microcontroller.
3. Write an ALP to access Parallel ports in 8051 microcontroller.
4. Write an ALP to generate a delay using Timers with 8051 in different modes.
5. Write an ALP to transfer a character/string using UART in 8051 microcontroller.
12 + 10 Hours
Total: 45+30 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. A.K.Ray and K.M.BhurChandi, Advanced MicroProcessors and Peripherals, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012
2. M.Morris Mano, Computer system architecture, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 1992
3. Kenneth J Ayala, The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Applications, Thomson
Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2004
Reference (s)
1. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture, Pearson/Prentice Hall, 6 thEdition, 2007.
2. D.V.Hall, Microprocessor and Interfacing, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd edition, 2006.
3. N.Sentil Kumar, M.Saravanan, S.Jeevananthan, Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, Oxford
University Press, 2010.
4. Ajay V Deshmukh, Microcontrollers, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.
5. M.A.Mazidi, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems, 2 nd edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 10 10 --
Understand 40 30 --
Apply 40 30 50
Analyze 10 30 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Microprocessor and microcontroller
2. List out different fields of ALP instruction formats
3. State an assembler directive
4. Define macro
108
5. State the need for DMA
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain various types of 8086 instructions
2. Compare 8085 and 8086 microprocessors
3. Illustrate the concept of DMA
4. Explain the significance of reset circuitry in 8051 microcontrollers
5. Explain the architecture of 8086 microprocessors
APPLY
1. Execute an ALP to perform sorting operation in ascending order on 16 bit numbers
2. Find the approximate time required to execute an ALP with the help of hardware timers
3. Execute an ALP to generate +4V (P-P) of square wave using 8086
4. Execute an ALP to blink the LED’S using 8051
5. Execute an ALP to find largest number
ANALYZE
1. Compare the register organization of 8086 and 80386 microprocessors
2. Outline the features of 80386 advanced microprocessor
3. Differentiate the features of 8086 microprocessors
4. Organize the instruction set for implementing stepper motor application
5. Differentiate the modes of operation of 8255
109
16EC604 MICROWAVE ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify the need of microwaves
2. Differentiate rectangular and circular waveguides
3. Compute the S-parameters of waveguide components
4. Explain two cavity and reflex klystron
5. Explain Travelling Wave Tubes and magnetrons
6. Summarise operation of Gunn Diode and microwave measurements
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO 2 PO 14
1 1 1
2 2 1 2
3 3 1 3
4 2 1 2
5 2 1 2
6 2 1 2
Unit I
Waveguides and field expressions
Introduction: Microwave Spectrum, advantages and applications of microwaves. Rectangular and circular
waveguides- TE/TM mode analysis, Expressions for Fields, Characteristic Equation and Cut-off Frequencies,
Dominant and Degenerate Modes, Mode Characteristics–Phase and Group Velocities.
Types of Microwave coaxial connectors, Applications of cavity resonators
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Waveguide components & microwave tubes
Scattering Matrix: Significance, Properties. S Matrix Calculations for multi-port Junctions: E plane and H plane
Tees, Magic Tee, Directional Coupler and Related Problems. Faraday rotation, Gyrator, Isolator, Circulator.
Limitations and Losses of conventional tubes at microwave frequencies. Two Cavity Klystron: Velocity
Modulation and Applegate Diagram, Bunching Process and Small Signal Theory. Reflex Klystron: Applegate
Diagram and Principle of working, Mathematical Theory of Bunching, Power Output, Efficiency, Oscillating
Modes, Electronic and Mechanical Tuning. Related Problems.
Applications of Hybrid Rings, Applications of Reflex klystron 14+4 Hours
Unit III
Helix TWT& magnetron
Significance, Types and Characteristics of Slow Wave Structures; Structure of TWT and Amplification Process
(qualitative treatment), Suppression of Oscillations, Nature of the four Propagation Constants, Gain
Considerations. Magnetrons: Different Types, 8-Cavity Cylindrical Travelling Wave Magnetron, Hull Cut-off
and Hartree Conditions, Modes of Resonance and PI-Mode Operation, Separation of PI-Mode.
Applications of Magnetrons, Output Characteristics of Magnetron
10+3 Hours
Unit IV
Microwave solid state devices & microwave measurements
Gunn Diode: Principle, RWH Theory, Characteristics, Basic Modes of Operation, Oscillation Modes.
Description of Microwave Bench: Different Blocks and their Features, Precautions; Microwave Power
Measurement: Bolometer Method. Measurement of Attenuation, Frequency, VSWR. Impedance Measurement.
Applications of IMPATT Diodes, Principle of operation of TRAPATT Diodes.
10+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Samuel Y. Liao, Microwave Devices and Circuits, Pearson education, 3rd Edition, 2007
2. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, Wiley publishers, 4th Edition, 2012
110
Reference (s)
1. R.E. Collin, Foundations for Microwave Engineering, IEEE Press, John Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2000
2. M. Kulkarni, Microwave and Radar Engineering , Umesh Publications, 4th Edition, 2010
3. M.L. Sisodia and G.S.Raghuvanshi, Microwave Circuits and Passive Devices, Wiley Eastern Ltd, New
Age International Publishers Ltd, 2002
4. Gottapu Sasibhushana Rao, Microwave & Radar Engineering, Pearson Education, 2013
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 35 25 --
Understand 35 30 --
Apply 15 25 50
Analyze 15 20 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out different bands of microwave spectrum
2. List any four applications of microwaves
3. Define waveguide
4. Define group velocity of a waveguide
5. List degenerate modes of circular waveguide
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain field components of TE mode of Circular waveguide
2. Explain principle involved in propagation of waves inside a waveguide
3. Illustrate working principle of helix TWT
4. Explain field components of TM mode of Circular waveguide
5. Formulate field equations of circular waveguide
APPLY
1. Assess TE and TM modes of a circular waveguide
2. Demonstrate the application of reflex klystron as an oscillator
3. Show that TE11mode is the dominant mode in circular waveguide
4. Find best suitable mode for Gunn diode as an oscillator
5. Show that the characteristics of waveguides are best suited for microwave frequencies
ANALYZE
1. Compare TE and TM modes of rectangular waveguide
2. Outline the significance of cutoff frequency of a circular waveguide
3. Justify the suitability of a circular waveguide to operate in TE mode
4. Waveguides are best suited for transmission of microwave frequencies. Is the above statement true or
false? Justify your answer
5. Differentiate different modes of operation of Gunn diode
16EC607 LINEAR IC APPLICATIONS LAB

3
111
0032
Course Outcomes
1. Design op-Amp circuits for various applications
2. Demonstrate the practical usage of various linear ICs
3. Design and implement the pulse generator using 555 timer
4. Design and construct the various filters like LPF, HPF, BPF ,BRF
5. Design a function generator
6. Design a converter which converts analog signal to Digital signal and vice versa
List of Experiments
Minimum Twelve Experiments to be conducted:
1. Voltage gain of non-inverting and inverting amplifier with feedback.

2. OP AMP Applications–voltage follower, Adder, Subtractor.
3. OP AMP Applications–IC 741- Astable Operation Circuit
4. OP AMP Applications–differentiator, integrator circuit
5. Active Filters–LPF, HPF (first order only )
6. Active Filter–BPF
7. Active Filters–BEF and Notch filter
8. Schmitt Trigger Circuit–Using IC 741
9. Triangular wave Generator using 741OP AMP
10. IC 555 Timer– Monostable Operation Circuit
11. IC 555 Timer- Astable Operation Circuit
12. Phase locked loop
13. Voltage Regulator using IC 78XX,79XX, 723
14. Analog to Digital Converter using OP AMP
15. Digital to Analog Converter using OP AMP
Equipment required for Laboratories:

1. RPS
3. Multi Meters
4. Components: - IC741, IC555, IC566, IC1496, IC723, 7805, 7809, 7912 and other essential components
1. Design a function generator to generate sine wave, square wave and triangular wave range from 1KHz
to 1MHz
2. Design a filter which attenuates the frequencies 20 KHz to 40 KHz
3. Design a converter which converts analog signal to Digital signal and vice versa
4. Design a circuit which converts voltage to frequency and vice versa

1. Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, Op-Amps & Linear ICs, PHI, 4th Edition. 2002
2. Linear Integrated Circuits – D. Roy Chowdhury, New Age International (p) Ltd, 2nd Edition, 2003.
4
112
16ESX2B EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS IV

0201
Soft Skills: Introduction to Campus Placements: Stages of Campus Placement, Skills

assessed in Campus Placements; The Changing scenario and its Challenges & How to get
ready? ; Building Vocabulary: Through reading Articles, Exploring New Words, Meanings
and the usage with examples; Business Terminology: Vision, Mission, Objectives, Goals,
Targets and Financial Terms such as Debt, Equity, Share, Working Capital, Turnover, Net
Worth etc ; Resume (Recap): Resume? Templates? Mistakes to be avoided in a Resume and
Steps to be followed in preparing it; Group Discussions (Recap) & Practice: GD? Stages of a
GD, Skills assessed in a GD, Blunders to be avoided, How to excel in a GD? Practice
sessions and sharing Feedback. (Screening sample Videos); Interview Skills: Interview?
Types of Interview, Dos & Don’ts, Skills assessed in an Interview, Mistakes to be avoided,
How to equip oneself to excel? How to handle the Typical Interview Questions? (with
Examples); Mock Interviews: Practice sessions with Feedback; Exercises related to
Communication: JAMs, Case Studies, Video Synthesis, Email Writing, Story Writing, TAT
etc.

interpretation
113
16HSX04 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain basic principles of engineering economics
2. Predict cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis in their business decision making
3. Check investment proposals through various capital budgeting methods
4. Implement the simple financial statements for measuring the performance of firm
5. Attribute key issues of organization, management and administration
6. Organise project for accurate cost estimates and plan future activities
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO11
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
Introduction to Engineering Economics - Demand Forecasting & Cost Analysis
Concept of Engineering Economics, Types of efficiency, Managerial Economics Nature and Scope, Law of
Demand, Types of Elasticity of demand
Demand Forecasting & Cost Analysis: Demand Forecasting: Meaning, Factors Governing Demand Forecasting,
Methods of Demand Forecasting (Survey and Statistical Methods), Cost Analysis: Basic Cost Concepts, Break
Even Analysis
Factors affecting the elasticity of demand – Supply and law of Supply.
10 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Investment Decisions & Market Structures - Financial Statements & Ratio Analysis
Time Value of Money, Capital Budgeting: Meaning, Need and Techniques of Capital Budgeting, Types of
Markets Structures, Features, Price Output determination under Perfect Competition and Monopoly
Financial Statements & Ratio Analysis: Introduction to Financial Accounting, Double entry system, Journal,
Ledger, Trail Balance, Final Accounts (with simple adjustments), Financial Analysis through Ratios:
Interpretation of Liquidity Ratios (Current Ratio and quick ratio), Activity Ratios (Inventory turnover ratio and
Debtor Turnover ratio, Creditors Turnover Ratio, Capital Turnover Ratio), Solvency Ratios (Debt- Equity ratio,
Interest Coverage ratio) and Profitability ratios (Gross Profit Ratio, Net Profit ratio, Operating Ratio, P/E Ratio
and EPS).
Price output determination under Monopolistic markets, Accounting concepts and conventions
11 + 6 Hours
Unit III
Introduction to Management - Strategic Management
Introduction to Management: Nature, Importance, Classical Theories of Management: F.W.Taylor’s and Henri
Fayol’s Theory, Functions and Levels of Management, Decision Making Process.
Methods of Production (Job, Batch and Mass Production), Inventory Control, Objectives, Functions, Analysis of
Inventory, EOQ.
Maslow & Douglas Mc.Gregor theories of Management, ABC Analysis
12 + 2 Hours
Unit IV
Project Management
Introduction, Project Life Cycle and its Phases, Project Selection Methods and Criteria, Technical Feasibility,
Project Control and Scheduling through Networks, Probabilistic Models of Networks, Time-Cost Relationship
114
(Crashing), Human Aspects in Project Management: Form of Project Organization, Role & Traits of Project
Manager.
Sources of Long-term and Short-term Project Finance
12 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Pravin Kumar, Fundamentals of Engineering Economics, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2012
2. Rajeev M Gupta, Project Management, 2nd Ed., PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2014
Reference (s)
1. Panneer Selvam. R, Engineering economics, 2nd Ed.,, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2013
2. R.B.Khanna, Project Management, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2011
3. R. Panneer Selvam & P.Senthil Kumar, Project Management, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2010
4. A. Aryasri, Management Science, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2014
5. A. Aryasri, Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2014
6. Koontz & Weihrich, Essentials of Management, 6th Ed., TMH, 2010
7. Chuck Williams and Mukherjee, Principle of Management 7th Ed., Cengage Learning, 2013
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Assessment Pattern
Remember 25 20 --
Understand 25 15 --
Apply 20 20 30
Analyse 10 15 30
Evaluate 20 20 20
Create - 10 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEBER
1. Define Managerial Economics. Explain its nature and scope.
2. Explain the concept of efficiency? What are the serveral methods to enhacing the economic efficiency?
3. Define Production Function? What are the various types of production functions
4. What is meaning of productivity? Explain how productivity can be enhanced in the Indian industries.
5. How are projects “unique” and ‘temporary as defined by PMBOK?
UNDERSTAND
1. What do you understand by engineering economics? Discuss.
2. What is law of demand? Explain its exceptions.
3. Explain different elements of costs used in cost analysis
4. Illustrate the effect of price on demand and supply with the help of a diagram.
5. Compare and contrast long-run equilibrium under monopolistic competition with that under perfect
competition.
APPLY
1. Determine price elasticity of demand given that the quantity demand of a product is 1000 units when
the price is Rs.100 and when the price declines to Rs.70, demand increases to 1100 units.
2. Consider the following data of company for the year 2015
Sales = Rs.2,40.000/-
Fixed cost = Rs.50,000/-
Variable caost = Rs.75,000/-
Find our the followings
a) Contribution
b) Profit
c) BEP
115
d) Margin of safety
3. “Every debit must have a corresponding credit” Explain.
4. Identigy the factors that are to be diagnosed both in the external and the internal environment to make
enough ground for strategy formulation. Illustrate appropriately
5. “Poor technology selection can lead to total failure for a manufacturing firm”, Do you agree? Give
reasons in support of your answer with suitable examples.
ANALYSE
1. “Management is regarded as an art by some, science by othes”. In the light of this statement, explain
the exact nature of management.
2. Make a comparative analysis of the features of different methods of production.
3. Analyse the Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) technique for appraising large investment decisions.
4. Is there any lind between mission, goal, objective, strategy and programmes in an industrial
environment?
5. Compare and contrast the project evaluation and review technique (PERT) with the critical path
method (CPM).
EVALUATE
1. Evaluate survey based demand forecasting methods with appropriate examples.
2. The logical sequence of management functions cannot be subordinated even by one fuction. Do you
agree? Support your answer.
3. Can there be a strategy without a mission? Give a mission statement for following organization:
A) An internet servce provider
B) A large private hospital
C) State electricity board
4. From the following information calculate ARR of the project, with initial cost of Rs.2,00,000/- and
scrap value is Rs.10,000/.
Year Project
1 20000
2 50000
3 70000
4 60000
5 40000
5. Following data relates to a certain project.

Activity to tm tp
1-2 2 5 14
1-3 3 12 21
2-4 5 14 17
3-4 2 5 8
4-5 1 4 7
3-5 6 15 30
a) Construct the network b) Find the project duration
c) Identify the critical path
CREATE
1. Discuss the flow of goods, services, resources and money payments in a simple economy with the help
of a suitable diagram.
2. Sketch and explain the demand relationship in each of the following statements.
a. I would never buy a Britney Spears CD! You couldn’t even give me one for nothing.
b. I generally buy a bit more coffee as the price falls. But once the price falls to Rs.2/-, I’ll buy
out the entire stock of the supermarket.
c. I spend more on orange juice even as the price rises. (Does this mean that I must be violating
the law of demand?)
3. “Managerial Economics is the discipline which deals with application of economic theory to business
management”, Discuss.
4. How information technology has enabled the development of project management in recent times?
5. ‘GE Matrix is an extension of BCG Matrix’, Discuss.
116
16EC703 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Classify different type of signals and perform linear operations on the signals
2. Compare the signals in Time and Frequency domain through its respective tools
3. Compute linear and circular convolution
4. Find the frequency response of IIR filters
5. Outline the frequency response of FIR filters
6. Compute Digital Filters on TMS processor
List of Experiments
Minimum twelve experiments to be conducted:
Implement the following using SCILAB/MATLAB

1. Generation of Discrete time signals and sum of sinusoidal signals
2. Estimate the power of the given signals
3. Linear convolution of two given sequences of different lengths
4. Determine the power spectral density of the given sequence and plot the spectrum
5. Verify the circular convolution of two given sequences of different lengths
6. Determine the FFT for given sequence using DIT radix-2 algorithm
7. Plot the Magnitude and phase response of IIR filter (LP/HP) using Butterworth Filter
8. Plot the Magnitude and phase response FIR LP/HP filter using windowing technique
a) Using rectangular window, b) Using triangular window
9. To study the architecture of DSP chips : TMS 320C 6X Instructions
Implement the following using TMS processor
10. Linear convolution of two given sequences and plot

11. DFT of the given sequence and plot Magnitude and Phase response
12. Magnitude response FIR LP filter using rectangular windowing technique
13. Magnitude response IIR LP filter
1. Mixing and separation of two voice signals by using SCILAB/MATLAB

2. Design chess board by using SCILAB/MATLAB
3. Design a notch filter for the removal of power line interference from ECG signal by using TMS
processor
Reading Material(s)
1. Digital Signal Processing by Sanjit K.Mitra 2nd Edition , TATA McGraw Hill
2. Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms, and Applications: John G. Proakis, Dimitris G.
Manolakis, Pearson Education , PHI, 2007
117
16EC704 MICROWAVE ENGINEERING LAB
0032
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the characteristics of Reflex Klystron, LED, GUNN diode and Laser diode
2. Recognize VSWR and Impedance of rectangular waveguide
3. Check attenuation of variable attenuator
4. Implement insertion and isolation loss of Circulator
5. Generate S matrix of Magic Tee
6. Differentiate frequency and wave length of waveguide
List of Experiments
Minimum Twelve Experiments to be conducted:
1. Characteristics of the Reflex Klystron

2. V-I Characteristics of a GUNN Diode
3. Attenuation of a variable attenuator
4. Coupling factor of Directional Coupler
5. Low, medium and high VSWR of a rectangular waveguide
6. Impedance of a wave guide using smith chart
7. Frequency and wavelength of a rectangular waveguide
8. Insertion loss and isolation of a circulator
9. Isolation and coupling factor of a Magic Tee
10. V-I characteristics of fiber optic LED
11. Numerical aperture of an optical fiber cable
12. V-I characteristics of a Laser diode
13. Scattering matrix of a circulator
14. Gain of a waveguide horn antenna
Equipment required for the Laboratory:

1. Microwave test bench with Gunn Power supply and Klystron power supply
4. Multi Meters
5. Laser diode kit
6. Optical fiber cable
1. Electronic tuning range of a Reflex Klystron

2. Directivity of a Directional Coupler

1. Samuel Y. Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, PHI, 3rd Edition, 1994.
2. M. Kulkarni, “Microwave and Radar Engineering”, Umesh Publications1998.
3Students shall opt any one as a Mini–Project in addition to the regular experiments
118
16EC801 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS AND STANDARDS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the core values and awareness on professional ethics and human values
2. Interpret engineering as social experimentation
3. Assess the responsibilities of an engineer for safety, risk benefit analysis and professional rights
4. Illustrate various roles of engineers in various global issues
5. Select ethical principles to resolve situations that arise in their professional lives
6. Attribute professional ethics and human values to address real time situations
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 3 2
2 2 2 3 1
3 2 1 3 1
4 2 1 3 1
5 1 1 3 2
6 2 2 3 2
Unit I
Human Values and Engineering Ethics
Morals, Values and Ethics, Integrity, Work ethic, Service learning, Civic virtue, Respect for others, Living
peacefully, Caring, Sharing, Honesty, Courage, Valuing time, Cooperation, Commitment, Empathy, Self-
confidence, Character, Spirituality.
Senses of Engineering Ethics, Variety of moral issues, Types of inquiry, Kohlberg’s theory, Gilligan’s theory,
Consensus and Controversy, Models of professional roles, Theories about right action, Self-interest, Customs
and Religion, Uses of Ethical Theories.
Moral dilemmas, Moral Autonomy 12+3 Hours
Unit II
Safety, Responsibilities and Rights in Social Experimentation
Engineering as Experimentation, Engineers as responsible Experimenters, Codes of Ethics, Balanced Outlook
on Law, Safety and Risk, Assessment of Safety and Risk, Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk, Respect for
Authority, Collective Bargaining, Confidentiality, Conflicts of Interest, Occupational Crime, Professional
Rights, Employee Rights.
Intellectual Property Rights 12+3 Hours
Unit III
Global Issues and EMI
Multinational Corporations, Environmental Ethics, Computer Ethics, Weapons Development, Engineers as
Managers, Consulting Engineers, Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors, Moral Leadership, Code of
Conduct, Corporate Social Responsibility.
Electromagnetic Interference Sources, EMI as combination of radiation and conduction, EMI from power
electronic equipment.
Biological effects of EMI, Safety and signal grounds 11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Industry Standards
Handling of electro static sensitive devices, Electronics Standards of India, ITU-T, TRAI, Communication
Standards: Rules and Ethical concerns, Cell tower radiation hazards and solution, Specific Absorption Rate, e-
waste management, Ethical guidelines for processing digital images.
Case Studies
10+5 Hours
Total=45+15 Hours
119
Textbook (s)
1. R.S.Naagarazan, Professional Ethics and Human Values, New Age International Ltd Publishers, 2006
2. Dr. V.P. Kodali, Engineering Electromagnetic Compatibility, IEEE Publication, Printed in India by S.
Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2000
Reference (s)
1. https://www.minicircuits.com/app/AN40-005.pdf
2. http://electronicstds.gov.in/CREITG/app_srv/tdc/gl/jsp/readmore.jsp
3. https://www.ee.iitb.ac.in/~mwave/GK-
Cell%20tower%20radiation%20hazards%20and%20solutions.pdf
4. Monika, Jugal Kishore, “E-Waste Management: As a Challenge to Public Health in India”, Indian J
Community Med. 2010 Jul; 35(3): 382–385. doi: 10.4103/0970-0218.69251
5. Douglas W. Cromey, Sci Eng Ethics. 2010 December ; 16(4): 639–667. doi:10.1007/s11948-010-9201-
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 15 --
Understand 25 25 --
Apply 15 25 50
Analyse 35 35 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Engineering Ethics

2. List the two approaches to Engineering ethics
3. List the different meanings of ‘ethics’
4. List the key trends in engineering ethics
5. Define morality
6. List the five characteristics of professionals
7. Define a ‘professional engineer’
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the term ‘respect for others’

2. Explain the term, ‘moral dilemma’
3. Explain the relation between autonomy and authority.
4. Explain the terms, ‘Profession’, ‘Professional’, and ‘Professionalism’.
5. Explain the term ‘self realization ethics’
6. Compare ‘safety’ and ‘risk’
APPLY
1. Assess the principle of ‘pre-conventional level’ of moral development

2. Assess the principle of ‘post-conventional level’ of moral development.
1
120
3. Assess the importance of Industrial Standards

4. Assess the four aspects of ‘whistle blowing’
ANALYSE
1. Differentiate between morality and ethics

2. Differentiate between caring and sharing
3. Differentiate between Kohlberg and Gilligan theory of moral development
121
16EC802 WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Exemplify wired and wireless networks for real time applications
2. Summarise sensor network architectures for various application
3. Interpret various operations in sensor node and transceiver design
4. Classify suitable medium access protocols, routing protocols, security protocols and radio hardware
5. Implement Prototype sensor networks using commercial components
6. Differentiate various infrastructure management and sensor network platform tools
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 1 2
2 2 1 2 2
3 2 1 2 1
4 3 2 1 1
5 3 2 1 1
6 3 2 1 1
Unit-I
Sensor Network architectures
Key definitions of WSN, Advantages of sensor Networks, Unique constraints and challenges, Driving
Applications, Enabling Technologies for WSNs. Single node architecture-Hardware Components, Energy
consumption of sensor nodes, Operating system and execution environment, Network architecture-Sensor
network scenarios. Optimization goals, Figures of merits, Gate way concepts.
Zigbee based WSN
11+3 Hours
Unit-II
PHY and MAC Layer Protocols
Physical layer, Transceiver design considerations, Personal area Networks (PANs), Hidden Node and Exposed
node Problem, Topologies of PANs, Topologies of MANETs, and Topologies of WANETs. Issues in designing
a MAC protocol for WSNs, Design goals of a MAC protocol for WSNs, Classification of MAC Protocols, and
Contention based protocols.
Bridging WSN with external public network 10+4 Hours
Unit-III
Network and Transport Layer Protocols
Introduction, Issues in designing a routing protocol for ad-hoc wireless networks, Classification of routing
Protocols, Table-driven routing protocols, On-demand routing protocols, Hybrid routing Protocols, Routing
Protocols with efficient flooding mechanism, Hierarchical routing protocols , Power aware routing Protocols,
Proactive routing. Issues in designing Transport layer for ad-hoc wireless Networks, Design goals of Transport
layer for ad-hoc wireless Networks, Classification of transport layer solutions, TCP over ad-hoc wireless
networks.
Optimization of WSN nodes 12+4 Hours
122
Unit-IV
Application Layer and programming challenges
Topology control, Clustering, Time Synchronization, Localization, Positioning, Sensor Tasking and Control,
Security in ad-hoc wireless networks, Network security requirements, Issues and Challenges in security
provisioning, Network security attacks, Key management, Security Routing in ad-hoc wireless networks. Sensor
node hardware-Berkeley motes, Programming challenges, Node level software platforms, Node level simulators,
State centric programming.
WSN in Internet of Things
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. C. Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and Protocols, PHI,
2004
2. Jagannathan Sarangapani, Wireless Ad- hoc and Sensor Networks: Protocols. Performance and
Control, CRC Press, 2007
3. Holger Karl &Andreas Willig, Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks, John Wiley,
2005
Reference (s)
1. KazernSohraby, Daniel Minoli, &TaiebZnati, Wireless Sensor Networks- Technology, Protocols and
Applications John Wiley, 2007
2. Feng Zhao & Leonidas J. Guibas, Wireless Sensor Networks- An Information Processing Approach,
Elsevier, 2007
3. C.K. Toh , Ad- Hoc Mobile Wireless Networks: Protocols & Systems, Prentice Hall, 2002
4. C. S. Raghavendra, Krishna M. Sivalingam, Wireless Sensor Networks, Springer, Ist Edition, 2006
5. S Anandamurugan ,Wireless Sensor Networks, Lakshmi Publications, 2010
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remembering 45 -- --
Understanding 45 20 --
Application 10 40 40
Analysis -- 40 40
Evaluate -- -- 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State the transceiver design considerations?

2. List out any two different types optimization goals
3. Define WSN
4. Label the design goals of Transport layer protocol
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the hidden node and exposed node problem

2. Summarise issues in designing MAC protocol for ad-hoc wireless networks
3. Illustrate the unique constraints and challenges of WSNs
4. Explain the process of overhearing
2
123
APPLY
1. Implement different Network security attacks

2. Demonstrate the programming challenges and applications of WSN
3. Construct different transport layer solutions for any real time application
ANALYZE
1. Compare and Contrast between connection based MAC protocols with Scheduling mechanism
2. Organize different ways of designing a Routing protocols for Ad Hoc Wireless networks
3. Outline the unique constraints and challenges of WSNs
4. Compare between active and passive attacks
EVALUATE
1. Determine the performance of Homogeneous WSN
2. Defend a sensor network work without exploit high gain
124
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016| Courses under Elective I. Approved in 11 th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16CS303 COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Analyze the different components of the Computer System - their functions and their interconnections.
2. Implement the various Instruction Formats that the processor follows
3. Implement the Control Unit to generate control signals to execute a particular Instruction
4. Apply the different operations like Addition-Subtraction-Multiplication and Division in hardware level
5. Analyze and implement suitable designed of the Memory systems for better performance of the computer
6. Implement on high speed Computers using the Pipelining & Multiprocessor concepts
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO 3 PO 13
1 3 2 2
2 2 3 3
3 3 2 2
4 2 3 3
5 3 2 2
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Fundamentals of Computers & Basic Computer Organization and Design
Introduction to Digital Computers-Hardware and Software-Computer types-Functional units-Register transfer
language: Register transfer-Bus and Memory transfers; Micro-Operations: Arithmetic Micro-operations-Logic
Micro-operations-Shift Micro-operations-Arithmetic Logic Shift Unit.
Instruction Codes-Computer Registers-Computer Instructions-Timing and Control-Instruction Cycle-Memory-
Reference Instructions-Register-Reference Instruction-Input-Output Instruction-Interrupts
Fundamentals of Hardware Description Language (VHDL)
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Computer Arithmetic and the Memory System
Fixed Point Representation-floating Point Representation-addition and Subtraction-Multiplication Algorithms-
Division Algorithms-Floating Point Arithmetic Operations
Memory Hierarchy-Semiconductor RAM Memories-Read-only Memories-Cache Memories-Performance
considerations - Secondary Storage-Virtual Memories.
Decimal Arithmetic Unit & Operations- Error Detection code -Memory Management Hardware
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Central Processing Unit and Control Unit Design
Stack Organization-Instruction Formats-Addressing Mode-Data Transfer and Manipulation-Program Control-
Reduced Instruction Set Computer-Complex Instruction Set Computer.
Hardwired Control Unit design-Micro-programmed Control Unit design-Control Memory-Address Sequencing -
Micro-program example
Overlapping Register Windows - PDP and VAX Instruction Formats
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Input-Output Organization and Pipeline Processing
Peripheral Devices-Input-Output Interface-Asynchronous Data Transfer-Modes of Transfer-Priority Interrupt-Direct
Memory Access-Input-Output Processor (IOP)
125
Parallel Processing - Pipelining - Arithmetic Pipeline - Instruction Pipeline

Serial Communication - Vector and Array Processors
10+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Carl Hamacher, ZvonksVranesic, SafeaZaky, Computer Organization, 5 th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2002
2. M. Moris Mano, Computer Systems Architecture, 3rd Edition, Pearson/PHI, 1992
Reference (s)
1. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture, 6 th Edition, Pearson/PHI, 2007
2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Structured Computer Organization, 5 th Edition, PHI/Pearson, 2007
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 15 --
Understand 35 15 --
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 20 40 40
Evaluate -- 10 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out the different components computer organization
2. List out the different types of Micro-Operations
3. Define Register transfer language
4. List the characteristics RISC
5. Define the address sequencing
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the various operation Fixed Point Representation
2. Describe principle involved in the Hardwired Control Unit design-Micro-programmed Control Unit design
3. Illustrate the working principle of Data Transfer-Modes
4. Describe the Stack Organization with detail
5. Explain the various addressing modes with example
APPLY
1. Classify Different levels in a computer system & their significance.
2. Interpret the applications of RISC and CISC architectures
3. State the differences between register machines and stack machine?
4. Classify the different instruction sets
5. State the differences between RAM and ROM
ANALYZE
1. Compare and Contrast between Register-Reference Instruction-Input-Output Instruction
2. Analyze different ways of micro programed control unit
3. Examine the Arithmetic Pipelines - Instruction Pipelines
4. Analyze different ways of peripheral devices
126
5. Examine the various pipelining methods
Evaluate
1. Assess the performance of division algorithm
2. How do you assess the performance of control memory?
3. How do you assess the performance of Input-Output Processor?
4. How do you assess the performance of memory hierarchy?
5. Assess the performance of various multiplication algorithm
127
16EC001 ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the operation of basic meters for measuring electrical quantities
2. Implement the Bridge measurements for parameters like R, L, C, F
3. Differentiate Signal generators and Signal analyzers
4. Explain the basic design operation of different CRO’s
5. Execute electrical quantities measurement using CRO
6. Differentiate various transducer’s features and their principle of operation
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2
1 2 1
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 2 1
5 3 2
6 2 1
Unit I
Basic Instruments
Characteristics of instruments: Accuracy, Resolution, Precision, Expected value, Error, Sensitivity, Errors in
Measurement, Dynamic Characteristics-speed of response: Fidelity, Lag and Dynamic error, DC Voltmeters:
Multirange, Range extension, Solid state and differential voltmeters, AC voltmeters: multi range, range extension,
shunt, Thermocouple type RF ammeter, Ohmmeters: series type, shunt type, Multimeter for Voltage, Current and
resistance measurements, Bridges: Measurement of Resistance, inductance, capacitance, frequency, Errors and
precautions in using bridges. Q-meter.
Frequency counter, Power Meter
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Signal Generators and Analyzers
Signal Generator: fixed and variable, AF oscillators, Standard and AF sine and square wave signal generators,
Function Generators, Square pulse, Random noise, sweep, Arbitrary waveform generator, Wave Analyzers,
Harmonic Distortion Analyzers, Spectrum Analyzers, Digital Fourier Analyzers.
Digital Spectrum Analyzer, Digital AWG
10+4 Hours
Unit III
Cathode Ray Oscilloscope
Oscilloscopes CRT features, vertical amplifiers, horizontal deflection system, sweep, trigger pulse, delay line, sync
selector circuits, simple CRO, triggered sweep CRO, Dual beam CRO, Measurement of amplitude and frequency.
Dual trace oscilloscope, sampling oscilloscope, storage oscilloscope, digital readout oscilloscope, digital storage
oscilloscope, Lissajous method of frequency measurement, standard specifications of CRO, probes for CRO: Active
& Passive, attenuator type.
Digital CRO
12+4 Hours
128
Unit IV
Transducers
Transducers: active & passive transducers: Resistance, Capacitance, inductance, Strain gauges, LVDT, Piezo
Electric transducers, Resistance Thermometers, Thermocouples, Thermistors, Sensistors, Measurement of physical
parameters: force, pressure, velocity, humidity, moisture, speed, proximity and displacement, basics of telemetry for
industrial use, Data acquisition systems.
Collision detection sensor
11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. H.S.Kalsi, Electronic instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill, 2ndEdition, 2004.
2. A.D. Helfrick and W.D. Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques, PHI,
5th Edition, 2002.
Reference (s)
1. David A. Bell, Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements, PHI, 2 nd Edition, 2003.
2. Robert A.Witte Electronic Test Instruments, Analog and Digital Measurements, Pearson Education, 2nd
Edition, 2004.
3. K. Lal Kishore, Electronic Measurements & Instrumentations, Pearson Education, 1st Edition, 2005.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 Int. Test 2 Assignment Test 2(%)

LLLevelLevel
Remember (%)
20 (%)
10 --
Understand 50 40 --
Apply 30 50 --
Analysis -- -- 50
Evaluate -- -- 30
Create -- -- 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List five characteristics of basic measuring instrument

2. Define accuracy, precision, absolute error and relative accuracy of measurement
3. Recall operation principle of frequency counter
4. Define the basic elements of function generator
5. Define the dynamic range of a spectrum analyzer
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the operation of a sampling oscilloscope with a neat block diagram

2. Infer the use of Random noise generator for different applications
3. Classify the parameters of oscilloscope like – sensitivity, Bandwidth, rise time
4. Explain briefly about Data Acquisition System (DAS) and their applications
129
5. Exemplify measuring of the pressure using LVDT
APPLY
1. Select a Signal Generator to test the AM & FM receivers, RF receivers, Amplifier frequency response
2. Find the elements that will affect time period and slope of the given waveform in the pulse and square
wave generator.
3. The frequency range, thecenter frequencyof waveform generated by swept frequency generator to
vary. Select the elements that effects variation.
4. Design a modification circuit in function generator to get waveforms with T, 2T,3T, 4T for Upper and
lower current sources delivering a current with ratio 0.8.
5. The function generator contains capacitor at integrator having 10µF. the upper current sources is
delivering a direct current 10mA and the capacitor takes charge and discharge time is [10ms,30ms ] to
reach references voltages [-5v,+5v] .show the values of ramp, sine, square wave generated by function
generator and sketch waveforms.
ANALYZE
1. “Bridges are used to measure inductance of coils having different values of Q and Capacitances are
used therein to obtain the balance”, Justify the statement.
2. Simplify the equation for the gauge factor of a resistive strain gauge in terms of Poisson’s ratio.
3. Find the different ranges of currents can be measured by using multi-range ammeter shown in the
figure.
4. A current meter that has an internal resistance of 78Ω is used to measure the current through resistor
Rc. Outline the current values shown by meter & actual current value.
130
5. The ammeter A, B, C having internal resistances (80Ω, 8kΩ, 80kΩ) and having the dead times
(0.2µsec,0.5µsec,0.1µsec) respectively. The meters used in the circuit shown below. Conclude with
reason abest measuring instrument for current flowing through Rb.
EVALUATE
1. Determine the current flow through the PMMC meter when ohm-meter switches at different
range positions.
2. Choose design parameters of each elements in below diagram to generate different shape and
frequency waveforms.
3. Check the values of ramp capacitors when upper current source and Lower current sources
Delivering a current at ratio of 0.2, 0.5, 0.8 and generated a waveform with time periods 10ms,
100ms, 0.1sec.
4. Compare different modes of Fundamental-Suppression Harmonic Distortion Analyser usefully to

measure in different applications.
5. Contrast the nonlinearities of sweep generator, Varactor diode, Local oscillator effects the
131
measurements in Spectrum analyzers.

CREATE
1. The voltmeter has sensitivity of 10kΩ/V and 50v range. Derive the voltage drop across R4 and
voltage displayed and Percentage of Error produced by the meter.
2. The ohm-meter shown below uses 100-Ω basic movement requiring a full scale current of
2mA.the internal battery voltage is 3V. The desired scale marking for half-scale deflection is
2000Ω. Generate (a) the values of R1 and R2 (b) the maximum value of R2 to compensate for
20% drop in battery voltage due to aging effect (c) the scale error at the half-scale mark (2, 000Ω)
when R2 set as in (b).
3. The Voltmeter M1, M2, M3 having voltage measuring ranges (0-5V, 0-50V, 0-100V) and having
sensitivity (100Ω/V, 1kΩ/V, 10kΩ/V) respectively. Argue the values of Rx resistor when (i) M1
voltmeter is connected to Rx resistor it displayed a value of 5v (ii) M2 voltmeter is connected to
Rx resistor it displayed a value of 7.5v (iii) M3 voltmeter is connected to Rx resistor it displayed a
value of 57.5v.
132
16EC002 TRANSMISSION LINES AND WAVEGUIDES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the transmission line parameters
2. Explain various transmission line characteristics
3. Compute various transmission line parameters using Smith chart
4. Compare various circuit elements
5. Implement stub matching techniques
6. Differentiate various waveguides
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2
1 2 1
2 3 1
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Basics of Transmission Lines
Concept and definition, different kinds of transmission lines, equivalent circuit, primary constants, secondary
constants, propagation constant and characteristic impedance of symmetrical networks, current and voltage
ratios, general transmission line equations, attenuation and phase constant, phase velocity and group velocity,
lossless transmission line, infinite transmission line, distortion less transmission line and condition for distortion less
transmission line.
Applications of transmission lines
14 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Transmission Line Characteristics
The load reflection coefficient, Standing Wave Ratio, Line impedance, generalized reflection coefficient, lossless
matched transmission line, lossless shorted transmission line, lossless open transmission line, lossless resistive
loaded transmission line, power relations on a general transmission line.
Application of transmission line in cascaded T sections
10+ 3 Hours
Unit III
Finite Length Transmission Lines
Circuit elements: λ/4, λ/2, λ/8 lines. Impedance matching: Single stub, Double stub with applications, Quarter wave
transformer, problems. Smith Chart: Construction, impedance chart, admittance chart, Problems using smith chart.
Applications of stub matching techniques 10+ 4 Hours
Unit IV
Wave guides
General Wave behavior along uniform Guiding structures, Transverse Electromagnetic waves, Transverse Magnetic
waves, Transverse Electric waves, TM and TE waves between parallel plates. Rectangular Waveguides:
Introduction, Transverse Electric (TE) and Transverse Magnetic (TM) modes (Qualitative treatment only).
Application of waveguides in radiating systems
11 + 4 Hours
Total: 45 + 15 Hours
133
Textbook (s)
1. Umesh Sinha, Transmission lines and networks, Satya Prakasan, 2010
2. Nathan Ida, Engineering Electromagnetics, Springer International, 2nd Edition, 2008
3. E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, PHI, 2 nd Edition, 2011
Reference (s)
1. Samuel Y. Liao, Microwave Devices and Circuits, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2003
2. David M Pozar, Microwave Engineering, Wiley student Edition, 3rd Edition, 2007
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 15 --
Understand 35 15 --
Apply 20 35 70
Analyse 20 35 30
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define phase velocity and group velocity

2. Define insertion loss
3. Define VSWR
4. Label the parts of smith chart
5. List the two dominant mode in Circular waveguide
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain TE mode in rectangular waveguide

2. Explain attenuation Vs frequency characteristics in a rectangular waveguide
3. Illustrate the concept of dominant mode excitation in TE and TM wave
4. Explain waveform distortions in a transmission line
5. Explain inductance loading of telephone cables
APPLY
1. Show that the reflection coefficient | K|=|Emax|-|Emin| |Emax|+|Emin |

2. Find the cut of frequency of a circular waveguide at 11 GHz with internal diameter of 4.5 cm
3. Find fc of perfectly conducting planes with a separation of 8cm in air at 500 MHz with TM10 mode
4. A TE10 mode is propagated through a waveguide with a=10cm at a frequency of 2.5GHz. Find
Cut off frequency, cutoff wavelength, phase velocity and wave impedance.
5. A loss less line has a shunt C of 69 pF/m and a series L of 87μH/m, find the characteristic impedance.
134
ANALYZE
1. Compare TE and TM modes.

2. Differentiate phase and group velocity.
3. Justify the equations of attenuation constant and phase constant of a transmission line in terms of R, L,
C and G.
4. Resolve the expression for wave impedance of TE & TM waves between parallel plates
5. If the plate separation is 10 cm. Find the propagation constant at 100 MHz for TE10 mode and TM10
Mode and compare the wave propagation for 100 MHz.
135
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016| Courses under Elective II. Approved in 11th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16IT404 COMPUTER NETWORKS
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Propose appropriate network model for data communication
2. Analyze various protocols in data link layer.
3. Analyze IEEE 802 series protocols.
4. Develop web applications for sending E-mail.
5. Propose and implement appropriate routing algorithm for data routing.
6. Extend the Internet connection to a given system and trouble shoots the same.
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO13
1 3 2 3
2 3 3 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 3 1
5 1 3 2
6 1 3 1
Unit I
Network Hardware-Network Software-and Transmission Media
OSI, TCP/IP, the ARPANET, Network Topologies, Physical Layer
Transmission media: Magnetic Media, Twisted pair, Base band Coaxial Cable, Fiber optics, Wireless Transmission:
Electromagnetic Spectrum, Radio Transmission and Microwave Transmission, Switching Techniques: Circuit
Switching, Packet Switching, Message Switching.
Taxonomy of networking devices.
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Data link layer
Design Issues: Framing, error detection and correction, CRC, Elementary Data link Protocols: Stop and wait, Sliding
Window protocols: Go-back-n-Selective Repeat, Medium Access sub layer: Channel allocation methods, Multiple
Access protocols: ALOHA, CSMA, IEEE Standard 802.3 and Ethernet, IEEE Standard 802.4: Token bus.
Data Link Control Protocols: HDLC-SLIP-PPP
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Network Layer
Network Layer design issues, Virtual circuit and Datagram subnets, Routing algorithms: Shortest path routing,
Flooding, Hierarchical routing, Distance vector routing, Broad cast and Multi cast routing, Congestion Control:
Congestion prevention policies.
Internet control protocols
10+3 Hours
Unit IV
Transport Layer
Transport Services, Connection management, Elements of Transport Protocols, Internet Transport Protocols: UDP
and TCP. IPv4 & IPv6, Application Layer, Domain name system, Electronic Mail, WWW
ATM Transport protocol, Proxy Servers, Multimedia: Data compression, digital representation of analog signals,
Real time transport protocol-session control protocols
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
136
Textbook (s)
Andrew S Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, 4th Edition, Pearson Education /PHI, 2002
1.
Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking, 3rdEdition, Tata McGraw Hill Higher
2.
Education, 2003
Reference (s)
1. Willam Stallings, Data and Computer Communications,8 thEdition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2007
2. W.A. Shay, Thomson, Understanding communications and Networks, 3rd Edition, Cengage Learning, 2005
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 30 --
Understand 35 40 --
Apply 20 20 70
Analyze 20 10 20
Evaluate -- -- 10
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List the applications of Computer Networks
2. Write two differences between OSI and TCP/IP models
3. State 5 key assumptions in Dynamic channel allocation
4. State the purpose of DNS
5. Define congestion
6. State the 2-army problem
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate OSI Reference model
2. Explain various design issues of data link layer
3. What are the responsibilities of Data Link layer and explain Pure Aloha and Slotted Aloha protocols
4. Describe Distance Vector routing algorithm with example and explain count to infinity problem
5. Represent the Manchester encoding for the bit stream: 0001110101
APPLY
1. What is the check summed frame transmitted if the message is 1101011011 and the generator polynomial is
x 4 + x + 1 using CRC
2. Can you think of any circumstances under which an open-loop protocol, (e.g., a Hamming code) might be
preferable to the feedback-type protocols
3. Assuming that all routers and hosts are working properly and that all software in both is free of all errors, is
there any chance, however small, that a packet will be delivered to the wrong destination
ANALYZE
1. The following data fragment occurs in the middle of a data stream for which the byte-stuffing algorithm
described in the text is used: A B ESC C ESC FLAG FLAG D. What is the output after stuffing?
1
137
2. The following character encoding is used in a data link protocol: A: 01000111; B: 11100011; FLAG:
01111110; ESC: 11100000 Show the bit sequence transmitted (in binary) for the four-character frame: A B
ESC FLAG when each of the following framing methods are used:
(a) Character count
(b) Flag bytes with byte stuffing
(c) Starting and ending flag bytes, with bit stuffing
3. Analyze Data link protocols almost always put the CRC in a trailer rather than in a header
EVALUATE
1. Consider the user of differentiated services with expedited forwarding. Is there a guarantee that expedited
packets experience a shorter delay than regular packets? Justify
2. Compute a multicast spanning tree for router C in the following subnet for a group with members at routers
A, B, C, D, E, F, I, and K.
138
16CS304 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify and define the data models needed to design a database
2. Create conceptual and logical database design for Large enterprises
3. Demonstrate the relational data model
4. Apply Integrity constraints over the relations
5. Apply normalization process on existing database for eliminating redundancy
6. Apply the recovery techniques for managing the database effectively to avoid the data lose
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 3 2
2 3 3 2
3 3 2 3
4 3 3 2
5 3 2 3
6 2 2 3
Unit I
Introduction to Database Systems
File System Vs DBMS, Advantages of DBMS, Structure of DBMS, Levels of Data Abstraction (Data
Independence), Database Users and Administrators, Different Data Models. E-R Model: Overview of Database
Design, Entities, Attributes, and Entity Sets, Relationships and Relationship Sets Additional Features of the ER
Model
Codd’s rules - Introduction to Distributed Databases - Data Ware Housing and Data Mining
11+3 Hours
Unit II
Introduction to the Relational Model
Integrity Constraints Over Relations-Introduction to Views-Relational Algebra - Selection And Projection - Set
Operations-Renaming-Joins-Division-Examples of Relational Algebra Queries-Relational Calculus: Tuple
Relational Calculus.
SQL Queries: Form Of Basic SQL Query-Union-Intersect-And Except-Nested Queries-Aggregative Operators-
Group By And Having Clauses-Null Values-Outer Joins.
Query Optimization: Query Processing and Optimization-Heuristics and Cost Estimation in Query Optimization
11+5 Hours
Unit III
Schema Refinement and Normal Forms
Introduction To Schema Refinement - Problems Caused By Redundancy - Decomposition - Problems Related To
Decomposition - Functional Dependency - Closure of a Set of Fds - Attribute Closure - First - Second - Third
Normal Forms – BCNF - Multi Valued Dependencies – Fourth Normal Form.
Transactions: Acid Properties of Transaction - Transaction States - Schedule: Serial Schedule - Concurrent
Schedules - Anomalies Associated With Concurrent Schedules (RW - WR - and WW Conflicts) -Serializability -
Conflict Serializability - and View Serializability.
Join Dependency - Fifth Normal Form - Domain Key Normal Form
12+4 Hours
139
Unit IV
OODBMS, Concurrency Control, Crash recovery
Introduction to Lock Management-Lock Based Concurrency Control: 2pl-Strict 2pl-Concurrency without Locking-
Timestamp–Based Concurrency Control - Optimistic Concurrency Control. Introduction to Aries - the Log - the
Write-Ahead Log Protocol-Check Pointing
Object-Oriented DBMSs-Concepts and Design: Introduction to Object-Oriented Data Models and DBMSs-
OODBMS perspectives-Persistence-Issues in OODBMSs-The object Oriented Database System Manifesto-
Advantages and Disadvantages of OODBMSs-Object oriented Database Design.
Database Security: Data Classification-Threats and Risks-Database access control-Types of Privileges.
File Organization-Comparison of File Organizations (Heap File - Sorted File Hash File)
11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Elmasri & Navatha, Fundamentals of Database Systems, Pearson Education, 2006
2. Silberschatz Korth, Database System Concepts, McGraw hill, 5 th Edition, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Peter Rob & Carlos Coronel, Database Systems design, Implementation and Management, 7 th Edition,
2004.
2. Raghurama Krishnan & Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems, TATA McGraw-Hill, 3rd
Edition, 2006
3. C.J.Date, Introduction to Database Systems, Pearson Education, 1999.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Int. Test 1 Int. Test 2
Cognitive Level Assignment Test2 (%)
(%) (%)
Remember 30 30 10
Understand 35 30 20
Apply 35 40 30
Analyze -- -- 30
Evaluate -- -- 10
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List any four application of DBMS
2. Define data model
3. List any four applications for triggers
4. Define functional dependency
5. List the 4 properties of Transaction
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain E-R Model with suitable example
2. Explain the role of integrity constraints in database design
3. Illustrate the working principle of ‘write a head log’ protocol
4. Differentiate 3NF and 4NF
5. Explain Two Phase Locking Protocol
2
140
APPLY
1. When multiple transactions are being executed by the operating system in a multiprogramming
environment, there are possibilities that instructions of one transaction are interleaved with some other
transaction. Apply the suitable concept to overcome the problem
2. Classify various normal forms according to their applicability
3. Give some real world applications of Normalization
4. Illustrate the Commit and Rollback operations of Transaction Control
5. Give some real world applications for Database indexing techniques
ANALYZE
1. Compare File processing system with DBMS
2. Analyze different locking protocol for concurrency control and serializability
3. Normalization will increase the complexity of the database design. Justify
4. Compare DDL and DML of SQL
5. Compare and Contrast Serializabilty and Recoverability
EVALUATE
1. Is database redesign is necessary? Explain
2. How can you evaluate the performance of two data models?
3. Evaluate the performance of query processor and list the corresponding metrics
4. How can you assess the throughput and delay for any DBMS?
5. How can you evaluate the impact of data models on the query processing?
141
16EC003 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain about optical fiber communication system and fiber optic devices
2. Illustrate the significance of various components involved in optical fiber communication system design
3. Attribute the various optical communication networks
4. Assess various Optical switching and Access Networks
5. Illustrate the multicasting and optical network simulators-
6. Explain various Optical Metro Networks and Network Routing
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2
1 2 1
2 2 1
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 2 1
6 2 1
Unit–I
Basic Optical Communication Network
Overview of basic fiber optic communication system: optical fibers, optical sources & optical detectors, Wave
propagation through optical fibers, optical link design & calculation of various loses, Optical receiver design,
Modulation formats for optical communication system.
Wavelength Division Multiplexing Network: Advantages of optical network, telecom network overview and
architecture, WDM optical networks, WDM network evolution, WDM network construction, broadcast and select
optical WDM network, wavelength routed optical WDM network, Challenges of optical WDM network.
Optical connectors
10+5 Hours
Unit–II
Optical Networking Components and Networks
Optical Networking Components :Optical transmitters, semiconductor laser diode, tunable and fixed laser, laser
characteristics, photodectors, tunable and fixed optical filters, channel equalizers, optical amplifiers and its
characteristics, semiconductor laser amplifier, Raman amplifier, doped fiber amplifier, Direction Couplers, beam
splitters, switches, connectors, Star couplers, OADM, OXC, CLOS architecture, MEMS, wavelength convertors,
polarizer, polarization controllers.
Single and Multi-hop Networks: Introduction to single and multi-hop networks, Characteristics of single and multi-
hop networks, experimental single hop networks: LAMBDANET, STARNET, SONATA, Rainbow, experimental
multi-hop networks: Shufflenet, De Bruijn Graph, Hypercube.
Adhoc Networks 12+3 Hours
Unit III
Optical switching and Access Networks
Optical packet switching basics, slotted and unslotted networks, header and packet format, contention resolution in
OPS networks, self routing, examples on OPS node architecture, optical burst switching, signaling and routing
142
protocols for OBS networks, contention resolution in OPS networks, multicasting, implementation and application.
MEMs based switching, switching with SOAs.
Introduction to access network, PON, EPON and WDN EPON: overview, principal of operation, architecture;
dynamic wavelength allocation, STARGATE: overview, need, architecture, operation and application, gigabit
Ethernet, radio over fiber network.
Network applications
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Optical Metro Networks and Routing
Introduction to metro network, overview of traffic grooming in SONET ring, traffic grooming in WDM ring,
Interconnected WDM networks, packet communication using tunable WADM, RINGOSTAR: architecture, proxy
stripping, protect oration and network lifetime
Routing and wavelength assignment: Problem formulation, routing sub-problem: routing types, wavelength
assignment sub-problem, algorithms: simulated annealing, flow deviation algorithm. Introduction to multicasting,
Multicast-capable switch architecture, unicast, broadcast and multicast traffic, multicast tree protection, static and
dynamic traffic grooming, Introduction to Optical Network simulators (NS-2, NS-3, OMNeT++, and OPNET).
Optical Networks Budget
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Gerd Keiser, Fibre Optic communication, TMH 4th Edition, 2000.
2. Behrouz A Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking, McGraw Hill, 4 thEdition, 2007.
3. Tarek S. El. Bawab, Optical Switching, Springer, 2006.
Reference (s)
1. John M Senior, Optical Fiber Communications -Principles and Practice, Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2009
2. Biswanath Mukherjee, Optical Network Series, Springer,2006.
3. R.Ramaswami and K.Sivarajan, Optical Networks, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2 nd Edition, 2002.
4. Mayer & Martin, Optical Switching Networks, Cambridge University Press, 2008.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 20 --
Understand 35 25 25
Apply 20 25 30
Analyse 20 30 45
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define optical filter
2. List any two types of optical sources and detectors
3
143
3. Define Wavelength division multiplexing

4. Define Ethernet
5. List the two elements in optical receiver.
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate SONET layer and frame structure with diagram
2. Illustrate broadcast and select wavelength division multiplexing network
3. Illustrate single hop and multi hop networks
4. Illustrate NS-2 and NS-3 optical network simulators
5. Identify the need for STARGATE network. Illustrate its architecture and operation
APPLY
1. Demonstrate optical networks
2. Find the data rate of STS-1, STS-3 signal
3. Demonstrate flow deviation algorithm
4. Demonstrate various optical networking components
5. A graded index fiber has a characteristic refractive index profile ( α ) of 1.85 and a core diameter of 60 μm.
Compute the insertion loss due to a 5 μm lateral offset at an index-matched fiber joint assuming the uniform
illumination of all guided modes
ANALYSE
1. Compare and Contrast between Raman amplifier and doped fiber amplifier
2. Differentiate surface emitting and edge emitting LEDs
3. Differentiate between connection-oriented and connection-less optical networks. Describe a suitable
topology in each case to provide large connectivity among the network users
4. Compare optical router with optical switch? With the aid of block diagrams illustrate the main networking
node elements used in optical routing and switching to establish links or connections between different
networking nodes
5. Differentiate between connection-oriented and connection-less optical networks. Describe a suitable
topology in each case to provide large connectivity among the network users.
144
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016| Courses under Elective III. Approved in 11th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16CE007 DISASTER MANAGEMENT

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the interdisciplinary nature of disaster management
2. Apply the knowledge to formulate different risk management frameworks and pre-preparedness tools for
natural and manmade disasters
3. Summarize the risk and vulnerability associated with disasters
4. Apply different technologies in the management of disasters
5. Outline the importance of education and preparedness in the management of disasters
6. Infer the role of different organizations in disaster management
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2
1 2
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 1
6 1
Unit I
Introduction to Disaster Management and Management of Natural Disasters
Introduction: Interdisciplinary nature of the subject, Disaster Risk Reduction–Global Policies and Practices, Basic
Strategies and Practices of Disaster Reduction, Linking Disaster Risk Reduction with Global Framework, Integrated
Disaster Risk Management and Post-Disaster Response-Management of Natural Disasters: Floods, Droughts,
Earthquakes, Global Warming, Cyclones, Landslides, Tsunamis and Post Tsunami hazards along the Indian Coast
Significant Aspects of Disasters-Global Earthquake Safety Initiative-Prediction of Tsunamis-Typology of flood
risks-Framework for Preparedness and Mitigation
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Management of Manmade Disasters and Risk & Vulnerability
Management of Manmade Disasters: Temporal Transport Hazard Dynamics, Solid Waste Management: Post–
disaster, A Threat of Bio-terrorism in Mega Cities, Rail and Air craft’s accidents, emerges infectious diseases, AIDS
and Climate Change Risk Reduction-Risk & Vulnerability: Building Codes and Land Use Planning, Social
Vulnerability, Environmental Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Reduction, Macroeconomic Management and
Sustainable Development, Financial Management of Disaster related Economic Losses
Temporal Analysis of Transport-Capacity Building and Institutional Strengthening-Climate Risk Management -
Decision Framework
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Role of Technology in Disaster Management
Role of Technology in Disaster Management: Implementation Technology for Disaster Reduction, Disaster
Management for Infrastructure, Geospatial Information in agriculture Drought Assessment and Monitoring,
Multimedia Technology in Disaster Risk Management Training-Education and Community: Education in Disaster
Risk Reduction , Essentials of School Disaster Education, Community Capacity and Disaster Resilience,
Community-based Disaster Recovery, Community-based Disaster Management and Social Capital, Designing
Resilience
Disaster Management Program-Building Community Capacity-Remote Sensing and GIS 11+4 Hours
145
Unit IV
Multi Sectional and Crosscutting Issues
Multi Sectional Issues: Impact of Disasters on Poverty and Deprivation, Climate Change Adaptation and Human
Health, Health Hazards and Environmental Risk-Crosscutting Issues: Forest Management and Disaster Risk
Reduction, Institutional Capacity in Disaster Management, Corporate Sector and Disaster Risk Reduction, Essentials
of Pre-disaster Recovery Planning
Poverty Vulnerability Indices-Protective Functions of Forest Resources-Corporate Organizations and Disaster
Potential-Community Focused Approach
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. R. Shaw and R. R. Krishna Murthy, Disaster Management: Global Challenges and Local Solutions, 1 st Ed.,
Universities Press (India) Private Limited, Hyderabad, 2009
2. J. Singh, Disaster Management: Future Challenges and Opportunities,2 nd Ed., I.K.International Publishing
House Private Limited, New Delhi, 2007
Reference (s)
1. D. P. Coppola, Introduction to International Disaster Management, 3rd Ed., Elsevier Publications, 2011
2. U. Ranke, Natural Disaster Risk Management, Springer International Publishing, 2016
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 10 --
Understand 30 40 --
Apply 50 50 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Hazard.
2. Define Disaster.
3. What are the different phases of disaster management cycle?
4. Define Tsunami.
5. Define landslide.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain when hazard become disaster
2. “Prevention is better than cure is opted proverb in the context of disaster management” Explain.
3. Explain the causes of global warming.
4. Explain the difference between environmental and social vulnerabilities.
5. “All the developmental projects will lead to disaster risk”, Justify.
APPLY
1. Role of Geospatial technology in disaster management
2. Role of multimedia technology in disaster management
1
146
16EE004 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the principles of solar energy systems
2. Demonstrate the applications of solar energy system
3. Illustrate the working principles of wind and biomass energy systems
4. Interpret working principles of geothermal energy system
5. Summarize operation and classification of ocean , tidal, fuel cells, small hydro and magneto hydro energy
system
6. Extend renewable energy sources to distributed generation & micro grids
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO7

1 3 2
2 2 3
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 2 3
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction &Solar Energy
Introduction to renewable energy, advantages of generating power through renewable energy sources – technical &
economical, Solar Energy: Physics of sun, the solar constant, extra-terrestrial and terrestrial solar radiation,
instruments for measuring solar radiation and sun shine. Flat Plate and Concentrating Collectors, classification of
concentrating collectors, thermal analysis of flat plate collectors, Photo voltaic energy conversion,PV cell model and
characteristics, Maximum power point tracking for photovoltaic power systems. Types of Maximum power point
tracking methods (Perturb and Observe (hill climbing), Incremental Conductance, Fractional short circuit current,
Fractional open circuit voltage)
Solar applications-solar heating /cooling technique
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Wind & Bio-Mass Energy
Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis windmills, performance characteristics, Betz criteria, maximum
power point tracking for wind, types of Maximum power point tracking methods
Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic/aerobic digestion,Types of Bio-Gas Digesters,gas yield, Combustion
characteristics of bio-gas,
Utilization for cooking, IC.Engine operation
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Energy Conversion systems
Geothermal & Ocean Energy: Types of Resources (hydrothermal, geo-pressured, hot dry rock), types of wells, and
methods of harnessing the energy (vapour dominated, liquid dominated).Ocean thermal energy conversion,
principles, Open loop&closed loop OTEC Cycles.Tidal energy- potential, conversion techniques-single basin, two
basin system. Wave energy: conversion techniques.
147
Fuel cells-Principle of working of various types of fuel cells and their working, Magneto-hydrodynamics (MHD)-
Principle of working of MHD Power plant, Hydrogen generation, battery energy storage system.
Wave, tidal power conversion systems & Small hydro power generation
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Distributed generation & Microgrid
Define grid, distributed generation(DG) & microgrid, importance of DG & microgrid, typical structure and
configuration of a microgrid, AC and DC microgrids, modes of operation and control of microgrid: grid connected
and islanded mode, anti-islanding schemes: passive, active and communication based techniques.
HVDC microgrid system 10+4 Hours
Total: 45+15=60 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. G.D. Rai , Non-Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, 1stEdition, 2000.
2. B H Khan, Non-conventional energy resources, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 2ndEdition,
2001.
3. Alexis Kwasinski , Wayne Weaver, Robert S. Balog, Micro grids and other local area power and
energy systems, Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition, 2016
Reference (s)
1. Tiwari and Ghosal, Renewable energy resources, Narosa Publishing house, 2ndEdition, 2001
2. Ranjan Rakesh, Kothari D. P. & Singal K. C., Renewable Energy Sources And Emerging Technologies,
PHI, 2ndEdition, 2013.
3. Nikos Hatziargyriou, Micro grids: Architectures and Control, wiley, 1st Edition.
4. Electricity Act 2003, Renewable Energy Act 2015.
5. Indian Constitution-Articles 51A, 47, 48A.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Comprehensive Test2 (%)
Remember 40 40 ---
Understand 60 60 80
Apply 20
Analyze --- --- ---
Evaluate --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define renewable energy
2. List out the advantages HAWT
3. List out the disadvantages non concentration collector
4. Define solar radiation
5. Define solar constant
6. Define micro-grid
UNDERSTAND
2
Comprehensive test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
148
1. Explain need of micro-grid

2. Interpret faraday’s laws
3. Explainclosed loop OTEC Cycles system
4. Explain Principle of working of MHD Power plant
5. Compare HAWT and VAWT
6. Classify concentrating collectors
APPLY
1. Compute the power coefficient of wind turbine
2. Demonstrate storage of energy from battery
3. Assess magnetic flux density due to circular ring
4. Compute solar cell working
5. Assess the nature of microgrid
149
16ME009 PRINCIPLES OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the role of entrepreneur in economic development

2. Demonstrate methods of generating ideas
3. Develop the business plan to start their own enterprise
4. Manage various production aspects such as manufacturing costs control, marketing management and
waste reduction
5. Make financial plan for enterprise
6. Find the institutional support entrepreneurship
COs – POs Mapping
1 3 - 3 2
2 3 - 1 -
3 3 - 1 3
4 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 3 3
6 3 - 1 3
3 – Strongly linked | 2 – Moderately linked | 1 – Weakly linked
Unit I
Introduction to Entrepreneurship
Definition of Entrepreneur, Entrepreneurial Traits, Entrepreneur Vs. Manager, Entrepreneur Vs Entrepreneur. The
Entrepreneurial decision process- Role of Entrepreneurship in Economic Developments, Ethics and Social
responsibility of entrepreneurs, Woman as entrepreneur.
Opportunities for entrepreneurs in India and abroad.
10+3 Hours
Unit II
Creating and starting the venture
Sources of new Ideas, Methods of generating ideas, creating problems solving- Product planning and development
process
The business plan: Writing Business plan, Evaluating Business plans, Using and implementing business plans,
marketing plan, financial plan and the organizational plan launching formalities
Nature and scope of business plan.
15+5 Hours
Unit III
Financing and managing the new venture
Source of Capital, record keeping, recruitment, motivating and leading teams, financial controls, Marketing and
sales controls. E- Commerce and Entrepreneurship
New venture expansion strategies and issues: Features evaluation of joint ventures, acquisitions, merges,
franchising, Public issues, rights issues, bonus issues
Internet advertising
9+3 Hours
Unit IV
150
Institutional support Entrepreneurship

Role of Dire crate of Industries, District Industries, Centers (DICS), Industrial development Corporation (IDC),
state Financial corporation (SFCs), Small Scale Industries Development Corporations (SSIDCs), Khadi and village
Industries Commission (KVIC), Technical Consultancy Organization (TCO), small Industries Service Institute
(SISI), National Small Industries Corporation (NSIC), Small Industries Development Bank of India (SIDBI),
salient provision under Indian Factories Act, Employees State Insurance Act, Workmen’s Compensation Act and
payment of Bonus Act.
Labour legislation
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Robert Hisrich & Michael Peters, Entrepreneurship, TMH, 5th Edition, 2009.
2. Dollinger, Entrepreneurship, Pearson Education, 4 th Edition, 2004.
Reference (s)
1. Vasant Desal, The Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development and Management Himalaya publishing
House, 5th Edition, 2017.
2. William A. Sahlman, James Stancill, Arthur Rock, Harvard Business Review on Entrepreneurship, Harvard
Business School Press, 10th Edition 1999.
3. Robert J. Calvin, Entrepreneurial Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education 2004.
4. Gurmeet Naroola, The Entrepreneurial Connection: East Meets West in the Silicon Valley, Special edition,
TiE, 2001.
5. Bill Bolton & John Thompson, Entrepreneurs Talent, Temperament, Technique, Routledge, 2 nd Edition,
2004.
6. Agrawal, A.N. & Agarwal, M.K., Indian Economy: Problems of Development and Planning, New Age
International, 42nd Edition, 2017.
7. Gaurav Datt & Ashwani Mahajan, Dutt & Sundaram’s Indian Economy, S. Chand, 72nd Edition, 2016.
8. Srivastava, Industrial Relations Labour Laws, Vikas Publishing House, 6 th Edition, 2005.
9. Aruna Kaulgud, Entrepreneurship Management by Vikas publishing house, 2003.
10. Thomas W. Zimmerer & Norman M. Scalbrorough, Essential of Entrepreneurship and small business
management, PHI, 4th Edition, 2005.
11. Mary Coulter, Entrepreneurship in Action, PHI 2 nd Edition, 2005.
12. Kaplan, Patterns of Entrepreneurship, Willey, 4 th Edition, 2005.
13. ND Kapoor, Industrial Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, 14th Revised Edition, 2013.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 30 40 -
Understand 70 60 -
Apply - - 35
Analyze - - 45
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
3Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
151
REMEMBER
1. List the different methods of generating ideas and explain any four methods.
2. List the difference between entrepreneur vs manager.
3. What are the objectives of market research?
4. What are the market research activities? List them.
5. List the important functions of IDBI.
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the difference between entrepreneur vs manager.
2. Illustrate the characteristics or traits of an entrepreneur.
3. Illustrate the sources of new ideas for entrepreneur.
4. Explain the various steps involved in writing a business plan.
5. What are the various sources of capital required for business venture?
6. Describe the role of E-commerce in entrepreneurship with its applications.
7. Write about marketing plan and financial plans required for an entrepreneur.
8. Illustrate the factories act 1948.
9. Illustrate the reasons for the need of labor legislation becomes important
.
152
16EC004 FUNDAMENTALS OF GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the history of GPS, NAVSTAR GPS
2. State the working principle of GPS, GNSSs
3. Outline GALILEO, GLONASS signal constellation details
4. Conclude about GPS segments, signal components, IRNSS specifications
5. Demonstrate GPS coordinate systems
6. Classify various datums and map projections
COs–POs Mapping

1 1 2 2 2
2 1 2 2 2
3 2 3 3 3
4 2 3 3 3
5 3 2 2 2
6 2 2 2 3
Unit I
Introduction to Global Navigation Satellite Systems
The History of GPS, The Evolution of GPS, Development of NAVSTAR GPS, Block I, Block II, Block IIA, Block
IIR, Block IIR-M, Block IIF and Block III satellites, GPS working principle, Trilateration, Determination of satellite
position, Determining the receiver position: 2D or X-Y Plane, 3D or X-Y-Z Plane, Ionospheric effects of GPS
signals
GIS Integration
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Types of Global Navigation Satellite Systems
GALILEO: Advantages of GALILEO, signal components, PRN codes, Modulation schemes of Galileo signals:
BOC, Alt-BOC, Galileo and GPS Signal interoperability, Improved performance from the combination of
GALILEO and GNSSs, GLONASS: GLONASS constellation details, signal structure: PRN code,P-code,C/A
code,navigation data,signal modulation
GAGAN Navigation system
12+3 Hours
Unit III
GPS Satellite constellation and Signals
GPS system segments: Space segment, Control segment, User segment, GPS Signals: Pseudorandom noise (PRN)
code, C/A code, P code, Navigation data, GPS signal generation: generation of codes, Comparison of GNSSs in
terms of constellation and services, IRNSS: Segments, 1A to 1G specifications, applications
Simulation of GPS signals
10+4 Hours
153
Unit IV
Coordinate Systems
Geoid, Ellipsoid, Coordinate Systems: Geodetic and Geo centric, CTRS, CIRS, ECEF, Datums: world geodetic
1984, Indian geodetic datum, Conversion between Cartesian and geodetic coordinate frame, Map projections:
Advantages, metric properties, construction, types of map projections
Extract GPS Coordinates for a Google Maps Location 11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. G.S. Rao, Global Navigation Satellite Systems, McGraw-Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2010
2. Ahmed El-Rabbany, Introduction to GPS: the Global Positioning System,Artech House, 2002
Reference (s)
1. Scott Gleason and DemozGebre- Egziabher, GNSS Applications and Methods, Artech House, 685
Canton Street, Norwood, MA 02062, 2009
2. James Ba-Yen Tsui, Fundamentals of GPS receivers-A software approach, John Wiley &Sons, 2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 -- --
Understand 45 35 --
Apply -- 35 45
Analyze 35 30 55
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define trilateration.
2. List two applications of GPS.
3. List two important specifications of GLONASS
4. Retrive the need of PRS.
5. Define ranging codes and data.
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the working principle of GPS.

2. Identify the GPS and GLONASS interoperability issues.
3. Formulate the signal structure of GPS.
4. Abstract geodetic and geocentric coordinate systems.
5. Illustrate the modulation techniques of GALILEO system.
APPLY
1. Compute the receiver position using 3D plane.

2. Find the pseudo range on satellite with travelling time of 70ms?
3. Find the free space loss factor on a GPS satellite L1 C/A code signal at a distance of 2x10 7.
4
154
X
Show that the longitude of a point in ECEF is   tan
1
4. .
Y
x(t )  A, t   / 2
5. Compute the Fourier transform of a pulse signal defined as
 0, t   / 2
ANALYSE
1. Compare the features of C/A code and P-code.

2. Outline the unknowns to be solved in acquisition of GPS signal.
3. Contrast BOC and AltBOC modulation techniques.
4. Compare GPS and IRNSS features
5. Contrast ephemeris and almanac codes
155
16CS006 COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify and describe Soft Computing Techniques and their roles in building Intelligent Machines
2. Apply Supervised Learning Networks in Machine Learning Problems
3. Illustrate the working of Associative memory networks
4. Apply Unsupervised Learning Networks in Machine Learning Problems
5. Apply Fuzzy Logic and Reasoning to handle Uncertainty and Solve Engineering Problem
6. Apply Genetic Algorithms to solve Optimized Problems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO 5 PO 6
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 2 3 1
4 3 2 1
5 3 2 2
6 2 3 2
Unit I
Basic Elements of Soft Computing
Basic elements of Soft Computing: Difference between Hard Computing & Soft Computing - Introduction to
Neural Networks - Fuzzy Logic - Genetic Algorithms - Hybrid Systems. Artificial Neural Networks:
Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks - Evolution of Neural Networks - Basic Models of Neural Networks
- McCulloch-Pitts Neuron - Hebb Network.
Basics of Artificial Intelligence and Computational Intelligence.
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Supervised Learning Network
Supervised Learning Network: Artificial Neural Networks: Introduction - Perceptron Networks - Back
Propagation Network. Radial Basis Function Network.
Associative Memory Networks: Auto-associative Memory Network - Hetero auto-associative Memory
Network - Bidirectional Associative Memory (BAM) - Hopfield Networks.
Functional Link Neural Network.
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Unsupervised Learning Network
Introduction - Fixed Weight Competitive Nets -Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps - Learning Vector
Quantization - Counter Propagation Networks - Adaptive Resonance Theory Networks (ART-1 & ART-2).
Support Vector Machines and their applications for Classification.
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithm
Introduction to Fuzzy Sets: Difference between Classical Sets & Fuzzy Sets – Properties.
Classical Relations and Fuzzy Relations: Cartesian product of Relations - Classical Relations - Fuzzy Relations
Membership Functions: Features of Membership Functions -Fuzzification - and Defuzzification
156
Genetic Algorithm: Basic Concepts – Operators.

Concepts on Fuzzy Controller and its applications -a Simple Application of Genetic Algorithm for function
Optimization.
11+4 Hours
Total: 44+16 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. S. N. Sivanandam, S N Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, 2 ndEditionWiley India, 2007
2. V. Kecman, Learning and soft computing, Pearson Education, India, 2006
3. Russell Eberhart and Yuhui Shi - Computational Intelligence: Concepts to Implementations (2007)
Reference(s)
1. G. J. Klir and Bo Yuan, Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic, Prentice Hall, USA, 1995
2. N. J. Nelsson, Artificial Intelligence, A New Synthesis, Harcourt Asia Ltd., 1998
3. D. E. Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms: Search, Optimization and Machine Learning, Addison Wesley, N.Y –
1989
4. S. Haykins, Neural networks: a comprehensive foundation Pearson Education, India, 2002
5. A. P. Engelbrecht, Computational Intelligence: An Introduction, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
6. X. Yu and M. Gen, Introduction to Evolutionary Algorithms, Springer Verlag, 2010.
7. Fakhreddine Karray and Clarence de Silva - Soft Computing and Intelligent Systems Design, 2004.
8. Andries Engelbrecht - Computational Intelligence: an Introduction, 2007.
9. Amit Konar - Computational Intelligence: Principles, Techniques, and Applications, 2005.
10. Vojislav Kecman - Learning and Soft Computing: Support Vector Machines, Neural Networks, and Fuzzy
Logic Models, 2001.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 15 --
Understand 35 15 --
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 20 30 40
Evaluate -- 20 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Chromosome
2. List two methods in which the information flows in a nervous system
3. List five unsupervised learning algorithms
4. List the difference between classical logic and fuzzy logic
5. List the computational units of ART
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the components of Soft Computing
2. Explain the role of activation function in exhibiting the output from a neuron
3. Construct the 5 node pattern {0,1,1,0,1} by Hopfield network and explain the procedure for recalling and
storing
4. Explain Adaptive Resonance Theory and its type
5. Explain CPN and illustrate the steps involved in training algorithm of full CPN
5
157
APPLY
1. Construct a ANN circuit which makes the flow of data using multilayered and multilevel networks
2. Apply clusters of various datasets maintained by learning approach considering live example
3. Draw the neat architecture of hamming network and trace the inhibitatory and excitatory neurons by
considering an inconsistent vector
4. Find the Max-min and Max Product composition of the fuzzy relation matrices R={0.6,0.3,0.2,0.9}(2x2)
S={1,0.5,0.3,0.8,0.4,0.7}(2x3)
5. Find the cardinality for the matrices R={1,4,6,7}(2x2) S={5,2,3,7}(2x2)
ANALYZE
1. Differentiate between learning and training algorithms considering multilayer perceptron network and trace
the different types of networks obtained.
2. Differentiate between Counter Propagation Network and Adaptive Resonance Theory
EVALUATE
1. Evaluate using Back Propagation algorithm for the below map considering weights , inputs and outputs
2. Evaluate the instance, that the 2 dimensional input vector X is presented to the three-neuron
ohonennetwork, x=[ 0.52 0.12]. The initial weight vectors, W j are given by
W1=[0.27 , 0.81]
W2=[0.42 , 0.70]
W3=[0.43 , 0.21]
in a form of 2 X 1 matrix. Find the winning neuron using the Euclidean distance and apply kernel self-
organization map.State the differences between register machines and stack machine?
158
16CS007 IoT FOR ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Understand the basic concepts of IoT
2. Summarize the structural knowledge of IoT
3. Explain M2M in the context of Internet of Things.
4. Describe the IoT Reference Architecture
5. Design the Internet of things systems for the given problem
6. Apply IoT for various engineering applications
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO5
1 3 3
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 3 3
5 3 3
6 3 3
UNIT I
Introduction and Fundamental IoT Mechanisms
Internet of Things: History of IoT, About IoT, Overview and Motivations, Examples of Applications, Internet of
Things Definitions and Frameworks : IoT Definitions, IoT Architecture, Identification of IoT Objects and Services,
Structural Aspects of the IoT, Environment Characteristics, Traffic Characteristics, Scalability, Interoperability,
Security and Privacy.
IOT paradigm-smart objects-Bits an atoms-goal orientation-RTLS+ GPS-agents+ Multi agent system
12+3 Hours
UNIT II
M2M to IoT
A Market Perspective– Introduction, Some Definitions, M2M Value Chains, IoT Value Chains, An emerging
industrial structure for IoT, The international driven global value chain and global information monopolies. M2M to
IoT-An Architectural Overview– Building an architecture, Main design principles and needed capabilities, An IoT
architecture outline, standards considerations.
Introduction to Atmega 8 /16 microcontroller- Architecture of the AVR Microcontroller-Pin description of the
microcontroller-I/O of the microcontroller-IR Sensors
11+4 Hours
Unit III
IoT Reference Architecture
Introduction, Functional View, Information View, Deployment and Operational View, Other Relevant architectural
views. Real-World Design Constraints- Introduction, Technical Design constraints-hardware is popular again,
Interaction and remote control. Industrial realizing the enterprise integrated Web of Things, IMC-AESOP: from the
Web of Things to the Cloud of Things, Commercial Building Automation- Introduction, Case study: phase one-
commercial building automation today, Case study.
Specification-Domain Model Specification-Information Model Specification-Service Specifications-IoT Level
Specification-Functional View 11+4 Hours
159
Unit VI
IoT for Business Applications
Internet of Things Application : IoT for Smart Grid ,City Automation, Automotive Applications, Home Automation,
Smart Cards , Process Monitoring / Automation, Sensor Technology, Raspberry- pi Interface, Smart Healthcare,
Smart Transportation, M2M Communication, Smart Metering, Systems and Services Integration, Hands-on
training, Smart Waste Management System.
Sharing Sensor Data on Social Networks-Twitter-Facebook Connection App-Updation of Sensor Data on Website /
Blog
11+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Jan Holler, Vlasios Tsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stefan Avesand, Stamatis Karnouskos, David
Boyle, From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things: Introduction to a New Age of
Intelligence, 1st Edition, Academic Press, 2014.
2. Daniel Minoli, Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving World of M2M
Communications, ISBN: 978-1-118-47347-4, Willy Publications, 2014
3. Bernd Scholz-Reiter, Florian Michahelles, Architecting the Internet of Things, ISBN 978-3- 642-19156-5
e-ISBN 978-3-642-19157-2, Springer, 2016
Reference Book (s)-

1. Parikshit N. Mahalle & Poonam N. Railkar, Identity Management for Internet of Things, River Publishers,
ISBN: 978-87-93102-90-3 (Hard Copy), 978-87-93102-91-0 (ebook), 2015
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 40 40 --
Understand 50 40 20
Apply 10 10 40
Analyze -- 10 30
Evaluate -- -- 10
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Write the major significance of Internet of Things.
2. State the crucial requirement f IoT in terms of application and its supporting natures.
3. List the dominant technologies behind IoT development.
4. Identify two major differences between Internet of Everything and Industrial IoT.
5. Write about the data-center based cloud tools that use to run the machine learning algorithm internally.
6. Recognizes an alternative approach that results in better adaptivity in case of network fluctuations and
increased latency.
7. Identify the on-demand processing and storage capabilities that is used to analyze the data generated by IoT
objects in batch or stream format.
6
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course.
160
UNDERSTAND
1. Identify the evolutionary terms of Internet of Things (IoT) that use to interact and live with the physical
objects.
2. Illustrate the reference architecture of IoT that unifies the smart objects and human beings to provide the
ubiquitous communication
3. Illustrate the service-oriented architecture of IoT that ensures the interoperability among the heterogeneous
devices
4. Illustrate the API-Oriented Architecture of IoT that use SOAP and Remote Method Invocation (RMI) as a
means for describing, discovering, and calling services
5. Discuss the resource capacity, selecting and provisioning the resources that greatly impact Quality of
Service (QoS) of the IoT applications
6. Classify the taxonomy of resource management activities of IoT.
7. Report the standard requirement of real time analytics to fulfill the demand of real-time stream processing
engine.
APPLY
1. Interpret a study analysis on open-source prototyping platform for the industrial IoT.
2. Implement a suitable OPENIoT Architecture for IoT/Cloud Convergence that provides an abstract
presentation of the functional elements of architecture.
3. Sketch W3C SSN-XG ontology and how to semantically enable real time sensor feeds
4. Execute the two-tier data dissemination model for large-scale wireless sensor network
5. Demonstrate SPARQL query caching in order to improve the performance of semantic web applications
6. Illustrations a technique to cluster semantically similar QA pairs for retrieving an answer for a newly given
query without asking the QA engine on the cloud side
ANALYZE
1. Comparative analysis on real-time analytics in Cloud-IoT and fog computing.
2. Compare the communication efficiencies for the following protocols such as AMPQ, CoAP, DDS, MQTT,
UPnP and XMPP in terms of Transport Layer Protocols.
3. Differentiate the major significances of nesC, keil C and Dynamic C.
4. Relate a set of minimal features to be fulfilled by the programming frameworks for IoT.
5. Comparative analysis on IoT programming approaches
EVALUATE
1. Select an example that utilizes the device-collaboration framework for the proactive suggestion application
2. Appraise a semantic QA cache that implement the device/cloud collaboration framework to compute the
probability of the on-device semantic QA cache to answer a given query correctly.
3. Select a suitable example that use automatically tagging recognized images to display the additional
information such as social sentiment in order to achieve similar performance improvement for speech-
recognition application with DL through device/cloud collaboration framework
4. Critique on fog-computing assisted distributed analytics system that uses a set of fall-detection algorithms,
including algorithms based on acceleration measurements and time-series analysis methods, as well as
filtering techniques to facilitate the fall-detection process.
161
16CH007 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY AND HAZARD MANAGEMENT

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the safety and ethical issues that may arise from industrial processes
2. Explain industrial hygiene practices and its procedures
3. Illustrate the toxic pathways and elimination of toxicity on bio organisms
4. Understand hazards arising from runaway reactions, explosions and fires, and how to deal with them.
5. Choose a suitable method for prevention of fires and explosions
6. Evaluate the process and able to do Hazards Identification and risks Risk Assessment
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 2 1 3 3
2 1 2 1 3 3
3 3 2 3 1 1
4 3 1
5 3 3 3 2
6 3 3 3 3 2
7.
Unit I
Introduction to Safety & Industrial Hygiene
Safety programs, Engineering ethics, Accident and Loss Statistics, Acceptable Risk, Public Perceptions, The nature
of the Accident Process, Inherent Safety, Government of India and OSHA regulations, Industrial Hygiene,
Identification, Evaluation & Control
Lethal dosage–Material Safety Data Sheets
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Toxicology, Fires and Explosions
how toxicants enter biological organisms, how toxicants are eliminated from biological organisms, effects of
toxicants on biological organisms The fire triangle, Distinction between fire and explosions, Definitions,
Flammability characteristics of liquids and vapors, MOC and inerting, ignition energy, Auto ignition, Auto
oxidation, Adiabatic compression, Explosions
Firefighting equipment–Personal protecting equipment–Building fire safety codes
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Designs to Prevent Fires and Explosions
Inerting, static electricity, controlling static electricity, explosion proof equipment and instruments, ventilation,
sprinkler systems, miscellaneous designs for preventing fires and explosions
Work permit–Earthling–Color codes for identification of process
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Hazards Identification and Risk Assessment
Process hazards checklists, hazards surveys, hazards and operability studies, safety reviews, other methods. Review
of probability theory, event trees, fault trees, QRA and LOPA
Health and safety foundation–5S Practice–Emergency procedures
12+4 Hours
162
Total: 45+15 Hours

Text book (s)
1. D. A. Crowl, J. F. Louvar, Chemical Process Safety: Fundamentals with Applications, 3 rd Ed., Prentice
Hall, 2011
2. Reese, Charles D. Industrial Safety and Health for People-oriented Services. CRC Press, 2008
Reference (s)
1. H.H.Fawcett and W.S.Wood, Safety and Accident Prevention in Chemical Operations, John Wiley and
sons, 2nd Ed., New York, 1982
2. Hammer, Willie, and Dennis Price. Occupational safety management and engineering. Pearson College
Division, 2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test7(%)
Remember 20 20 --
Understand 30 20 --
Apply 30 20 35
Analyze 20 30 35
Evaluate -- 20 30
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define terms hazard and accidents
2. List three-step of accidents process?
3. Define terms LD and ED
4. List any four reversible effects that caused by toxic exposure
5. Define terms risk, loss prevention
UNDERSTAND
1. Identify the initiation, propagation, and termination steps for motor accident
2. Explain about how toxicants enter biological organisms
3. Explain the key responsibilities’ of professional engineers
4. Explain the inherent safety techniques that are used in the chemical industry
5. Explain how toxicants are eliminated from biological organisms
6. List the ingredients of safety program for outstanding safety program
APPLY
1. An employee works in a plant with a FAR of 4. If this employee works a 4-hr shift, 200 days per year, what
are the expected deaths per person per year?
2. Air contains 5 ppm of diethylamide (TLV-TWA of 5 ppm), 20 ppm of cyclohexanol (TLV-TWA of 50
ppm), and 10 ppm of propylene oxide (TLV-TWA of 2 ppm). What is the mixture TLV-TWA and has this
level been exceeded?
3. The following accident report has been filed. Failure of a threaded 1½″ drain connection on a rich oil line at
the base of an absorber tower in a large (1.35 MCF/D) gas producing plant allowed the release of rich oil
and gas at 850 psi and –40°F. The resulting vapor cloud probably ignited from the ignition system of
engine driven re compressors. The 75′ high × 10′ diameter absorber tower eventually collapsed across the
pipe rack and on two exchanger trains. Breaking pipelines added more fuel to the fire. Severe flame
7
163
impingement on an 11,000-horsepower gas turbine–driven compressor, waste heat recovery, and super-
heater train resulted in its near total destruction. Identify the initiation, propagation, and termination steps
for this accident
4. A process has a reported FAR of 2. If an employee works a standard 8-hr shift 300 days per year, compute
the deaths per person per year
ANALYZE
1. Can gate valves be placed between a vessel relief and its vessel
2. Liquid levels in storage tanks are frequently determined by measuring the pressure at the bottom of the
tank. In one such tank the material stored in the tank was changed and an overflow resulted. Why?
EVALUATE
1. How to convert your kitchen in to XP area
2. Does LOPA really replace 90% of the QRA?
164
16IT005 FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the main concepts, key technologies, strengths, and limitations of cloud computing and the
possible applications for state-of-the-art cloud computing
2. Illustrate various problems and evaluate related cloud computing solutions.
3. Apply the architecture and infrastructure of cloud computing, including SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, public cloud,
private cloud and hybrid cloud to different problems.
4. Analyze cloud provider for a defined environment and to a specific platform in a cost effective way.
5. Analyze case studies to derive the best practice model to apply when developing and deploying cloud based
applications
6. Build a virtual machine with a machine image
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO5 PO6
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 3 2 1
4 2 2 2
5 3 2 1
6 2 2 1
Unit I
Understanding Cloud Computing
Cloud computing: Introduction, Cloud application architectures, Value of cloud computing, Cloud Infrastructure
models, Cloud Services, History of Cloud Computing, Advantages of Cloud Computing, Disadvantages of Cloud
Computing, Companies in the Cloud Today, Amazon Web Services, Windows Azure, Google services, IBM Cloud
Before the move into the cloud- Know Your Software Licenses, The Shift to a Cloud Cost Model, Service Levels for
Cloud Applications Ready for the cloud: Web Application Design, Machine Image Design, Privacy Design, Design,
Database Management.
Tata Cloud- Salesforce.com
13+3 Hours
Unit II
Virtual Machines and Virtualization of Clusters and Data Centers
Implementation Levels of Virtualization, Virtualization Structures/Tools and Mechanisms, Virtualization of CPU,
Memory, and I/O Devices, Virtual Clusters and Resource Management, Virtualization for Data-Center Automation
Case Studies: Cloud centers in detail, Comparing approaches, Xen, Eucalyptus, Cloud Stack, and Open Stack
VMware- KVM.
10+5 Hours
Unit III
Scaling of Cloud Infrastructure & Security
Capacity, Planning, Cloud Scale.Cloud Security-Data Security, Network Security, Host Security, Compromise
Response
Disaster Recovery-Disaster Recovery Planning, Disasters in cloud, Cloud Disaster Management.
Requirements for modern data centers- high availability and Service Orientated Infrastructures (SOI)- Modern data
centre use case studies.
10+3 Hours
165
Unit IV
Cloud Computing Software Security Fundamentals
Cloud information Security Objectives, Cloud Security Services, Relevant Cloud Security Design Principles, Secure
Cloud Software Requirements, Approaches to Cloud Software Requirements Engineering, Cloud Security Policy
Implementation. Cloud Computing Risk Issues: The CIA Triad, Privacy and Compliance Risks, Threats to
Infrastructure Data and Access Control, Cloud Access Control Issues, Cloud Service Provider Risks.
Security concepts-Confidentiality-privacy-integrity-authentication-non-repudiation-availabilit- access control-
defence in depth- least privilege
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. George Reese, Cloud Application Architectures, 1st Edition O’Reilly Media, 2009
2. Ronald L.Krutz and Russell Dean Vines, Cloud Security, 1 st Edition, Wiley Publishing, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Michael Miller, Cloud Computing-Web Based Applications that change the way you work and collaborate
online, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, Publishing, 2011
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox and Jack J. Dongarra, Distributed & Cloud Computing from Parallel
Processing to the Internet of Things, 1st Edition, MK Publishing, 2010
3. David S Linthicum, Cloud Computing and SOA Convergence in Your Enterprise: A Step-by-Step Guide,
1st Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2009
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 40 45 --
Understand 40 45 --
Apply 20 10 80
Analyze -- -- 20
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Cloud Computing
2. List types of virtualization
3. Define proactive scaling
4. What is CIA Triad?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain different cloud Infrastructure models
2. Explain different levels of virtualization
3. Explain about cloud Network security in detail?
4. Explain about Recovery Point Objective.
8
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills Pertaining to this course
166
APPLY
1. Explain any IaaS service provided by Amazon
2. What is cloud Stack?
3. How disaster recovery planning can be done
4. How Web Application Design is used in designing cloud applications
ANALYZE
1. Compare cloud center and service infrastructure.
2. Analyze different cloud services provided by Amazon
3. With neat diagram explain the functioning of Xen Architecture.
4. List and explain various cloud service providers risks.
167
16PE007 SMART GRID TECHNOLOGY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Compare the basic difference between existing grid and smart grid
2. Explain perfect power system network (Including distributed and fully integrated systems)
3. Explain the importance of renewable energy systems and distributed energy resources in smart grids
4. Summarize the wide area monitoring system and advanced measuring technologies
5. Recall the technologies like Zigbee, HAN and NAN in smart grids
6. Explain SCADA technology in modern power systems and to analyze the micro grid systems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO5

1 2 2
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 3
UNIT I
Introduction to the Smart Grids
Introduction to smart grid, Electricity network, Local energy networks, General considerations for a smart grid,
characteristics of smart grids, elements in smart grids.
Electric transportation, Low carbon central generation, Attributes of the smart grid, Alternate views of a smart grid.
Smart grid to evolve a perfect power system: Introduction, Overview of the perfect power system configurations,
Device level power system, Building integrated power systems, Distributed power systems, Fully integrated power
system, Nodes of innovation
Present status of smart grids in India
14+4 Hours
UNIT II
Smart Electric Grid & Measurement Technologies
Smart electric grid: generation, Distributed energy resources: Renewable energy, energy storage, solar energy, wind
energy, biomass, hydro power, geothermal and fuel cell, effect of electric vehicles(EV’s) , transmission, distribution,
and end-user; Basic concepts of power, load models, load flow analysis
Measurement Technologies: Wide area monitoring system (WAMS), advanced metering infrastructure (AMI),
phasor measurement units.
Functioning of PMU
12+3 Hours
UNIT III
Communication & Networking Technology
Architectures, standards and adaptation of power line communication (PLC), zigbee, GSM, GPS, GIS, machine to-
machine communication models for the smart grid; Home area networks (HAN) and neighborhood area networks
(NAN)
Machine to human communication system
11+3 Hours
UNIT IV
Energy Management in Smart grids
Aspects of energy management in the smart grid, SCADA, micro grids, demonstration projects, case studies. Policy
and economic drives of the smart grid, environmental implications, sustainability issues of smart grid systems
Environmental issues related to smart grid systems 10+3 Hours
168
Total: 45+15 Hours

Text Book(s)
1. Clark W Gellings, “The Smart Grid, Enabling Energy Efficiency and Demand Side Response”- CRC Press,
2012
2. Janaka Ekanayake, Kithsiri Liyanage,Jianzhong.Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama, Nick Jenkins, “Smart Grid:
Technology and Applications”- Wiley, 2012
Reference(s)
1. A. Keyhani, Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems, Wiley 2011
2. James Momoh, Smart Grid :Fundamentals of Design and Analysis, Wiley, IEEE Press, 2012
SAMPLE QUESTION (s)

Remember 10 10 ---
Understand 50 50 --
Apply 40 40 55
Analyze -- -- 45
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define smart grid system
2. Write about self healing capability
3. List out four basic characteristics of smart grid system
4. Write about resiliency to disturbances
5. Write down the basic elements of smart grid system
6. Write about smart meters
7. Write down the generation options which are possible in smart grid system
8. Write about the functions of smart grids
9. Write down the attributes of smart grid system
10. Write about smart home energy management system
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the advanced power system network
2. Draw the block diagram of smart grid system
3. Explain the self healing property of smart grid system
4. Explain about self healing capability technology in smart grid systems
5. Explain the self healing property of smart grid system
6. Explain about the smart homes
7. Explain the energy storage system in smart grids
8. Explain about outage management system
9
Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
169
APPLY
1. Construction of modern power system network with the help of basic characteristics
2. Choose the best renewable energy source based on the environmental conditions
3. Execute the smart home with the smart grid elements
4. Develop a smart hybrid electric vehicle with efficient battery system
5. Compute micro grid system with dc loads
6. Find the net power injected in the bus i for a two bus system
ANALYZE
1. Differentiate between traditional and modern grid

2. Identify the reasons for failure of existing grid
3. Justify the need of AMI in smart grids
4. Compare the operation of micro grid and smart grid systems
5. Identify WAMS in smart grids
170
16MA001 COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the knowledge of finding roots of nonlinear equations and different errors in series approximations
2. Understand the consistency and inconsistency of linear system of equations
3. Evaluate the solution of Initial and Boundary value problems
4. Perform numerical differentiation and integration
5. Analyze the solution of PDEs under given conditions
6. Apply Knowledge of numerical techniques to Engineering problems
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2

1 3 2
2 3 2
3 2 3
4 2 2
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Errors in numerical calculations and Solutions of algebraic and transcendental equations
Absolute, relative and percentage errors, a general error formula, errors in a series approximation, Locating Roots of
Equations with one variable : Secant method, Muller’s method, Solution of nonlinear equations - Introduction,
Iteration method, Newton-Raphson method
Develop MATLAB code for Bisection method, Newton-Raphson method and for the above methods
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Solution of Linear Systems and Interpolation
Direct methods, LU Decomposition, Iterative methods, Jacobi method, Gauss-Seidel method, Interpolating
polynomials using finite differences, Bessel interpolation, Piecewise and spline interpolation, Piecewise Linear
interpolation, Quadratic spline interpolation
Develop MATLAB code for the above methods
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Numerical Integration and BVP(ODE)
Newton-Cotes methods (Weddle’s rule) , Solution of BVP - Finite difference method, shooting method, the cubic
spline method
Develop MATLAB code for Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 & 3/8 rules and for the above methods
11+4 Hours
171
Unit IV
Numerical solutions of PDEs
Introduction, Finite difference approximations to derivatives, Solutions of Laplace & Poisson equations using
Jacobi’s, Gauss-Seidel & SOR methods. Solution of parabolic equation using Bender-Schmidt & Crank-Nicolson
methods. Solution of hyperbolic equation
Develop MATLAB code for the above methods
11 + 4 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. M. K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar, R.K. Jain, Numerical methods for Scientific and Engineering Computation, 4 th
edition, New Age International publishers, New Delhi
2. S. S. Sastry, Introductory methods of numerical analysis, 4 th Edition, PHI
3. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42nd edition, Khanna publishers, New Delhi
Reference(s)
1. S. C. Chapra & R. P. Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill(2012)
2. Cleve Moler, Numerical Computing with MATLAB, SIAM.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Assessment Pattern
Remember 30 30 -
Understand 45 40 -
Apply 20 25 40
Analyze 5 5 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out different Errors in Numerical calculations

2. List the three numerical methods to solve Algebraic and Transcendental equations
3. Define initial and boundary value problem for Ordinary differential equations
4. List the numerical methods in solving Laplace’s, partial differential equations i.e. Parabolic and hyperbolic
UNDERSTAND
1. Summarize the Absolute, relative and percentage Errors

2. Illustrate the procedure for Newton-Raphson method for finding root of an algebraic equation
3. Explain the mechanism involved in LU decomposition method in solving linear systems
4. Explain spline interpolation formula
APPLY
𝜋
1. Given𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑥, construct the Taylor series approximations of orders 0 to 7 at 𝑥 = and state their
3
absolute errors.
2. Apply Newton-Raphson method to find a root of the equation 𝑥 3 − 2𝑥 − 5 = 0.
10
Comprehensive test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
172
3. Given the set of data points (1,-8), (2,-1) and (3, 18) satisfying the function𝑦 = 𝑓(𝑥), find the linear splines
satisfying the given data. Determine the approximate values of y(2.5) and 𝑦̇ (2)
4. Apply Gauss-Seidel’s method to solve Laplace equation for the region given in the figure
ANALYZE
1. Compare the roots obtained from Secant method, Muller’s methods and explain which method is preferable
2. Analyze the physical significance of spline’s interpolation formula
3. Differentiate shooting and cubic splines methods for numerical integration.
4. Analyze the platform for the application of Laplace Equation
173
16CY001 NANO SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply various chemical and physical methods for the synthesis of nanomaterials
2. Understand the properties of nano-materials and their applications in relation to bulk materials
3. Describe the nano size effect on optical, electrical, magnetic and thermal properties
4. Characterize nano materials by powder XRD and microscopy techniques.
5. Understand structure, properties and applications of Fullerenes and Carbon nanotubes.
6. Review the applications of nanomaterials, specially semiconducting metal oxides for sensing and catalysis
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO12
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction to Nanomaterials
Introduction to nanomaterials and nanotechnology, Nano-sizes and their unique properties: comparison with the
bulk materials, Different shapes sizes and morphology of nanomaterials; Defects in nanocrystalline materials, Effect
of grain size on physical properties – magnetic, electrical, optical and thermal properties.
11 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Fabrication of Nanomaterials
Top Down Approaches: Grinding, Planetory milling and comparison of particles; Bottom Up Approach: Wet
Chemical Synthesis - Microemulsion Approach, Colloidal Nanoparticles Production, Sol Gel Methods,
Sonochemical Approach, Microwave and Atomization; Gas phase Production Methods - Chemical Vapour
Depositions; Carbon Nano structures: carbon molecules, carbon clusters, carbon nano tubes- synthesis, formation.
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Characterization of Nanomaterials
Fractionation principles of particle size measurements, Particle size and its distribution, powder X-ray Diffraction,
Zeta potential, Electronic band structure Electron statistics Application: Optical transitions in solids, photonic
crystals, Microscopies: Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission Electron Microscopy, Atomic Forced
Microscopy, Scanning and Tunneling Microscopy.
11 + 4 Hours
174
Unit IV
Applications of Nanomaterials
Self-assembly and molecular manufacturing, Surfactant based system Colloidal system applications, Functional
materials Applications: Single walled and multi walled CNTs, quantum dots, GaN wires, TiO 2 and ZnO nano
crystalline materials, Nanosensors based on optical properties.
11 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. B. S. Murthy, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B.B. Rath, Ames Murday, Text book of Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology, published by Springer & Universities Press (India) Pvt. Ltd.
2. Sulabha K. Kulkarni, Nanotechnology: Principles & Practices, Springer
3. Nils O. Petersen, Foundations for Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, CRC Press, 2017.
Reference(s)
1. Stuart M. Lindsay, Introduction to Nanoscience, Oxford University Press, 2009.
2. Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John Wiley & Sons,
2005.
3. Gabor L. Hornyak , H.F. Tibbals , Joydeep Dutta , John J. Moore Introduction to Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology CRC Press
4. Davies, J.H. ‘The Physics of Low Dimensional Semiconductors: An Introduction’, Cambridge University
Press, 1998
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 80
Analyze - - 20
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define a nanomaterial. List any four naturally occurring/synthetically prepared nanomaterils used in daily
life.
2. Differentiate between nano materials & bulk materials in terms of physical properties.
3. List two methods of preparing nanomaterials in bottom up approach & top down approach.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the sol-gel method of preparing nano materials. What kind of materials can be prepared by this
method in nano form.
2. How will the electrical, magnetic & optical properties vary for nano amterials compared to bulk. Explain
with an example for each.
3. What are the various carbon nano materials available? Describe one methos of producing Carbon nano
tubes.
11
175
APPLY
1. How is SEM used for characterization of nano materials? Describe the principle and working of instrument.
2. Based on the optical properties of Nano TiO2 and ZnO, describe the design & construction of nano sensors.
3. Describe the functions and applications of Carbon nano tubes and gaN nano wires.
ANALYZE
1. How is the size of nanomaterials characterized? Assess the advantage of using SEM & TEM instead of
powder XRD for size of particle, grain size characterization.
2. For a semiconductor, as the materials is sized down to nano, the electronic band structure is found to vary
from bulk material. Explain the changes in electronic band structure for a direct band gap material.
3. Calculate the changes in surface to volume ratio (S/V ratio) for a particle of 1 micrometer cube divided into
10 nanometer cubes by top down approaches. Comment on its impact in catalysis
176
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016| Courses under Elective IV. Approved in 11 th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16EC005 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret fundamental concepts of digital image processing
2. Infer image transforms
3. Exemplify image enhancement and color image processing
4. Assess image restoration techniques
5. Summarize line, point, threshold and region based segmentation for digital images
6. Attribute various compression models and compression techniques for digital images
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO 14
1 2 1 2
2 2 1 3
3 2 1 2
4 3 2 1 3
5 2 1 1 2
6 3 2 1 2
Unit I
Digital Image Fundamentals
Fundamental steps in Digital image processing, Components of an Image processing system, Elements of visual
perception, Image sampling and quantization, basic relationships between pixels, An introduction to mathematical
tools in digital image processing.
Image transforms: 2D DFT and its properties, Discrete cosine transform, Discrete Wavelet Transform.
Walsh Transform, Hadamard Transform
13+4 Hours
Unit II
Image Enhancement and Color Image Processing
Enhancement in spatial domain: Intensity transformations, Histogram Processing, smoothing and sharpening, Image
Enhancement in Frequency Domain: Smoothing and Sharpening Filters
Color fundamentals, Color models, Pseudo color Image Processing, Full Color Image Processing, color
transformations.
Color Image Enhancement in spatial and frequency domain
13+4 Hours
Unit III
Image Restoration
Image Degradation/Restoration model, Noise models, Restoration using spatial filtering, Periodic noise reduction by
frequency domain filtering, Linear Position-Invariant Degradations, Inverse filtering, Minimum Mean Square Error
Filtering, Constrained Least squares filtering.
Estimating the degradation function, Geometric Mean filter
9+3 Hours
Unit IV
Image Segmentation and Compression
Image segmentation: Fundamentals, point, Line and Edge detection, Thresholding, Region based Segmentation,
Image Compression: Fundamentals, Image Compression Models, Lossless Compression, Lossy Compression,
Transform coding and JPEG compression standard.
Watershed algorithm 10+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
177
Textbook (s)
1. Rafel C.Gonzalez and Richard E.Woods, Digital Image Processing, Pearson Education, 3rdEdition 2011
2. S.Sridhar, Digital Image Processing, Oxford publishers, 2nd Edition, 2016
Reference (s)
1. Anil K. Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Pearson Education, 1st Edition, 2015
2. S.Jayaraman, S.Esakirajan, T.Veerakaumar, Digital Image Processing, McGraw Hill publishers, 2011
4. M.Sonka,V. Hlavac, R. Boyle, Image Processing, Analysis and Machine Vision, Vikas Publishing House,
2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 20 --
Understand 30 25 --
Apply 25 30 40
Analyse 20 25 60
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List the 6 components of digital image processing system
2. Define image enhancement
3. Define image segmentation
4. State the lossy compression
5. List out the 3 color models
UNDERSTAND
1. Interpret the process of image sampling and quantization
2. Summarize the fundamental steps in digital image processing
3. Represent RGB color model
4. Explain the properties of 2D Discrete Fourier Transform
5. Illustrate contrast stretching transformation function to increase the dynamic range of the gray levels in the
image
APPLY
1. Consider the image segment shown below. Compute N4, N8 distances
3 1 2 1 (q)
2 2 0 2
1 2 1 1
(p) 1 0 1 2
2. Compute histogram equalization for a given 8x8 image
3. Compute the efficiency of Huffman Coding for the given symbols
Symbol a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6
Probability 0.1 0.4 0.06 0.1 0.04 0.3
178
4. Implement segmentation on given image using bimodal thresholding
5. Show that a linear, spatially –invariant degradation system with additive noise can be modeled in the spatial
domain as the convolution of the degradation function with an image followed by addition of noise
ANALYSE
1. Differentiate between image enhancement and restoration in terms of processing and applications
2. Compare lossy and lossless compression methods in terms of entropy, applications and transforms used
3. Is image enhancement a subjective approach? Justify your answer
4. Is lossless compression preferred to lossy compression? Justify your answer
5. Differentiate region based segmentation and thresholding based segmentation in terms of approach and
applications
179
16EC006 RADAR ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain RADAR parameters and applications
2. Explain the principle and operation of CW and MTI RADARs
3. Exemplify the applications of CW and MTI RADAR
4. Differentiate the tracking techniques for RADARs
5. Find the target in the presence of noise
6. Justify the performance of RADAR using matched filter
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO 14
1 3 1 1
2 3 1 1
3 3 2 1
4 3 2 2
5 3 2 2
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Introduction
Nature of Radar, Maximum Unambiguous Range, Radar Waveforms, Radar Block Diagram and Operation, Simple
form of Radar Equation, Radar Frequencies and Applications, Prediction of Range Performance, Minimum
Detectable Signal, Receiver Noise and SNR, Integration of Radar Pulses, Transmitter Power, Radar Cross Section of
simple Targets, PRF and Range Ambiguities.
Radar Cross Section of complex Targets
11+3 Hours
Unit II
CW and MTI Radars
CW and Frequency Modulated Radar: Doppler Effect, CW Radar-Block Diagram, Isolation between Transmitter
and Receiver, Non-zero IF Receiver, Applications of CW radar, FM-CW Radar, Range and Doppler Measurement,
Block Diagram and Characteristics for approaching and receding Targets, FM-CW altimeter, Multiple Frequency
CW Radar.
MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar: Introduction, Principle, MTI Radar with Power Amplifier Transmitter, Delay Line
Cancellers, Filter Characteristics, Blind Speeds, Double Cancellation, Staggered PRFs, Range Gated Doppler
Filters, MTI Radar Parameters, Limitations to MTI Performance, Non-coherent MTI, MTI versus Pulse Doppler
Radar.
MTI Radar with Power Oscillator Transmitter
13+4 Hours
Unit III
Tracking Radar
Sequential Lobing, Conical Scan, Amplitude Comparison monopulse radar using one coordinate system and Phase
Comparison methods, Target Reflection Characteristics and Angular Accuracy, Tracking in Range, Acquisition and
Scanning Patterns, Comparison of Trackers, Radomes, Frequency scan Arrays, Radar Display types, Branch type
and Balanced type duplexers, Circulators as Duplexers.
Amplitude Comparison using two coordinate system
13+4 Hours
180
Unit IV
Detection of Radar Signals in Noise
Matched Filter Receiver: Response Characteristics and Derivation, Correlation detection, Detection criteria,
Detector Characteristics, Automatic Detection, Constant False Alarm Rate Receiver.
Matched filter with non-white noise
8+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Merrill I. Skolnik Introduction to Radar Systems , McGraw-Hill, Second Edition, 1981
2. Merrill I. Skolnik Introduction to Radar Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill, Third Edition, 2001
Reference (s)
1. Gottapu Sasibhushana rao, Microwave & Radar Engineering, Pearson Education, 2013
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 25 --
Understand 50 40 --
Apply 20 25 70
Analyze --- 10 30
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define RADAR
2. List out the different types of RADARS
3. Define blind speed
4. Define a false alarm
5. State the purpose of duplexer
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the need for integration of radar pulses and how does this factor affect the radar range equation
2. Illustrate the importance of a CW radar with non-zero IF receiver with block diagram
3. Explain the recognition of moving targets on PPI display using MTI radar
4. Explain Multiple Frequency CW radar
5. Compare conical scan and amplitude comparison monopulse radar
APPLY
1. Find the Doppler frequency shift of a satellite orbiting the earth at an altitude of 5000 nmi, speed of 2.7
nmi/s if the operating frequency of radar is 450 MHz
2. Find the pulse repetition frequency and duty cycle of radar in order to achieve a maximum unambiguous
range of 60 nmi with a pulse width of 1.5 μs
181
3. Find the first blind speed (knots) of L-band radar (1250 MHz) when the PRF has a maximum unambiguous
range of 240 nmi
4. Compute the expression for the impulse response characteristics of a matched filter receiver that maximizes
the peak-signal-to-noise-power ratio
5. Demonstrate range and Doppler measurements of the target using triangular FMCW radar with neat
diagrams.
ANALYZE
1. Outline the range and Doppler measurements using FM-CW radar if the target is approaching the radar and
explain it for triangular frequency modulation with neat diagram
2. Differentiate MTI and pulse Doppler radar
3. It is necessary to maintain False-Alarm-Rate as constant. Justify the statement
4. Differentiate tracking radar and search radar
5. Outline the tracking procedure using amplitude-comparison monopulse radar (one angular coordinate) and
how it is different from that of either sequential lobing or conical scan technique
182
16EC007 SPEECH PROCESSING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the mechanism of human speech production and articulation
2. Identify the time domain speech signal parameters
3. Differentiate time and frequency domain methods of speech processing
4. Attribute linear predictive analysis for speech signals
5. Explain the solutions for LPC equations
6. Implement the different algorithms and models involved for speaker and speech recognition systems
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 2
2 2 2 2
3 3 2 2
4 3 2 2
5 2 1 2
6 3 2 2 2
Unit I
Mechanics of speech
Speech production: Mechanism of speech production, Acoustic phonetics, The Acoustic Theory of Speech
Production: Uniform lossless tube, Effects of losses in the vocal tract, Digital models for speech signals: Vocal tract,
Radiation, Excitation, Auditory perception: psycho acoustics.
Representations of speech waveform: Sampling of speech signals, Quantization
9+4 Hours
Unit II
Time and frequency domain methods for speech processing
Time domain parameters of Speech signal: Short-Time Energy, Average Magnitude, Average Zero crossing Rate,
Silence Discrimination using ZCR and energy, Short Time Auto Correlation Function, Pitch period estimation using
Auto Correlation Function.
Short Time Fourier analysis: Fourier transform and linear filtering interpretations, Sampling rates in time and
frequency, Pitch detection, Analysis by Synthesis, Analysis synthesis systems: Phase vocoder, Channel Vocoder.
Median Smoothing, Spectrographic displays
16+4Hours
Unit III
Linear predictive analysis of speech
Basic Principles of linear predictive analysis: Auto correlation method, Covariance method, Solution of LPC
equations: Cholesky method, Durbin’s Recursive algorithm, Application of LPC parameters: Pitch detection using
LPC parameters, Formant analysis using LPC parameters, VELP.
Relations Between the Various Speech Parameters, CELP.
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Application of speech processing
Voice response systems: Genersl considerations in the design of voice response systems, A multiple output digital
voice response system, Speaker recognition systems: Speaker verification system, Speaker identification system,
Speech recognition systems: Isolated digit recognition system, Continous digit recognition system.
183
Typical applications of computer voice response systems: Wiring communication equipment, Information retrieval
systems
9+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. L. R. Rabiner and R. W. Schaffer, Digital Processing of Speech signals, Prentice Hall, 2004
2. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan, Speech and Audio Signal Processing, John Wiley and Sons Inc., Singapore,
2004
Reference (s)
1. Quatieri, Discrete-time Speech Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, 2001
2. L.R. Rabiner and B. H. Juang, Fundamentals of speech recognition, Prentice Hall, 1999
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 35 20 --
Understand 45 20 --
Apply 10 30 50
Analyze 10 30 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define the terms: i) Linguistics ii) Formants iii) Phoneme

2. State voice response system
3. List the blocks involved in voice response system
4. Define phase vocoder
5. State VELP
6. List the time domain parameters of speech signal
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the mechanism of speech production

2. Identify the time domain parameters of speech signal
3. Represent speech signal in terms of time domain measurements
4. Explain speaker verification system with the help of a block diagram
5. Explain one mechanism of pitch period estimation
6. Illustrate the properties of the complex cepstrum
7. Explain the linear filter interpretation of Short-Time Fourier Transform (STFT)
8. Explain the basic principal of linear predictive analysis
184
APPLY
1. Show the sampling rates of 𝑋𝑛 (𝑒 𝑗𝑤 ) in time and frequency.

2. Demonstrate the different performance measurement parameters used for speaker recognition.
3. If L=100 samples/frame and Fs=10 kHz, compute i) the sampling rate of 𝑋𝑛 (𝑒 𝑗𝑤 ) ii) Bandwidth of the
window.
4. If the sampling frequency Fs = 20 kHz and the signal of duration L = 200 samples, find the bandwidth (B)
of the window and the rate at which the sequence 𝑋𝑛 (𝑒 𝑗𝑤 ) has been evaluated in time/sec or for a group of
samples.
5. If L is the window length is 200 samples/frame or segment and Fs = 10 kHz is the sampling rate of the
signal;
i) Calculate sampling rate of 𝑋𝑛 (𝑒 𝑗𝑤 ) in time-dimension.
ii) Number of samples out of which one sample is chosen.
ANALYSE
1. Compare voiced, unvoiced speech signals

2. Differentiate between VELP and CELP
3. Compare Delta modulation and differential PCM while representing the speech signal
4. Is zero-crossing rate method used to classify the speech signals into voiced, unvoiced signals. Justify
5. Outline the different features used for speaker recognition system and explain
185
16EC008 WAVELET THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret fundamental concepts of Fourier series and Fourier transform
2. Explain Multiresolution analysis
3. Implement continuous wavelet transform with various wavelets
4. Exemplify discrete wavelet transform with its properties
5. Interpret the choice of various wavelet coefficients
6. Demonstrate various applications of wavelet transform
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 2
2 2 1 2
3 3 2 2 3
4 3 2 3
5 2 1 2
6 2 1 2
Unit I
Multi Resolution Analysis
Fundamentals of orthogonality and orthonormality, Signal spaces, Hilbert spaces for energy signals, Fourier series
and Transform
Definition of Multi Resolution Analysis (MRA), Haar Basis, Construction of General Orthonormal MRA, Wavelet
Basis for MRA, Continuous Time MRA Interpretation for the DTWT, Discrete Time MRA, Basis Functions for the
DTWT
Concept of Convergence 12+4 Hours
Unit II
Continuous Wavelet Transforms
Wavelet Transform, Definition and Properties, Concept of Scale and its Relation with Frequency, Continuous
Wavelet Transform (CWT), Scaling Function and Wavelet Functions (Daubechies Coiflet, Mexican Hat, Sinc,
Gaussian, Bi Orthogonal), Tiling of Time
Scale Plane for CWT 10+4 Hours
Unit III
Discrete Wavelet Transforms
Filter Bank and Sub Band Coding Principles, Wavelet Filters, Inverse DWT Computation by Filter Banks, Basic
Properties of Filter Coefficients, Choice of Wavelet Function Coefficients, Derivations of Daubechies Wavelets,
Mallat's Algorithm for DWT, Multi Band Wavelet Transforms Lifting Scheme, Wavelet Transform Using
Polyphase Matrix Factorization, Geometrical Foundations of Lifting Scheme
Lifting Scheme in Z –Domain 12+4 Hours
Unit IV
186
Applications
Wavelet methods for signal processing, Image Compression Techniques: EZW, SPHIT Coding, Image Denoising
Techniques: Noise Estimation, Shrinkage Rules, Shrinkage Functions, Edge Detection and Object Isolation, Image
Fusion and Object Detection
Microcalcification and cluster detection 11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Rao R M and A S Bopardikar, ―Wavelet Transforms Introduction to theory and Applications, Pearson
Education, Asia, 2000.
2. L.Prasad & S.S.Iyengar, Wavelet Analysis with Applications to Image Processing, CRC Press, 1997.
Reference (s)
1. J. C. Goswami and A. K. Chan, “Fundamentals of wavelets: Theory, Algorithms and Applications"

Wiley Interscience Publication, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1999.
2. M. Vetterli, J. Kovacevic, “Wavelets and subband coding" Prentice Hall Inc, 1995.
3. Stephen G. Mallat, “A wavelet tour of signal processing" 2 nd Edition Academic Press, 2000.
4. Soman K P and Ramachandran K I, ―Insight into Wavelets From Theory to practice‖, Prentice Hall, 2004.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 30 --
Understand 45 30 --
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze -- 10 40
Evaluate -- - --
Create -- - --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Recall the concept of orthogonality and orthonormality principles
2. State the concept of scaling
3. Define wavelet filters
4. State the properties of filter coefficients
5. Recognize the geometrical foundation of lifting scheme
UNDERSTAND
1. Interpret Hilbert space for energy signals
2. Summarize the concept of Fourier transform and Fourier series
3. Classify wavelet transform
4. Compare various wavelets
5. Summarize the choice of wavelet functions of coeffcients
APPLY
1. Compute wavelet transform using polyphase matrix factorization
187
2. Implement Fourier transform of periodic signals

3. Demonstrate the concept of Haar basis
4. Implement various scaling functions for wavelet transform
5. Demonstrate the applications of wavelets in image compression.
ANALYZE
1. Differentiate various wavelets
2. Attribute the role of various wavelet function coefficients for discrete wavelet transform
3. Compare continuous and discrete wavelet transform
4. Resolve image compression using SPHIT coding
5. Justify the role of wavelet transform in image fusion
188
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016| Courses under Elective V. Approved in 11 th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16EC009 BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the waveform characteristics associated with various cardio-encephalogram abnormalities
2. Explain the origin, properties and suitable models of important biological signals such as ECG, EEG and
EMG
3. Implement the basic mathematical, scientific and computational skills necessary to analyze biomedical
signals
4. Execute the suitable algorithms for analysis of biomedical signals
5. Attribute the bio-signals by diagnosis and classification
6. Explain the different analysis techniques used to automatically process and analyse these images, including
different image representations
COs–POs Mapping
1 2 1 1
2 2 1 1
3 3 2 1 2
4 3 2 1 1
5 3 2 1 1
6 2 1 1
Unit-I
Introduction to biomedical signals
The nature of biomedical signals, action potential, objectives of biomedical signal analysis, Difficulties in
biomedical signal analysis, computer aided diagnosis, Basic electrocardiography, the brain and its potentials, the
electrophysiological origin of brain waves, EEG signals and its characteristics, EEG analysis
Electroneurogram, Electromyogram 11+3 Hours
Unit-II
Cardiological signal processing
Basic ECG, Electrical Activity of the heart, ECG data acquisition, ECG lead system, ECG parameters & their
estimation, Use of multiscale analysis for ECG parameters estimation, Noise & Artifacts, arrhythmia analysis
monitoring, long-term continuous ECG recording, direct ECG data compression techniques.
Cardiotocography, Methods of Monitoring Fetal Heart Rate 11+4 Hours
Unit-III
Neurological signal processing
Basic EEG, Linear prediction theory, the autoregressive method, recursive estimation of AR parameters, spectral
error measure, adaptive segmentation, Sleep EEG: data acquisition and classification of sleep stages, the markov
model and markov chains, dynamics of sleep-wake transitions.
EEG rhythms, waves, and transients 12+4 Hours
Unit-IV
Adaptive interference/noise cancellation
The wiener filtering problem, principle of an adaptive filter, the steepest-descent algorithm, the Hoff least mean
square adaptive algorithm, Adaptive noise canceller: cancellation of 60hz interference in ECG, cancelling donor-
heart interference in heart-transplant ECG, cancellation of high frequency noise in electro-surgery.
189
X-Ray imaging, Magnetic Resonance Imaging, CT scan

11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. D.C.Reddy, Biomedical Signal Processing: Principles and Technique’s Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.
2. E.N. Bruce, Biomedical Signal Processing and Signal Modelling, John Wiley and Sons, 2007.
3. Metin Akay, Biomedical Signal Processing, Academic Press, 2012.
Reference (s)
1. Sörnmo,Bioelectrical Signal Processing in Cardiac & Neurological Applications, Academic

Press,2005.
2. Rangayyan,Biomedical Signal Analysis,Wiley 2002.
3. I Enderle, Introduction to Biomedical Engineering, Elsevier, 2 nd Edition, 2005
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 35 30 --
Understand 35 35 --
Apply 30 35 60
Analyse -- -- 40
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Systole and diastole
2. Define BioElectrode
3. List out the requirements for Bio amplifier
4. List out the biomedical signals
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain about cardio vascular system
2. Explain how the Imaging Techniques is helpful in biomedical signal processing
3. Illustrate the classification of EEG rhythms based on the frequency bands
4. Compare the biomedical signal of ECG, EEG, and EMG
5. Explain the application of MRI with neat diagram
APPLY
1. Implement an algorithm to detect QRS complexes in an ongoing ECG signal
190
2. Construct an optimal filter to remove noise from a signal, given that the signal and noise processes are
independent, stationary, random processes
3. Design a 10-20 Electrode system
4. Show that a signal averaging improves the signal to noise ratio by a factor of square root of M
5. Design an adaptive filter using LMS algorithm
ANALYSE
1. Compare normal segmentation and adaptive segmentation
2. Outline the ECG signal characteristics
3. Differentiate MRI and CT scan
4. Organize the spectral estimation in biomedical signals
191
16EC010 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND COMPATIBILITY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify real-world EMI/EMC design constraints

2. Explain the EMI testing procedures
3. Classify the sources of Electromagnetic Interference
4. Illustrate Radiated and Conducted interference measurements
5. Differentiate various reduction techniques of electromagnetic interference
6. Implement electronic systems that function without errors or problems related to electromagnetic
compatibility
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO7
1 2 1 1
2 2 1 1
3 2 1 1
4 2 1 2
5 3 2 2
6 3 2 1
Unit I
Introduction
History and concept of EMI, Definitions of EMI/EMC, Electromagnetic environment, Practical experiences and
concerns, frequency spectrum conservation, mechanisms of EMI generation, EMI testing, Methods of elimination of
EMI.
Biological effects of EMI and their corrections
11+3 Hours
Unit II
Sources of EMI/EMC
Sources of Electromagnetic noise, typical noise paths, modes of noise coupling, designing for EM compatibility,
lightening discharge, electro static discharge (ESD), electromagnetic pulse (EMP). Electromagnetic emissions, noise
form relays and switches, non-linearity in circuits, passive inter modulation, transients in power supply lines, EMI
from power electronic equipment, EMI as combination of radiation and conduction.
OATS measurements, measurement precautions.
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Radiated and conducted interference measurements
Anechoic chamber, TEM cell, reverberating chamber, GTEM cell, comparison of test facilities. Characterization of
conduction currents and voltages, conducted EM noise and power line, conducted EMI from equipment, immunity
to conducted EMI, characteristics of EMI filters.
Power line filter design
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
EMI reduction techniques
Safety and signal grounds, low and high frequency grounding methods, grounding of amplifiers and cable shields,
isolation, neutralizing transformers, shield grounding at high frequencies, digital grounding, types of cables,
mechanism of EMI emission or coupling in cables. effectiveness of shielding, near and far field impedances,
methods of analysis, total loss due to absorption and reflection effects, composite absorption and reflection losses
for electric fields and magnetic fields, magnetic materials as a shield, shield discontinuities, slots and holes, seams
and joints, conductive gaskets Electrical Bonding, Shape and Material for Bond straps.
192
General Characteristics of good bonds.

12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Dr. V.P. Kodali, Engineering Electromagnetic Compatibility, IEEE Publication, Printed in India by S.
Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2000.
2. Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility, IMPACT series, IIT-Delhi, Modules 1-9.
References
1. C.R. Pal, Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility, Ny, John Wiley, 1992.
SAMPLE QUESTION(S)
Remember 35 25 --
Understand 45 45 --
Apply 20 30 50
Analyse -- -- 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define EMI and EMC
2. List some of the EMC applications
3. List EMI sources
4. Define TEM Cell
5. Define Ground coupled Interference
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the testing strategies in EMC
2. Represent the flow to prevent emission that causes the EMI in a system
3. Illustrate various types of radiation coupling in EMI
4. Illustrate proper industrial citations to explain the significance of EMI in a system design
5. Explain briefly about ESD test bed
APPLY
1. Predict how a conducted emission occurs in an EM environment
2. Show how celestial bodies act as a source of EMI
3. Assess the usage of gasket to suppress the EM leakage at joints
4. Find the filter usage in suppressing undesired conducted electromagnetic interference? Support your
answer with the help of lumped element low pass filter.
193
5. Select the coupling happens directly between the emitter and receptor.
ANALYSE
1. Attribute the need for electromagnetic compatibility.
2. Compare grounding, Shielding and isolation EMI reduction techniques
3. Justify, why a bike started or a mixie under running condition disturbs a TV receivers functioning
4. Differentiate low and high frequency grounding methods
194
16EC011 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarise embedded system life cycle and components involved in design
2. Explain the differences between embedded system with general purpose systems
3. Organize the embedded system design with respect to quality attribute for real time application
4. Implement an application on embedded system with the help of hardware and firmware
5. Resolve the issues related to implementation of real time applications
6. Differentiate various IDEs to implement embedded system for real time applications
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 - 2
2 2 1 - 2
3 3 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 3
5 3 3 2 3
6 3 3 2 3
Unit I
Introduction
Definition ,Embedded system versus general Computing Systems History of Embedded Systems, Classification of
Embedded Systems, Major application areas of Embedded Systems , Purpose of Embedded Systems, The typical
Embedded System, core of Embedded System ,Memory ,sensors and actuators. Communication Interface,
Embedded Firmware, other system components, PCB and Passive Components .
A case study on embedded systems is to make human life easier.
13 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Embedded systems-characteristics and quality attributes
Characteristics of Embedded Systems, Quality Attributes of Embedded Systems, Application Specific Embedded
Systems, Washing machine example, Domain Specific Example, Automotive Embedded Systems, Explaining the
characteristics with an example.
Study on Automatic Railway gate Design
10 + 3 Hours
Unit III
Embedded system hardware and firmware design
Introduction to Embedded hardware, Analog and Digital electronic components, I/O Types with Examples, Serial
and Parallel communication devices, Wireless devices, Timers and Counting Devices, Watchdog timer and Real
time clock. Embedded firmware design approaches and development languages, ISR concept, Interrupt sources,
Interrupt servicing mechanism, Multiple interrupts, DMA, Device driver programming, Concepts of C versus
Embedded C, Compiler versus Cross-compiler
Firmware design of digital clock in embedded C
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Hardware software co-design, implementation and testing
Fundamental Issues in Hardware and Software Co-Design, Computational models in Embedded Design, Hardware
software trade offs, Integration of Hardware and Firmware, ICE, Issues in Embedded system Design.
Implementation and Testing, CAD and hardware Translation tools. Pre-processors, Interpreters, Compilers and
195
Linkers. Debugging tools, Quality assurance and testing of the design. Testing on host machine, Simulators and
Laboratory tools
PCB layout design for a Traffic light controller
11 + 4Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Shibu .K.V, Introduction to Embedded Systems, 1st Ed, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 2009
2. Tammy Noergaard , Embedded systems Architecture, Elsevier publications, 2005
Reference (s)
1. Raj Kamal , Embedded Systems, TMS, Second Edition, 2008
2. Jean. J.Labrosse, Embedded System building blocks, CMP publishers, 2nd Edition, 1999
3. Frank Vahid, Tony D. Givargis, Embedded System Design-A Unified Hardware/Software Introduction,
Wiley Publications, 2002
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Comprehensive Test 3(%)
Remember 20 10 --
Understand 40 20 --
Apply 20 30 40
Analyze 20 40 60
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define embedded system.
2. Define Watchdog timer.
3. List any four Quality attributes for Embedded systems.
4. List any two IDE tools used for embedded system testing.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain about PCB and passive components used for embedded system design.
2. Explain Quality attributes in detail.
3. Illustrate the differences between C and Embedded C in firmware programming.
4. Explain about Various debugging tools used for embedded system applications.
APPLY
1. Execute a real time embedded system by using various hardware components
2. Find the differences between real time and non real time applications
3. Predict the proper translation tools for embedded firmware design in the implementation of real time
applications.
4. Execute a real time application testing with the help of Embedded system.
5. Implement a automated washing machine and estimate the transaction time
196
ANALYZE
1. Differentiate Automated embedded system and general computer systems.
2. Identify different ways of increasing the efficiency of embedded system by giving appropriate justification
3. Organize the Embedded system with OS and with outOS , Identify the differences.
4. Justify the transaction time should be minimum for Airbag controller in Automobiles.
5. Differentiate the debugging tools available for embedded systems design.
16EC012 RF CIRCUIT DESIGN
197
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate radio frequency components
2. Explain RF circuit characteristics using smith chart
3. Assess the performance of RF filters
4. Explain various active RF components
5. Implement the modeling of RF active components
6. Implement the RF transistor amplifier, oscillators and mixers
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 1 1
2 2 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 1
4 2 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 2 1
6 3 2 1 2 2
Unit I
Radio Frequency concepts
Importance of Radio frequency Design, Frequency Spectrum, RF Behavior of Passive Components, RF Chip
Components and circuit board considerations, Scattering Parameters, Reflection Coefficient, Load Impedance,
Impedance Transformation, Admittance Transformation, RF measurements and principles
Chain Scattering Matrix 11+4 Hours
Unit II
RF Filter design
Basic Resonator and Filter Configurations, Filter Types and Parameters, Special Filter Realizations, De
normalization of Standard Low-Pass Design, Filter Implementation, Microstrip Filter Design,
Coupled Filter 11+4 Hours
Unit III
Modeling of active RF components
Active RF Components: RF Diodes, Bipolar-Junction Transistor, RF Field Effect Transistors.
Modeling: Diode Models, Transistor Models, Measurement of Active Devices, Scattering Parameter Device
Characterization.
High Electron Mobility Transistors 11+4 Hours
Unit IV
RF Circuits design
Amplifier Power Relations, Stability Considerations, Constant Gain, Broad-Band, High Power, and Multi-Stage
Amplifiers
Oscillators and Mixers: Basic Oscillator Model, High Frequency Oscillator Configuration, Characteristics of Mixers
Sub-sampling mixers 12+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
198
1. R. Ludwigand P. Bretchko, RF Circuit Design-Theory and Applications, Pearson Education,

1st Edition, 2006
Reference (s)
2. Mathew M. Radmanesh, Radio Frequency and Microwave Electronics Illustrated, Pearson Education, 1st
Edition, 2006
3. D.M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, Wiley India Limitted, Third Edition, 2007
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 35 35 --
Understand 35 35 --
Apply 30 30 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out the different RF passive components
2. List out the different RF active components
3. Define normalized impedance
4. Define reflection coefficient
5. Define VSWR
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain Butterworth filter
2. Indicate schematic representation of BJT transistor
3. Indicate schematic representation of FET transistor
4. Explain high electron mobility transistor
5. Explain the operation of transistor as a switch
APPLY
1. Find the low-pass prototype value for an n = 4 Butterworth filter with unequal terminations: RS = 50 ohms,
RL = 100 ohms
2. Find the low-pass prototype values for an n = 5, 0.1-dB ripple, Chebyshev filter if the source resistance you
are designing for is 50 ohms and the load resistance is 250 ohms
3. Find the gain of the amplifier if a transistor with the following Y parameters at 200 MHz: yi = 2.25 + j7.2
yo = 0.4 + j1.9 yf = 40 − j20 yr = 0.05 − j0.7 All of the above parameters are in mhos
4. Find the value of load resistance is required to obtain 2 W of RF output from a transistor if the supply
voltage is 12 V and the saturation voltage of the transistor is 2 V?
5. Find the attenuation of a 4-element, 2.5-dB ripple, low-pass Chebyshev filter at ω/ωc = 2.5
199
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016| Courses under Elective VI. Approved in 11th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16EE502 POWER ELECTRONICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the operation of various power semiconductor devices
2. Outline the control and protection methods for power semiconductor devices
3. Analyze the performance of phase controlled rectifiers for various loads
4. Demonstrate the operation of AC-AC converters
5. Analyze the performance of DC-DC converters
6. Outline the performance of inverters
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO2 PO3
1 3 2 1
2 3 2 1
3 3 2 2
4 3 2 1
5 2 1
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Power Semiconductor Devices, Turn On & Off Methods
Thyristors, Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR’s), BJT, Power MOSFET, Power IGBT and their characteristics
and other thyristors, Basic theory of operation of SCR, Static characteristics, Turn on and turn off methods,
Dynamic characteristics of SCR , Turn on and Turn off times. Two transistor analogy, SCR firing circuits,
Series and parallel connections of SCR’s, Snubber circuit details, Line Commutation and Forced Commutation
circuits
Energy, Global Warming and Impact of Power Electronics in the Present Century
12 + 5 Hours
Unit II
Single Phase Half & Full Controlled Converters
Single phase Line commutated converters, Half wave controlled converters with Resistive, RL loads and RLE
load, Derivation of average load voltage and current, Full wave controlled converters, Midpoint and Bridge
connection (fully and half controlled) with Resistive, RL and RLE loads, Derivation of average load voltage and
current, Line commutated inverters
Challenges of the Current Energy Scenario: The Power Electronics Contribution
10 + 3 Hours
Unit III
Three Phase Line Commutated Converters and AC –AC Converters
Three phase converters, Three pulse and six pulse converters, Midpoint and bridge connections average load
voltage With R and RL loads, Effect of Source inductance, Dual converters
AC voltage controllers, Single phase two SCR’s in anti-parallel and with TRIAC-derivation of RMS load
voltage, Cyclo converters, Single phase midpoint and Bridge configuration.
Three phase AC voltage controller
12 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Choppers & Inverters
Choppers, Basic chopper operation, Derivation of average load voltage, Time ratio control and Current limit
control strategies, Step up Chopper, average load voltage expression.
Inverters, Single phase bridge inverter, Pulse width modulation techniques, Three phase inverter operation with
180 and 120 degree mode of operation.
Harmonic Analysis in single phase PWM inverters and Power Converters for Wind Turbines
11 + 3 Hours
Total: 45 + 15=60 Hours
200
Text Book (s)

1. M. H. Rashid, Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications, PHI, 3rd Edition, 2014
2. P.S. Bhimbra, Power electronics, Khanna Publishers, 4th Edition, 2012
Reference(s)
1. Vedam Subramanyam, Power Electronics, New Age International Pvt. Limited, 1st Edition, 2006.
2. M.D. Singh & K.B. Kanchandhani, Power Electronics, TMH, 2nd Edition, 1997.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 10 ---
Understand 40 50 ---
Apply 20 20 60
Analyze 20 20 40
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define latching current
2. Define holding current
3. List the advantages of dc-ac converter
4. List the advantages of inverter
5. Define duty ratio
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain static VI characteristics of an SCR
2. Explain the differences between series and parallel operation of SCRs
3. Outline the advantages of snubber circuit
4. Compare the performance of the converter when it is connected with R, RL loads
5. Classify the different power converters based on input and output supply
6. Explain the operation of the single phase ac voltage controller
APPLY
1. Develop a single phase full converter for PMDC motor load
2. Identify a suitable converter for a single phase induction motor for variable speed application
3. Compute the RMS value of the out voltage for a single phase full converter
4. Assess the need of protection arrangement for an SCR
5. Compute the snubber circuit values for protection of an SCR
6. Assess the importance of PWM technique for an inverter
ANALYZE
1. Compare the performance of single phase full converter and half –wave converters
2. Organize the commutation techniques based on its circuit arrangement
3. Compare the output voltage of three phase full converter and three phase semi converter for firing
angle variation
1
201
16CS004 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Develop the mathematical model of the system and implement real time algorithm for task scheduling.
2. Explain capabilities Handling Resource Sharing and dependencies among Real-time Tasks
3. Explain and use of different protocols
4. Analyze Real-time tasks Scheduling in multiprocessor and distributed systems
5. Explain the working of real time operating systems and real time database.
6. Explain the working of real time operating systems and real time communication
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO13
1 3 2 3
2 2 1 2
3 2 1 2
4 3 2 3
5 2 1 2
6 2 1 2
Unit I
Real-Time Systems
Introduction: Real time definition - Applications of Real-Time systems - A basic model of Real-time system -
Characteristics of Real-time system - Safety and Reliability - Types of Real-time tasks - timing constraints -
Modeling timing constraints Some important concepts - Types of Real-time tasks and their characteristics - Task
scheduling - Clock-Driven scheduling - Hybrid schedulers - Event-Driven scheduling - Earliest Deadline First
(EDF) scheduling.
Identify some RTOS for review - Embedded Programming in C
11 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Scheduling Periodic Tasks
Rate monotonic algorithm (RMA). Some issues associated with RMA. Issues in using RMA practical situations.
Handling Resource Sharing and dependencies among Real-time Tasks: Resource sharing among real-time tasks.
Priority inversion. Priority Inheritance Protocol (PIP) - Highest Locker Protocol (HLP) - Priority Ceiling
Protocol (PCP).Different types of priority inversions under PCP. Important features of PCP - Some issues in
using a resource sharing protocol. Handling task dependencies
Memory Management - and porting μCos
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Scheduling Real-Time Tasks in Multiprocessor and Distributed Systems
Multiprocessor task allocation - Dynamic allocation of tasks - Fault tolerant scheduling of tasks - Clock in
distributed Real-time systems - Centralized clock synchronization Commercial Real-time operating systems:
Time services - Features of a Real-time operating system - Unix as a Real-time operating system - Unix-based
Real-time operating systems - Windows as a Real-time operating system - POSIX-RT - A survey of
contemporary Real-time operating systems. Benchmarking real-time systems
RTOS for fault Tolerant Applications
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Real Time Databases and Communication
Real-time Databases: Example applications of Real-time databases. Review of basic database concepts - Real-
time databases - Characteristics of temporal data.
202
Concurrency control in real-time databases - Commercial real-time databases - Real-time Communication:

Basic concepts - Examples of applications - Real-time communication in a LAN and Real-time communication
over packet switched networks.
Comparison and study of various RTOS like QNX - VX Works
12 + 3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Rajib Mall, Real-time Systems Theory and Practice, 1st edition, Pearson Publication, 2008.
Reference (s)
1. Jane W. S. Liu, Real-Time Systems, Pearson Education, 2000.
2. C.M. Krishna and K.G. Shin, Real-Time Systems, TMH, 2009
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 25 15 --
Understand 35 25 --
Apply 20 35 40
Analyze 20 25 40
Evaluate -- -- 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define real-time system.

2. List few applications of real-time systems.
3. What is meant by fail safe state?
4. Name any two important sensor devices and two actuators used in real time systems.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the basic model of real-time system.

2. Explain characteristics of real-time systems.
3. Explain the key differences between the characteristics of a soft-real time task such as web browsing
and a non-real time task such as e-mail delivery.
APPLY
1. In a real time system what is the difference between a performance constraint and a behavioral
constraint? Give practical examples of each type of constraint.
2. Draw a schematic model showing the important components of a typical hard real system. Explain the
working of output interface using a suitable schematic diagram. Explain using a suitable circuit
diagram how analog to digital conversion is achieved in an output interface.
3. Draw a schematic model showing the important components of a typical hard real system. Explain the
working of input interface using a suitable schematic diagram. Explain using a suitable circuit diagram
how digital to analog conversion is achieved in an input interface.
-----------------------------------------
203
ANALYZE
1. Is it possible to have an extremely safe but unreliable system? If your answer is affirmative, then give
example of such a system. If your answer is no, then explain why such a system is not possible to exist.
2. Identify the constraints that a set of periodic real-time tasks need to satisfy for RMA to be optimal
scheduler for the set of tasks?
3. Compare the performance of IEEE 802.4 protocol with IEEE 802.5 protocol for real-time applications
at high, medium and low bandwidths.
204
16EC013 ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Classify adaptive systems and its performance evaluation

2. Implement a linear adaptive processor
3. Compute mathematical models for error performance and stability
4. Design adaptive modeling systems using LMS algorithm
5. Design adaptive modeling systems using RLS algorithm
6. Outline the adaptive modeling systems for real time applications
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 2
2 3 2 1 3
3 3 2 1 3
4 3 2 2 3
5 3 2 2 3
6 2 1 2
Unit I
Introduction to Adaptive Systems
Characteristics, Areas of application, general properties, open and closed loop adaptation, applications of closed
loop adaptation, Example of an Adaptive System, The Adaptive Linear Combiner: Description, Weight Vectors,
Desired Response, Performance Function; Gradient and Minimum Mean-Square Error, Approaches to the
Development of Adaptive Filter Theory: Introduction to Filtering Smoothing and Prediction, Linear Optimum
Filtering, Principle of Orthogonality, Minimum Mean Squared Error, Wiener Hopf Equations.
Error Performance 10+3 Hours
Unit II
Gradient Searching and Estimation
Searching the Performance Surface: Methods and Ideas of Gradient Search Methods, Gradient Searching
Algorithm and its Solution, Stability and Rate of Convergence, Learning Curves, Gradient Search by Newton’s
Method, Method of Steepest Descent, Comparison of Learning Curves, Gradient component estimation by
derivative measurement, the performance penalty, derivative measurement and performance penalties with
multiple weights, effects on the weight vector solution
Variance of the gradient estimate 12+4 Hours
Unit III
LMS algorithm & applications
LMS Adaptation algorithms, Stability & Performance analysis of LMS Algorithms:LMS Gradient & Stochastic
algorithms, Convergence of LMS algorithm. Applications: Noise cancellation, Cancellation of Echoes in long
distance telephone circuits
Adaptive Beam forming
13+4 Hours
Unit IV
RLS algorithm & applications
Matrix Inversion lemma, Exponentially weighted recursive least square algorithm, update recursion for the sum
of weighted error squares, convergence analysis of RLS Algorithm, Application of RLS algorithm on Adaptive
Equalization
Noise cancellation 10+4 hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
205
Text Book(s)
1. Bernard Widrow, Samuel D.Strearns, Adaptive Signal Processing, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2009
2. Simon Haykin, Adaptive Filter Theory, Pearson Education, 5th Edition, 2014
Reference(s)
1. Sophocles.J.Orfanadis, Optimum signal processing: An introduction, McGrawHill, Newyork, 2nd
Edition, 1988
2. Adaptive signal processing-Theory and Applications, S.Thomas Alexander, Springer – Verlag, 1986
SAMPLE QUESTION(S)
Remember 25 -- --
Understand 45 50 --
Apply 30 50 50
Analyze -- -- 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define adaptive system

2. List the characteristics of an adaptive system
3. Recall open and closed loop adaptation systems
4. List out the various applications an adaptive system
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate single input and multiple input adaptive linear combiner

2. Explain about adaptive linear combiner with input signal and weight vectors
3. Explain the expression for minimum mean square error of an adaptive system
4. Illustrate gradient method and how it is helpful for find out the MSE
APPLY
1. Find out minimum mean square error for a single input adaptive linear combiner with two weights. The
input and desired signals are sampled sinusoids at same frequency with N samples per cycle,
xk=sin(2πk/n) and dk=2cos(2πk/n)
2. Find out MMSE by using error performance surface
3. Demonstrate statistical filtering problem with block diagram
4. Find the expression for minimum mean square error of an adaptive system
ANALYZE
1. Differentiate single input and multiple input adaptive linear combiner

2. Compare LMS and RLS algorithm in terms of computational complexity
3. Compare LMS and RLS algorithm in noise cancellation
4. Outline Cancellation of Echoes in long distance telephone circuits using LMS algorithm
2
206
16EC014 ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL DESIGN

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the mixed signal processing fundamentals
2. Outline the MOS models and differential amplifiers
3. Organize the Op-amp internal circuits using current mirrors
4. Demonstrate the switched capacitor circuits
5. Organize continuous and discrete time filters
6. Outline the data conversion circuits
COs – POs Mapping

1 3 2 1 3
2 3 1 2 3
3 3 3 2 3
4 3 3 2 3
5 3 3 3 3
6 3 3 3 3
Unit I
Basics of Analog and Mixed Signal Design
Introduction analog and discrete-time signal processing, MOS device models, Second order effects,
Differential amplifiers: single ended differential amplifier, basic differential pair, common mode
response, and differential pair with MOS loads
Advanced MOS Modelling, Single Stage Amplifiers
10+4 Hours
Unit II
Design of Current mirrors and op-amp
Current Mirrors: simple CMOS current mirrors, Cascode and active current, high output impedance
current mirrors. Operational Amplifiers: one stage and two stage op-amps, gain boosting, comparison,
common mode feedback, input range limitation, slew-rate, power supply rejection, noise in op-amp,
fully differential Op-amp, Frequency compensation in Op amp
Time and frequency domain noise analysis of amplifiers
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Switched capacitors and filters
Introduction to the switched capacitor circuits, Non-idealities in switched-capacitor filters, Basic
building blocks, basic operation and analysis, sampling switches, Filters: Introduction Analog
continuous time filters, passive and active filters; Basics of analog discrete-time filters, First order, Bi-
quad, charge injection, Gain circuits
Switched-capacitor filter applications
13+3 Hours
Unit IV
Data converters
Basics of data converters; Analog to Digital converters: Integrating, Algorithmic, Two step, Folding,
Pipeline, Interpolating ADCs; Decoder based DACs, Hybrid DACs
Basics of PLL, Analog PLLs, Digital PLLs
10+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Tony Chan Carusone, David Johns, Kenneth Martin: Analog Integrated Circuit Design, 2nd Edition,
John Wiley Publications, 2011
207
2. Behzad Razavi , Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2017
3. R. Jacob Baker, CMOS mixed-signal circuit design, Wiley India, IEEE press, reprint
2008
4. Rudy V. dePlassche, CMOS Integrated ADCs and DACs, Springer, Indian edition, 2005
Reference (s)
1. Philip E. Allen & Douglas R. Holberg, CMOS Analog Circuit Design, Oxford University Press, 2002
2. M. Burns et al., An introduction to mixed-signal IC test and measurement by, Oxford
university press, first Indian edition, 2008
3. R. Jacob Baker, CMOS circuit design, layout and simulation, Revised second edition,
IEEE press, 2008
4. Arthur B. Williams, Electronic Filter Design Handbook, McGraw-Hill, 1981
5. R. Schauman, Design of analog filters, Prentice-Hall, 1990
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 10 --
Understand 30 15 --
Apply 25 25 50
Analyse 25 50 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Recall the analog signal processing.

2. Recall the discrete-time signal processing
3. Reproduce the sampling theory
4. Reproduce the basic differential pair
5. List any two analog continuous time filters
6. Recall the basics of analog discrete-time filters.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the single ended differential amplifier circuit.

2. Abstract the second order effects in MOS FET.
3. Explain the basic differential amplifier
4. Illustrate the MOS models
5. Illustrate the MOS modelling
APPLY
1. Construct a cascode current mirror using CMOS

2. Demonstrate the non-idealities in switched capacitor circuits
3. Demonstrate high output impedance current mirrors
4. Demonstrate the applications of switched capacitor filter.
5. Demonstrate a simple CMOS current mirror circuit.
ANALYZE
1. Outline the circuit for Successive approximation ADCs.

2. Outline the circuit for Dual slope ADCs.
3. Organize the Flash ADCs.
208
4. Outline a Pipeline ADC circuit.

5. Organize the High-resolution DACs
209
16EC015 NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the basic principles of neural networks fundamentals
2. Determine about the artificial neural networks and different learning networks
3. Illustrate the principles of single layer and multilayer feed forward neural networks and back
propagation algorithm
4. Outline the functionalities of Associative Memory and Architecture of Hopfield Network
5. Implement the principles of fuzzy logic fundamentals
6. Generate the fuzzy if-then rule and different basic models along with fuzzy inference technique to
design fuzzy based system
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 2 2
2 3 2 1 3 3
3 2 1 2 2
4 2 1 2 2
5 3 2 1 3 3
6 3 3 2 3 3
Unit I
Introduction to Neural Networks
Introduction, Biological Neuron, Biological and Artificial Neuron Models, Characteristics of ANN, McCulloch-
Pitts Model, Artificial Neuron Model, Operations of Artificial Neuron, Types of Neuron Activation Function,
ANN Architectures, Classification Taxonomy of ANN-Connectivity, Neural Dynamics: Activation and
Synaptic, Learning Strategy: Supervised, Unsupervised, Reinforcement, Learning Rule, Neural Network
Architecture, Instance/Memory Based Learning Algorithms.
Applications of Memory Based Learning
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Single & Multilayer Layer Feed Forward Neural networks
Perception Models: Discrete, Continuous and Multi-Category, Training Algorithms: Discrete and Continuous
Perception Networks, Perception Convergence theorem, Limitations of the Perception Model, Applications.
Credit Assignment Problem, Generalized Delta Rule, Derivation of Backpropagation neural network.
Applications of BPNN
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Associative Memories
Paradigms of Associative Memory, Pattern Mathematics, Hebbian Learning, General Concepts of Associative
Memory: Associative Matrix, Association Rules, Hamming Distance, The Linear Associator, Matrix Memories,
Content Addressable Memory, Bidirectional Associative Memory Architecture, BAM Training Algorithms:
Storage and Recall Algorithm, Architecture of Hopfield Network: Discrete and Continuous versions, Storage
and Recall Algorithm, Stability Analysis, Capacity of the Hopfield Network.
Application of NN in pattern recognition and optimization
13+4 Hours
Unit IV
Fuzzy Sets & Fuzzy Logic System Components
Fuzzy Logic: Basic concepts of Fuzzy logic, Fuzzy vs. Crisp set, Linguistic variables, Cardinalities,
Membership functions, Operations of Fuzzy sets, Fuzzy if-then rules, Variables inference techniques,
Defuzzification techniques, Basic Fuzzy Interference algorithm, Application of fuzzy logic, Fuzzy system
Design Implementation.
Fuzzy tools for supporting design
210
10+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. James A Freeman and Davis Skapura, Neural Networks, Pearson Education, 2002.
2. Simon Haykin, Neural Networks-A comprehensive foundation, Pearson Education, 2001
Reference (s)
1. S. Rajasekharan and G. A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic, Genetic algorithms:
synthesis and applications, PHI Publication, 2004.
2. S. N. Sivanandam, S. Sumathi, S. N. Deepa, Neural Networks using MATLAB 6.0, TMH, 2006
3. B Yegnanarayana, Artificial neural networks, Prentice Hall of India, 1stEdition, 2005.
4. John Yen and Reza Langan, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Application, TMH, 1997.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 15 15 --
Understand 35 15 --
Apply 25 40 20
Analyze 25 30 40
Evaluate -- -- 30
Create -- -- 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List the four major steps in fuzzy rule based model.

2. List the three steps for designing a fuzzy controller.
3. State the genetic algorithm.
4. Define fuzzy Cartesian product.
5. Define activation functions.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the fuzzy individual decision making system with an example.

2. Illustrate the common measures of preference average fuzziness and average certainty.
3. Explain different steps of genetic algorithm with a flow chart.
4. Illustrate the various Defuzzification methods.
5. Explain about the McCulloch-Pitts Model.
APPLY
1. Show a flowchart of a simple Genetic Algorithm and assess its step by step process.
2. Demonstrate the steps in designing a fuzzy control system.

i) Identify the variables.
ii) Partition the universe of discourse into a number of fuzzy subsets.
3. Find the differential equation in Inverted pendulum.
-ml2 d2 _/dt2 + mlg sin _ = u(t).
5. Find P, using Fuzzy Cartesian Product P = V * I and T = I*C. Using Max-Min and
Max-product composition find E = P*T.
1= {0.7, 0.2,1,0.5, 0.2}
V={0.5, 0.7, 1,0.1,0.9}
3
211
C = {0.7, 1, 0.3}
ANALYSE
1. Compare between the fuzzy set and the crisp set.

2. Compare weights and bias.
3. Conclude the state of art of the fuzzy system, by using their variables.
4. Compare classical set and fuzzy set.
EVALUATE
1. Determine the energy function of continuous Hopfield network.

2. Determine the fuzzy relations.
3. Determine the assumptions to be made in a fuzzy control system design.
i) The plant is observable and controllable.
ii) A solution exists.
4. Determine a neural network that illustrates and learns how to balance an inverted pendulum.
CREATE
1. Generate a neural net using BPNN algorithm for XOR logic functions. The architecture and the values
of initial weights and biases are shown below.
2. Relate with an application and explain how rule base can be formulated in fuzzy rule based system.
3. Generalize the operation of the fuzzy logic control with the process inference block.
4. Relate the different steps of genetic algorithm with a neat flow chart.
212
16EC016 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the Location of satellite in the orbit and assess the orbital effects on satellite communications
2. Interpret the major subsystems of spacecraft
3. Compute satellite link budget
4. Attribute various multiple access techniques and spread spectrum techniques
5. Interpret the earth station technology
6. Exemplify the concepts of VSAT systems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO 2 PO 14
1 2 1 2
2 2 1 2
3 3 2 3
4 3 3 3
5 2 1 2
6 2 1 2
Unit I
Introduction
Historical Background, Basic Concepts of Satellite Communications, Frequency allocations for Satellite
Services, Applications, Orbital Mechanics, Orbit determination, Look Angle determination, Orbital
perturbations, launches and launch vehicles, Orbital effects in communication systems performance.
Drift with a geostationary satellite, Doppler shift for a LEO Satellite 12+4 Hours
Unit II
Satellite subsystems and link design
Attitude and orbit control system, telemetry, tracking, Command and monitoring, power systems,
communication subsystems, Satellite antenna Equipment reliability and Space qualification, Satellite link
Design, Basic transmission theory, system noise temperature and G/T ratio, Design of down links, up link
design, Design of satellite links for specified C/N, System design example.
Uplink, Downlink designs and rain effects at Ku Band 10+4 Hours
Unit III
Multiple Access Techniques
Frequency Division Multiple Access: Intermodulation, Calculation of C/N, Time Division Multiple Access:
Frame structure, Satellite Switched TDMA Onboard processing, DAMA: pre-assigned, post assigned, random
assigned, Code Division Multiple Access, Spread spectrum techniques: DSSS, FHSS, THSS, MCSS,
Applications.
Packet radio system 13+4 Hours
Unit IV
Earth Station Technology and VSAT Systems
Introduction, Transmitters, Receivers, Antennas, Tracking systems, Terrestrial interface, Primary power test
methods, VSAT systems: Overview, Network Architectures, Basic Techniques, VSAT earth station engineering.
Calculation of link margins for a VSAT star network
10+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
213
Textbook (s)
1. Timothy Pratt, Charles Bostian and Jeremy Allnutt, WSE, Satellite Communications, Wiley
Publications, 2nd Edition, 2004
2. Wilbur L. Pritchard, Robert A Nelson and Henri G.Suyderhoud, Satellite Communications
Engineering, 2nd Edition, Pearson Publications, 2012
Reference (s)
1. K.N. Raja Rao, Fundamentals of Satellite Communications, PHI, 2004
2. Dennis Roddy , Satellite Communications, McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 1996
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 35 20 --
Understand 35 35 --
Apply 20 25 30
Analyze 10 20 70
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out some communication satellites with their RF bandwidths

2. List out any two advantages and disadvantages of satellite communication over other types of
communication methods
3. Define sub satellite point
4. Recall the salient features of transmit-receive (T/R) Earth station
5. Recall the merits and demerits of satellite communication
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the main functions of INSAT series of satellites

2. Explain the various orbital perturbations and possible remedial measures to overcome them
3. Explain the launching process of a geo stationary satellite with aid of diagram.
4. Compare spin stabilization and momentum stabilization
5. Explain the significance of space link equation
APPLY
1. Find the i)path eccentricity ii) orbital time period for a satellite whose apogee height is 4000 km and
perigee height is 1000 km. Assume radius of earth 6370km
2. Assess that three communication GEO satellites are sufficient to provide coverage for the globe
3. Find the gain in dB for a 3m paraboloidal antenna operating at frequency of 12 GHz. Assume aperture
efficiency of 0.55
4. A satellite at 12GHz operates with transmit power of 6W and antenna gain of 48.2 dBW. Find [EIRP]
in dBW
5. Antenna has noise temperature of 35Kelvin and is matched to a receiver that has noise temperature of
100Kelvin. Find i) Noise power density. ii) Noise power for 36 MHz bandwidth
4
214
ANALYSE
1. Compare and Contrast between geo stationary and non-geostationary orbits

2. Analyze atmospheric drag and earth’s shape that cause orbital disturbances
3. Differentiate elevation and azimuth angles
4. Organize the link power budget equation and analyze the terms
5. Compare active and passive attitude control of satellites
215
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016| Courses under Contemporary Course. Approved in 11 th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16EC017 ARM PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND APPLICATIONS
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the ARM Architecture

2. Implement simple programs using ARM instructions
3. Execute ARM instructions using assembly language
4. Implement different applications using high level language
5. Organize the memory hierarchy
6. Summarize the operating systems and co-processors
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO 2 PO 3 PO13
1 2 1 - 2
2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 1 2
4 3 2 1 2
5 3 3 2 2
6 2 1 - 2
Unit I
Introduction to Processor Design
Abstraction in hardware design: Manchester designed machine (MU0) a simple processor,
Processor design trade off, ARM architecture: RISC Machine, Architecture inheritance, ARM programming model,
ARM development tools, 3 and 5 Stage pipeline ARM organization, ARM instruction execution and
implementation, ARM Co-Processor interface, ARM bus architectures.
Comparision of ARM Vs 8051 microcontroller 11+4 Hours
Unit II
ARM Assembly Language Programming
ARM instruction types, Data transfer, Data processing and control flow instructions, ARM Instruction set, Co-
Processor instructions.
Thumb Instruction set 10+4 Hours
Unit III
Architectural support for high level language
Data Types, Abstraction in software Design, Expressions, Loops, Functions and Procedures, Conditional statements.
Memory hierarchy: Use of memory, Memory size and Speed, On chip memory, Caches, Cache design.
Washing machine design using ARM processor 13+4 Hours
Unit IV
Architectural support for operating system
An introduction to Operating Systems, ARM system control Coprocessor- CP15 Protection unit registers, ARM
protection unit, CP15 MMU registers, ARM MMU architecture, Synchronization, Context switching .
Comparision of different operating systems 11+3 Hours
Total= 45 + 15 Hours
216
Textbook (s)
1. Steve Furber, ARM System on Chip Architecture, Addison Wesley Professional, Second Edition, 2000
2. Andrew NSloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, ARM System Developer‘s Guide, Designing and
Optimizing System Software, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, Elsevier, 2004
Reference (s)
1. Ricardo Reis, Design of System on a Chip: Devices and Components, Springer First Edition, 2004.
2. Jason Andrews, Co-Verification of Hardware and Software for ARM System on Chip Design (Embedded
Technology) Newnes, BK 2004
3. Rashinkar P, Paterson and Singh L, System on a Chip Verification–Methodologies and Techniques,
Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 20 --
Understand 30 25 --
Apply 50 25 50
Analyze -- 30 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define a processor.
2. Define microcontroller.
3. List ARM cores.
4. Define RISC machine.
5. Define pipelining.
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the working of ARM architecture.

2. Indicate ARM instruction types.
3. Identify the differences between microcontrollers and ARM processors.
4. Illustrate the concept of memory hierarchy.
5. Identify the differences between CISC and RISC machine.
APPLY
1. Predict the proper tool for ARM design in the implementation of real time applications.
2. Assess the performance of high level programming languages over low level programming languages
3. Assess the performance of ARM MMU Architecture.
4. Design an automated washing machine using ARM controller.
5. Assess the performance of Pipeline process in ARM with an example.
217
ANALYSE
1. Attribute the performance of ARM processor with 8051 microcontroller with an example.
2. Outline different ways of increasing the efficiency of ARM processor.
3. Justify how can we change the PSR contents through instructions in ARM.
4. Justify how a constant is loaded into a general purpose register of ARM processor.
5. Justify different ways of increasing the efficiency of ARM processor with real time operating system.
218
16EC018 ASIC DESIGN
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Classify the various types of ASICs

2. Explain the basics of System Verilog
3. Execute Test Bench functionality for digital circuits
4. Explain the types of simulation and test pattern generation techniques
5. Differentiate various partitioning methods of ASIC construction
6. Demonstrate floor planning and placement concepts
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO 2 PO3 PO 13
1 2 1 - 2
2 2 1 - 2
3 3 2 1 3
4 2 1 - 2
5 3 2 1 2
6 3 2 1 2
Unit I
ASICs & Library Design
Types of ASIC: Full-Custom ASIC, Semi- Custom ASIC, Design flow, ASIC cell Libraries
CMOS Logic: Combination Logic Cells, Sequential Logic Cells, Data path Logic Cells
ASIC Library Design: Transistors as Resistors, Transistor Parasitic Capacitance, Library-Cell Design, Library
Architecture, Gate-Array Design, Standard-Cell Design.
Data path Cell Design
11+4 Hours
Unit II
System Verilog
Verification Guide lines, Verification Process, Verification Methodology, Manual, Basic Test bench Functionality,
Directed Testing, Built-In Data Types, Fixed-Size Arrays, Dynamic Arrays, Procedural Statements, Separating the
Test bench and Design.
Implementation of ALU
12+3 Hours
Unit III
Simulation
Types of Simulation, The Comparator/MUX , Logic Systems, Logic Simulation, Cell Models, Delay Models, Static
Timing Analysis, Formal Verification, Switch-Level Simulation
Transistor-Level Simulation Test: The Importance of Test, Boundary Scan Test, Faults, Fault Simulation, Automatic
Test-Pattern Generation, Scan Test.
ATPG Algorithm
11+4 Hours
219
Unit IV
ASIC Construction
Physical Design, CAD Tools, System Partitioning, Estimating ASIC Size, Power Dissipation, FPGA Partitioning,
Partitioning Methods. Floor Planning and Placement: Floor planning, Placement, Physical Design Flow, Information
Formats Routing: Global Routing, Detailed Routing, Special Routing.
Circuit Extraction and DRC 11+ 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Michael John Sebastian Smith, Application-Specific Integrated Circuits, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2002
Reference (s)
1. Jan. M. Rabaey, Digital Integrated Circuits, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2016
2. Sabih Gerez, Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation, Wiley Publications, 2nd Edition, 2006
3. Wayne Wolf, Modern VLSI Design Pearson Education, 4th Edition , 2009
4. Chris Spear and Gregory J Tumbush, System Verilog for verification, A Guide To Learning the Test bench
language Features, Springer, 3rd Edition, 2012
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 10 10 --
Understand 40 40 --
Apply 40 40 50
Analyze 10 10 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List the advantages of CMOS Technology

2. List out goals and objectives of detailed Routing method
3. Define Routing and write its applications
4. State about Directed Testing
5. List out Floor Planning Methods
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain about the term “HALF GATE ASIC”

2. Interpret the following terms with respect to System Verilog
(i) Fixed Size arrays (ii) Dynamic arrays
3. Explain principle involved in automatic Test pattern generation with example
4. Classify and Compare Lattice PLD architecture and FPGA architecture
5. Illustrate importance of Logic Synthesis and Simulation
220
APPLY
1. Demonstrate application of “FULL CUSTOM DESIGN”

2. Construct 16:1 mux using 4:1 mux
3. Find the importance of CAD tools towards VLSI design
4. Implement the logic function: F = X1X2 +X’2X3 using Gate Level Statement
5. Demonstrate Fault coverage and Test coverage methods
ANALYSE
1. Justify the mixed logic is a design tool? If yes, Justify

2. Outline the importance of back end CAD tools
3. Compare and Contrast various Simulation Techniques used in FPGA design
4. Compare and Contrast between FPGA and ASIC design flow?
5. Differentiate cell compilers and gate array cell design
221
16EC019 SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the Architecture of Software Defined Radio
2. Execute the concept of digital filters and multi rate processing
3. Attribute the transmitter and receiver architectures
4. Summarise the challenges in the maintenance of SDR
5. Implement SDR for a specific application
6. Attribute the parameters of smart antenna
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 13 PO 14
1 2 1 1 2
2 3 2 1 1 2
3 3 2 1 2 2
4 2 1 2 2
5 3 2 1 2 2
6 3 2 1 2 3
Unit-I
SDR Architecture
Software Defined Radio:A Traditional Hardware Radio Architecture, Signal Processing Hardware: Introduction to
2G Radio Architectures, Hybrid Radio Architecture, Basic Software Defined Radio Block Diagram, System Level
Functioning Partitioning, Digital Frequency Conversion Partitioning, RF System Design: Noise and Channel
Capacity, Receiver Requirements.
Signal Processing Capacity Tradeoff 12+4 Hours
Unit-II
Digital Frequency Converters
Digital Conversion Fundamentals, Sample Rate, Band pass sampling, oversampling, Anti-alias Filtering, Frequency
converter Fundamentals, Digital NCO, Digital Mixers, Digital Filters: Half band Filters, CIC Filters Decimation,
Interpolation, and Multirate Processing, DUCs Cascading, Digital Converters and Digital Frequency Converters.
Figure of Merit-DACs- DAC Noise Budget- ADC Noise Budget 11+4 Hours
Unit-III
Signal Processing Hardware Components:
Introduction to SDR Requirements for Processing Power, DSP Devices, DSP Compilers, Reconfigurable Processors,
Adaptive Computing Machine, FPGAs Software Architecture and Components, Architecture Choices: Hardware,
Specific Software Architecture
Software Standards for SDR 11+4 Hours
Unit-IV
Smart Antennas Using Software Radio
3G smart Antenna Requirements, Phased Antenna Array, Software Radio Principles to Antenna Systems, Smart
Antenna Architectures, Optimum combining, Adaptive Arrays, DOA Arrays, Beam Forming for CDMA.
Downlink Beam Forming 11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
222
Textbook (s)
1. Paul Burns, Software Defined Radio for 3G, Artech House, 2002
2. Tony J Rouphael, RF and DSP for SDR, Elsevier Newnes Press, 2008
3. JoukoVanakka, Digital Synthesizers and Transmitter for Software Radio, Springer, 2005
Reference (s)
1. Eugene Grayver, Implementing Software Defined Radio, Springer-Verlag New York, 2013.
2. Walter Tuttlebee, Software Defined Radio Enabling Technologies, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd,2002
3. P Kenington, RF and Baseband Techniques for Software Defined Radio, Artech House, 2005
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 35 15 --
Understand 30 20 --
Apply 20 35 50
Analyse 15 30 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State hybrid architecture

2. List different types of architecture
3. Define Channel Capacity
4. List the primary reasons that the military sector might embrace the open architecture SDR
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the Spectrum management Implications in SDR

2. Illustrate the ideal Software Radio with an example
3. Illustrate the principals of smart antenna
4. Compare different types of antennas used in 3G communications
APPLY
1. Implement half band filter and mention the application of it

2. Determine SDR Requirements for Processing Power
3. Construct an adaptive computing machine
ANALYZE
1. Analyze the SDR software architecture

2. Justify how logical layers related to physical code
3. Compare software architecture from radio architecture.
223
16EC020 TESTING OF VLSI CIRCUITS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify various types of faults in digital circuits
2. Interpret the concepts of test generation for digital circuits
3. Implement testable digital logic circuits
4. Interpret system level DFT approaches
5. Explain self- test algorithms
6. Implement self -checking design
COs – POs Mapping

1 2 1 2 2
2 2 1 2 2
3 3 2 3 3
4 2 1 2 2
5 2 1 2 2
6 3 2 3 3
Unit I
Testing and fault modeling
Introduction to testing, Faults in Digital Circuits, Modeling of faults, Logical Fault Models, Fault detection, Fault
Location, Fault dominance, Logic simulation, Types of simulation, Delay models.
Gate level event driven simulation
11+ 4 Hours
Unit II
Test pattern generation
Test generation for combinational logic circuits, Testable combinational logic circuit design, Test generation for
sequential circuits.
Design of testable sequential circuits
11+ 3 Hours
Unit III
Design for testability
Design for Testability, Ad-hoc design, generic scan based design, classical scan based design, system level DFT
approaches
Self - test and test algorithms: Built-In Self Test, test pattern generation for BIST, Circular BIST, BIST
Architectures, Testable Memory Design, Test Algorithms.
Test generation for Embedded RAM’s
12+ 4 Hours
Unit IV
Fault diagnosis
Logical Level Diagnosis, Diagnosis by UUT reduction, Fault Diagnosis for Combinational Circuits, Self checking
design.
System Level Diagnosis
11+ 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
224
Textbook (s)
1. M.Abramovici, M.A.Breuer and A.D. Friedman, Digital systems and Testable Design, Jaico Publishing
House, 2000
2. P.K. Lala, Digital Circuit Testing and Testability, Academic Press, 1997
Reference (s)
1. M.L.Bushnell and V.D.Agrawal, Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and Mixed-Signal
VLSI Circuits, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2000
2. A.L.Crouch, Design Test for Digital IC’s and Embedded Core Systems, Prentice Hall International, 2002
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 20 --
Understand 30 35 --
Apply 20 35 70
Analyse 20 10 30
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out the different types of simulation

2. List out the different types self test and test algorithms
3. Define gate level event driven simulation
4. Define testability
5. List out the different fault models
UNDERSTAND
1. Interpret the various operations of a test algorithm

2. Explain principle involved in the fault modeling
3. Illustrate the working principle of fault detection
4. Compare controllability and observability
5. Explain system level DFT approaches
APPLY
1. Carryout DFT approaches and with the help of neat sketch write the working of each level
2. Demonstrate the application of MBIST circuits
3. Find delay models and with a neat sketch write the working of each model
4. Demonstrate the application of generic scan based design
5. Design classical scan based testing and with a neat sketch write the working
225
ANALYSE
1. Compare and Contrast between classical scan based design and generic scan based design
2. Is increasing the efficiency of test pattern generation for BIST? If yes, Justify.
3. Compare and Contrast between specific and generic offline BIST architectures
4. Conclude the importance of trade- offs for impulse design for testability
5. Advanced BIST concepts are best suited for Built in Self-Test. Is the above statement true or false? Justify
your answer.
226
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016| One Credit Courses. Approved in 11th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16ECI01 MODELLING AND SIMULATION OF BASIC ELECTRONIC SYSTEM

1001
Course Outcomes
1. Design and implementation of Regulated Power Supply

2. Design and implementation of Power Amplifier
3. Design and implementation of Audio Amplifier
Introduction to P-Spice, Design of Regulated Power Supply (Variable 0-30V with protection), Design of Audio
Amplifier, Design of Power Amplifier using P-Spice, Hardware implementation and validation.
15 Hours
Reading Materials (s)
1. Visvesvara Rao, K. Bhaskara Rama Murty, K. Raja Rajeswari, P.ChalamRajuPantulu,Electronic Devices

and Circuits, Pearson Education, 2ndEdition, 2007.
2. S.G.Burns and P.R.Bond, Principles of Electronic Circuits, Galgotia Publications, 2nd Edition., 1998.
3. Millman and Grabel ,Microelectronics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2ndEdition,1979
4. P. John Paul ,Electronic Devices and Circuits, New Age International publishers, 2007.
5. A.Salivahanan, N.Suresh Kumar, A.Vallavaraj, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Limited, Second Edition,2008.
227
16ECI02 EFFICIENT DESIGN OF RF TRANSCEIVER
1001
Course Outcomes
1. Design and implementation of RF Amplifier

2. Design and implementation of RF Transmitter and Receiver
Design of Oscillator, Power Amplifier, Modulator, Antenna for RF Transmitter and Design of RF Amplifier,
Demodulator, Filter, Antenna for RF Receiver, Hardware Implementation.
15 Hours
1. H Taub & D. Schilling, Gautam Sahe, Principles of Communication Systems , TMH, 3rdEdition. 2007
2. R.P. Singh, SP Sapre, Communication Systems TMH, Second Edition, 2007
3. John G. Proakis, Masond, Salehi, Fundamentals of Communication Systems, Pearson Education,3 rdEdition,2008.
228
16ECI03 ANTENNA DESIGN
1001
Course Outcomes
1. Implement different types of antennas.

2. Differentiate different types of losses in Wireless Transmission
3. Check the Radiation Pattern and Gain of the Antenna.
Design of V Antenna, Inverted V Antenna and Yagi-Uda Antenna, Radiation Pattern measurement, Antenna Gain,
Propagation Delay, Different kinds of Noise, Antenna Arrays, Diversity techniques, Real Time applications of
Antenna, Wireless Transmission impairments, Wave Propagation Modes.
15 Hours
1. C.A Balanis, “Antenna Theory”, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd ed., 2001.
2. John D Krauss, Ronald J Marhefka, Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas for all applications “ 3rd edition, McGraw-
Hill,2006
3. K D Prasad, Satya Prakashan, “Antennas & Wave Propagation”, Tech India Publications, New Delhi, 2001.
229
16ECI04 INTERNET OF THINGS
1001
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the concept of device to smart device

2. Implement IoT for different applications
Introduction to Internet of Things, device to smart device, Applications of IoT: Home Automation, Environment,
Energy, Retail, Logistics, Remote vehicle diagnostics, Agriculture.
1. Designing the Internet of Things by Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, 4 John Wiley and Sons
publications, 2014.
2. Internet of things – A hands on approach by Arshdeep Bahga and Vijay Madisetti, 2014.
3. Weblink: https://www.arduino.cc/en/Guide/HomePage
230
16ECI05 FULL CUSTOM VLSI DESIGN

1001
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the navigation of EDA tool

2. Analyze CMOS Inverter static behaviour
3. Analyze the dynamic behavior of CMOS Inverter
4. Implement layouts of various gate designs
Introduction to EDA tool: Design, Simulation, Layout.

CMOS Inverter – Static View and design, Static CMOS Design, CMOS Inverter – the Dynamic View: The Dynamic
Behavior, Power, Energy, and Energy-Delay, Perspective: Technology Scaling and its Impact on the Inverter
Metrics. Ratioed Logic, Pass-Transistor Logic, Gate designs and their layouts.
15 Hours
1. Jan M. Rabaey, AnanthaChandrakasan, Borivoje Nikolic, Digital Integrated Circuits – A Design

Perspective, 2nd edn., Pearson Education, 2003. ISBN: 8178089912.
2. K. Eshraghian, and N.H.E. Weste, Principles of CMOS VLSI Design – a Systems Perspective, 2nd edn.,
Addison Wesley, 1993.
3. Wayne Wolf, Modern VLSI Design System – on – Chip Design, 3rd edn., Pearson Education, 2003. 3. M.
Michael Vai, VLSI Design, CRC Press, 2001.
4. John P. Uyemura, CMOS Logic Circuit Design, Springer (Kluwer Academic Publishers), 2001.
5. Ken Martin, Digital Integrated Circuit Design, Oxford University Press, 2000.
231
Department of ECE, GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016| Course under Audit Courses. Approved in 11th ACM (March 24, 2018)
16AT003 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS AND PATENTS
Course Outcomes
1. Recognize the language of IP law
2. Explain the use of legal professionals involved in IPRs
3. Differentiate appropriate intellectual property strategy in a given market
4. Explain the registration procedures of trademark and copyrights
5. Check the competency in critical reasoning, problem solving and decision making
6. Explain the trade secrets
Unit I
Intellectual Property
Introduction to Intellectual Property Law – The Evolutionary Past - The IPR Tool Kit- Para -Legal Tasks in
Intellectual Property Law – Ethical obligations in Para Legal Tasks in Intellectual Property Law - Introduction to
Cyber Law – Innovations and Inventions Trade related Intellectual Property Right
Unit II
Trade mark
Introduction to Trade mark – Trade mark Registration Process – Post registration procedures – Trade mark
maintenance - Transfer of Rights - Inter parties Proceeding – Infringement - Dilution Ownership of Trade mark –
Likelihood of confusion - Trademarks claims – Trademarks Litigations – International Trade mark Law
Unit III
Copyrights
Introduction to Copyrights – Principles of Copyright Principles -The subjects Matter of Copy right – The Rights
Afforded by Copyright Law – Copy right Ownership, Transfer and duration – Right to prepare Derivative works –
Rights of Distribution – Rights of Perform the work Publicity Copyright Formalities and Registrations - Limitations
- Copyright disputes and International Copyright Law – Semiconductor Chip Protection Act
Unit IV
Trade Secret
Introduction to Trade Secret – Maintaining Trade Secret – Physical Security – Employee Limitation - Employee
confidentiality agreement - Trade Secret Law - Unfair Competition – Trade Secret Litigation – Breach of Contract –
Applying State Law
Textbook (s)
1. Deborah E.Bouchoux: “Intellectual Property”. Cengage learning , New Delhi
2. Prabhuddha Ganguli: ‘ Intellectual Property Rights” Tata Mc-Graw –Hill, New Delhi
Reference (s)
1. Richard Stim: “Intellectual Property”, Cengage Learning, New Delhi.
2. R.Radha Krishnan, S.Balasubramanian: “Intellectual Property Rights”, Excel Books. New Delhi
232

B.tech ECE Syllabus AR16 Revised

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.tech ECE Syllabus AR16 Revised

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GMRIT

Academic Regulations, Curriculum and Syllabi

Department of Electronics & Communication Engineering

Academic Rules and Regulations

The Vision of GMRIT

Academic Regulations for B. Tech. Programme*

b. Admission eligibility-Under Lateral Entry Scheme

2. Duration of the Programme

I. Chemical Engineering (CH)

III. Computer Science and Engineering (CS)

a. Integrated Courses: Integrated courses are exclusively designed to provide a

4.1. Credit Distribution for Courses Offered

4.2. Structure of curriculum

a. Full Semester Internship (FSI) Model

A. Course Pattern for Four year Regular Programme (FSI)

VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

Total 24+4+1 Audit courses 10 + Term paper +Mini project+ 132

Internship report +CCEC +

VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

a. For Four year regular Programme (FSI)

Total Theory Courses : 34 @ 3 credits each = 102

Total Theory Courses : 36 @ 3 credits each = 108

CCEC Activities : 2 @ 1 credits = 2

c. For three year lateral entry Programme (FSI)

Total Theory Courses : 24 @ 3 credits each = 72

Total Theory Courses : 26 @ 3 credits each = 78

Marks Marks for

5.1 Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses

40 marks allotted for continuous assessment as given below:

Preparation, Observation & Result : 10 Marks

Without Mini Project:

Day-to-day work : 15 marks

Online Objective Test : 50 Marks

On Site Assessment : 30 Marks

Requirement for the award of 1- Credit

Assessment of Soft Skills

a) It is desirable for a candidate to put on 100% attendance in all the subjects.

Classification of degree will be as follows:

i. CGPA ≥ 7.5 : Degree with Distinction

9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses

10. Withdrawal from the Examination

11. Curriculum: The curriculum of all the UG Programmes is given below

1. To provide high-quality education in Engineering to prepare the graduates for a

Program Educational Objectives

Engineering graduate will be able to

PO 1: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an

1. Choice based credit system

B.Tech –ECE-Course Structure

One Credit Course (s)3

16HSX01 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS I

COs – POs Mapping

Internal Assessment Pattern

Sample question (s)

Analyze and Create

16MAX01 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS I

COs – POs Mapping

Internal Assessment Pattern

Sample question (s)

16PYX01 ENGINEERING PHYSICS

COs – POs Mapping

Uncertainty principle–Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductor–Fiberoptic sensors

Internal Assessment Pattern